WO2018047020A1 - Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device - Google Patents

Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018047020A1
WO2018047020A1 PCT/IB2017/052676 IB2017052676W WO2018047020A1 WO 2018047020 A1 WO2018047020 A1 WO 2018047020A1 IB 2017052676 W IB2017052676 W IB 2017052676W WO 2018047020 A1 WO2018047020 A1 WO 2018047020A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
region
film
display
display element
light
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2017/052676
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
山崎舜平
江口晋吾
池田寿雄
久保田大介
井坂史人
Original Assignee
株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 filed Critical 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所
Publication of WO2018047020A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018047020A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/044Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means
    • G06F3/0443Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means using a single layer of sensing electrodes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/136Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
    • G02F1/1362Active matrix addressed cells
    • G02F1/1368Active matrix addressed cells in which the switching element is a three-electrode device
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • G09F9/302Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements characterised by the form or geometrical disposition of the individual elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/46Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character is selected from a number of characters arranged one behind the other
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/044Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means
    • G06F3/0446Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means using a grid-like structure of electrodes in at least two directions, e.g. using row and column electrodes

Definitions

  • One embodiment of the present invention relates to a display panel, a display device, an input / output device, or an information processing device.
  • one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field.
  • the technical field of one embodiment of the invention disclosed in this specification and the like relates to an object, a method, or a manufacturing method.
  • one embodiment of the present invention relates to a process, a machine, a manufacture, or a composition (composition of matter). Therefore, as a technical field of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed more specifically in this specification, a semiconductor device, a display device, a light-emitting device, a power storage device, a memory device, a driving method thereof, or a manufacturing method thereof, Can be cited as an example.
  • a liquid crystal display device having a configuration in which a condensing unit and a pixel electrode are provided on the same surface side of the substrate, and a region that transmits visible light of the pixel electrode is provided on the optical axis of the condensing unit.
  • a liquid crystal display device having a configuration in which an anisotropic condensing unit having a condensing direction Y is used and a non-condensing direction Y and a major axis direction of a region of a pixel electrode that transmits visible light coincide with each other. (Patent Document 1).
  • an illumination light source is provided with a region (reflective region) for displaying light by reflecting light incident through the liquid crystal layer and a region (transmissive region) for displaying light by transmitting light from the backlight.
  • a region (reflective region) for displaying light by reflecting light incident through the liquid crystal layer
  • a region (transmissive region) for displaying light by transmitting light from the backlight.
  • Patent Document 2 a configuration that enables image display in both a reflection mode using external light and a transmission mode using a backlight.
  • two transistors connected to different pixel electrode layers are provided in one pixel, and the display of the reflective region and the display of the transmissive region are independently performed by operating the two transistors separately. Can be controlled.
  • An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel information processing device that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel display panel, a novel display device, a novel input / output device, a novel information processing device, or a novel semiconductor device.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is a display panel including a pixel.
  • the pixel includes an optical element, a coating film, a first display element, and a second display element.
  • the optical element has translucency, and the optical element includes a first region, a second region, and a third region.
  • the first region includes a region to which visible light is supplied
  • the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film
  • the third region has a function of emitting a part of the visible light.
  • the region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
  • the coating film has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film has a function of reflecting a part of visible light and supplying it to the third region.
  • the first display element includes a reflective film, the first display element has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film, and the reflective film has a shape that does not block the light emitted by the third region of the optical element. .
  • the second display element has a function of supplying visible light.
  • display can be performed by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element.
  • display using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element.
  • visible light supplied to the first region can be efficiently emitted from the third region.
  • the light supplied to the first region can be condensed and emitted from the third region.
  • the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region.
  • the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region.
  • the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which an optical element includes an optical axis.
  • the optical axis passes through the center of the first region to which visible light is supplied and the center of the third region.
  • the second region includes an inclined portion having an inclination of 45 ° or more with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis.
  • the display in which the second region has an inclined portion in a range of 0.05 ⁇ m or more and 0.2 ⁇ m or less from the end of the region where the visible light of the first region is supplied It is a panel.
  • a region to which visible light is supplied in the first region has an area larger than 10% of the area of the pixel, and the third region has 10% or less of the area of the pixel. It is said display panel provided with an area.
  • the reflective film has an area of 70% or more of the area of the pixel, and the sum of the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied and the area of the reflective film is larger than the area of the pixel.
  • the second region can collect light incident on the first region at various angles.
  • a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which the second region includes a light-transmitting material.
  • the translucent material has a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5.
  • the covering film includes a light-transmitting film, the light-transmitting film includes a region in contact with the second region, and the light-transmitting film has a refractive index lower than that of the second region.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which the coating film includes a metal film.
  • the coating film can reflect light efficiently.
  • a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel including a shape in which the first region is curved toward the third region.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel including a shape in which the first region is curved in a direction away from the third region.
  • region can be expanded, without expanding the projection area with respect to the plane orthogonal to an optical axis.
  • the area of the second display element formed along the first region can be increased without increasing the projected area with respect to the plane orthogonal to the optical axis.
  • the area of the second display element can be increased while maintaining a distance from the adjacent second display element.
  • the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region.
  • the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel including a lens.
  • the lens includes a region sandwiched between the optical element and the second display element, the lens includes a material having a refractive index of 1.3 or more and 2.5 or less, and the lens is a convex lens.
  • emits can be condensed toward the optical axis of an optical element, for example.
  • the light emitted from the second display element can be used efficiently.
  • the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered
  • the area of the second display element can be increased.
  • the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a pixel includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, an insulating film, and a pixel circuit.
  • the insulating film includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film, and the insulating film includes an opening.
  • the first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element.
  • the second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film, the second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening, and the second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit. Connected.
  • the second display element is electrically connected to the pixel circuit, the second display element has a function of emitting light toward the insulating film, and the second display element performs display using the first display element. It arrange
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel having a display region.
  • the display area includes a group of pixels, another group of pixels, scanning lines, and signal lines.
  • the plurality of pixels in the group includes the above-described pixels, and the plurality of pixels in the group are arranged in the row direction.
  • Another group of the plurality of pixels includes the above-described pixels, and the other group of the plurality of pixels is arranged in the column direction intersecting the row direction.
  • the scan line is electrically connected to a plurality of pixels in a group, and the signal line is electrically connected to a plurality of pixels in another group.
  • the first display element and the second display element that displays using a method different from the first display element Can be driven.
  • the first display element and the second display element that displays using a method different from the first display element can be driven.
  • diffusion of impurities between the first display element and the second display element or between the first display element and the pixel circuit can be suppressed.
  • a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is a display device including the display panel and a control unit.
  • the control unit has a function of supplying image information and control information, the control unit has a function of generating the first information or the second information based on the image information, and the control unit has the first information and the second information. It has a function to supply information.
  • the display panel has a function of being supplied with the first information and the second information.
  • the first display element has a function of displaying based on the first information
  • the second display element has a function of displaying based on the second information
  • image information can be displayed using the first display element.
  • image information can be displayed using the second display element.
  • the image information can be displayed using the second display element so as to overlap with the image information displayed using the first display element.
  • image information displayed using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is an input / output device including an input portion and a display portion.
  • the display unit includes the display panel.
  • the input unit includes a region overlapping with the display unit, the input unit includes a detection region, the detection region includes a detection element, and the detection element has a function of detecting an object close to the region overlapping with the pixel.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is the above input / output device in which the detection region includes a control line and a detection signal line.
  • the control line has a function of supplying a control signal
  • the detection signal line has a function of being supplied with a detection signal
  • the detection element is electrically connected to the control line and the detection signal line, and the detection element has a function of supplying a detection signal that changes based on a distance to the area adjacent to the pixel and a control signal, and the detection element A first electrode; and a second electrode.
  • the first electrode includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel, and the first electrode is electrically connected to the control line.
  • the second electrode includes a region having a light-transmitting property in a region overlapping with the pixel, the second electrode is electrically connected to the detection signal line, and the second electrode is partially connected to the region overlapping with the pixel. Is arranged so as to form an electric field between the first electrode and the first electrode.
  • position information can be input using a finger or the like that is brought close to the display portion as a pointer.
  • the position information can be associated with image information displayed on the display unit.
  • One embodiment of the present invention includes one or more of a keyboard, a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an imaging device, a voice input device, a viewpoint input device, and a posture detection device, And an information processing apparatus including a display panel.
  • image information or control information can be generated by the arithmetic device.
  • a novel information processing apparatus that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • the terms “source” and “drain” of a transistor interchange with each other depending on the polarity of the transistor or the level of potential applied to each terminal.
  • a terminal to which a low potential is applied is called a source
  • a terminal to which a high potential is applied is called a drain
  • a terminal to which a high potential is applied is called a source.
  • the connection relationship between transistors may be described on the assumption that the source and the drain are fixed. However, the names of the source and the drain are actually switched according to the above-described potential relationship. .
  • the source of a transistor means a source region that is part of a semiconductor film functioning as an active layer or a source electrode connected to the semiconductor film.
  • a drain of a transistor means a drain region that is part of the semiconductor film or a drain electrode connected to the semiconductor film.
  • the gate means a gate electrode.
  • the state where the transistors are connected in series means, for example, a state where only one of the source and the drain of the first transistor is connected to only one of the source and the drain of the second transistor.
  • the state where the transistors are connected in parallel means that one of the source and the drain of the first transistor is connected to one of the source and the drain of the second transistor, and the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is connected. It means a state of being connected to the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor.
  • connection means an electrical connection, and corresponds to a state where current, voltage, or potential can be supplied or transmitted. Therefore, the connected state does not necessarily indicate a directly connected state, and a wiring, a resistor, a diode, a transistor, or the like is provided so that current, voltage, or potential can be supplied or transmitted.
  • the state of being indirectly connected through a circuit element is also included in the category.
  • connection includes a case where one conductive film has functions of a plurality of components.
  • one of a first electrode and a second electrode of a transistor refers to a source electrode, and the other refers to a drain electrode.
  • a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a novel information processing device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a novel display panel, a novel display device, a novel input / output device, a novel information processing device, or a novel semiconductor device can be provided.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a top view illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment.
  • 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a bottom view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram illustrating a pixel circuit of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display device using a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment. Sectional drawing explaining the structure of the reflecting film of the display panel which concerns on Embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a top view illustrating a structure of a reflective film of a display panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a top view illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram and a projection view illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a method for driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a method for driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 8A and 8B illustrate a structure of an electronic device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of an input / output panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of an input / output panel according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of an input / output module according to an embodiment
  • the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention includes a pixel, and the pixel includes an optical element, a coating film, a first display element, and a second display element.
  • the optical element has translucency, a first region, a second region, and a third region.
  • the first region includes a region to which visible light is supplied
  • the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film
  • the third region has a function of emitting a part of visible light
  • the third region Comprises an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
  • the coating film has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film has a function of reflecting a part of visible light and supplying it to the third region.
  • the first display element includes a reflective film, and the first display element has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film.
  • the reflective film has a shape that does not block the light emitted by the third region of the optical element.
  • the second display element has a function of supplying visible light.
  • display can be performed by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element.
  • display using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element.
  • visible light supplied to the first region can be efficiently emitted from the third region.
  • the light supplied to the first region can be condensed and emitted from the third region.
  • the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region.
  • the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region.
  • the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 1A is a projection view of a pixel
  • FIG. 1B is an exploded view illustrating a part of the configuration of the pixel shown in FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view illustrating part of the structure of the pixel along the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A.
  • FIG. 1D illustrates the pixel illustrated in FIG. It is a top view to explain.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 2A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel taken along a cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of part of the pixel illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 2C is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of part of the pixel illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10A is a top view of the display panel
  • FIG. 10B is a top view illustrating part of the pixels of the display panel illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram illustrating the structure of the pixel illustrated in FIG.
  • 11 and 12 are cross-sectional views illustrating the structure of the display panel.
  • 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line X1-X2, the cutting line X3-X4, and the cutting line X5-X6 in FIG. 10A.
  • FIG. 11B is a partial view of FIG. It is a figure explaining.
  • FIG. 12A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line X7-X8 and the cutting line X9-X10 in FIG. 10A
  • FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating part of FIG.
  • FIG. 13A is a bottom view illustrating part of the pixels of the display panel illustrated in FIG. 10B, and FIG. 13B is illustrated with a part of the structure illustrated in FIG. 13A omitted.
  • FIG. 13B is a bottom view illustrating part of the pixels of the display panel illustrated in FIG. 10B, and FIG. 13B is illustrated with a part of the structure illustrated in FIG. 13A omitted.
  • FIG. 14 is a circuit diagram illustrating a structure of a pixel circuit included in the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15A is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention and a display device using the display panel.
  • FIG. 15B is a block diagram illustrating a structure of the pixel shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 16A is a block diagram illustrating a structure different from the structure of the display panel illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates a display device using the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • a variable having an integer value of 1 or more may be used for the sign.
  • (p) including a variable p that takes an integer value of 1 or more may be used as a part of a code that identifies any of the maximum p components.
  • a variable m that takes an integer value of 1 or more and (m, n) including a variable n may be used as part of a code that identifies any of the maximum m ⁇ n components.
  • a display panel 700 described in this embodiment includes a pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 15A).
  • the pixel 702 (i, j) includes an optical element 560, a coating film 565, a first display element 750 (i, j), and a second display element 550 (i, j) (FIG. 1A, (Refer FIG. 1 (B), FIG. 2 (A), and FIG. 2 (B)).
  • the optical element 560 has a light-transmitting property, and the optical element 560 includes a first region 560A, a second region 560B, and a third region 560C (FIGS. 1B, 1C, and 2B). )reference).
  • First region 560A includes a region to which visible light is supplied.
  • the first region 560A is supplied with visible light from the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • the second region 560B includes a region in contact with the coating film 565.
  • the third region 560C has a function of emitting part of visible light, and the third region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied.
  • the coating film 565 has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film 565 has a function of reflecting a part of visible light and supplying it to the third region 560C.
  • visible light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) can be reflected toward the third region 560C.
  • a part of visible light incident on the optical element 560 from the first region 560A is reflected by the coating film 565 in contact with the second region 560B, and the third region The region 560C can be ejected (see FIG. 2B).
  • the first display element 750 (i, j) includes a reflective film 751B, and the first display element 750 (i, j) has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 2A). ).
  • the reflective film 751B has a shape that does not block the light emitted from the third region 560C of the optical element 560 (see FIG. 1B).
  • a shape including a region 751H that does not block light in a region overlapping with the third region 560C can be used for the reflective film 751B.
  • a material in which a conductive film 751A having a light-transmitting property and a conductive film 751C having a light-transmitting property are stacked is used for a region overlapping with the third region 560C of the electrode 751 (i, j).
  • a material in which the reflective film 751B and the conductive film 751C are stacked can be used for a region that does not overlap with the third region 560C (see FIG. 2A).
  • the reflective film 751B can be used for a reflective liquid crystal element.
  • a reflective liquid crystal display element can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • the first display element 750 includes an electrode 751 (i, j), an electrode 752, and a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material.
  • the electrode 752 is disposed so as to form an electric field for controlling the alignment of the liquid crystal material between the electrode 751 (i, j) (see FIG. 2A).
  • the first display element 750 (i, j) includes an alignment film AF1 and an alignment film AF2.
  • the alignment film AF2 includes a region in which a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between the alignment film AF1.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of supplying visible light (see FIG. 2A).
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of supplying visible light to the first region 560A.
  • display can be performed by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element.
  • the first display element can use external light for display.
  • display using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element.
  • visible light supplied to the first region can be efficiently emitted from the third region.
  • the light supplied to the first region can be condensed and emitted from the third region.
  • the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region.
  • the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region.
  • the second region 560B of the optical element 560 included in the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a light-transmitting material.
  • the light-transmitting material has a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5 (see FIG. 2C).
  • the coating film 565 of the pixel 702 includes a light-transmitting film 565B.
  • the light-transmitting film 565B includes a region in contact with the second region 560B, and the light-transmitting film 565B includes a refractive index lower than that of the second region 560B.
  • the covering film 565 included in the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a metal film 565A.
  • the coating film can reflect light efficiently.
  • a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a part of the functional layer 520, a first display element 750 (i, j), and a second display element 550 (i, j) (FIG. 11). (See (A), FIG. 12 (A) and FIG. 14).
  • the functional layer 520 includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, an insulating film 501C, and a pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • the functional layer 520 includes an optical element 560 and a coating film 565 (see FIG. 11A).
  • the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) includes a transistor M, for example.
  • the functional layer 520 includes an insulating film 528, an insulating film 521A, an insulating film 521B, an insulating film 518, and an insulating film 516.
  • the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) has a function of driving the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 14).
  • the first display element and the second display element that displays using a method different from the first display element Can be driven.
  • power consumption can be reduced by using a reflective display element as the first display element.
  • an image can be favorably displayed with high contrast in an environment where the outside light is bright.
  • an image can be favorably displayed in a dark environment by using the second display element that emits light.
  • diffusion of impurities between the first display element and the second display element or between the first display element and the pixel circuit can be suppressed.
  • a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a switch, a transistor, a diode, a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, or the like can be used for the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • one or more transistors can be used for the switch.
  • a plurality of transistors connected in parallel, a plurality of transistors connected in series, and a plurality of transistors connected in combination of series and parallel can be used for one switch.
  • the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) is electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j), the signal line S2 (j), the scanning line G1 (i), the scanning line G2 (i), the wiring CSCOM, and the conductive film ANO. Connected (see FIG. 14). Note that although not illustrated, the conductive film 512A is electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j).
  • the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) includes a switch SW1 and a capacitor C11 (see FIG. 14).
  • Pixel circuit 530 (i, j) includes switch SW2, transistor M, and capacitor C12.
  • a transistor including a gate electrode electrically connected to the scan line G1 (i) and a first electrode electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j) can be used for the switch SW1. .
  • the capacitor C11 includes a first electrode that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW1, and a second electrode that is electrically connected to the wiring CSCOM.
  • a transistor including a gate electrode electrically connected to the scan line G2 (i) and a first electrode electrically connected to the signal line S2 (j) can be used for the switch SW2.
  • the transistor M includes a gate electrode that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW2, and a first electrode that is electrically connected to the conductive film ANO.
  • a transistor including a conductive film provided so that a semiconductor film is interposed between a gate electrode and the gate electrode can be used for the transistor M.
  • a conductive film that is electrically connected to a wiring that can supply the same potential as the gate electrode of the transistor M can be used for the conductive film.
  • the capacitor C12 includes a first electrode that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW2, and a second electrode that is electrically connected to the first electrode of the transistor M. .
  • first electrode of the first display element 750 (i, j) is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW1.
  • second electrode of the first display element 750 (i, j) is electrically connected to the wiring VCOM1. Accordingly, the first display element 750 can be driven.
  • the electrode 551 (i, j) of the second display element 550 (i, j) is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor M, and the electrode 552 of the second display element 550 (i, j). Is electrically connected to the conductive film VCOM2. Accordingly, the second display element 550 (i, j) can be driven.
  • the insulating film 501C includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film, and the insulating film 501C includes an opening 591A (see FIG. 12A).
  • the insulating film 501C includes an opening 591C.
  • the first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element 750 (i, j). Specifically, it is electrically connected to the electrode 751 (i, j) of the first display element 750 (i, j). Note that the electrode 751 (i, j) can be used for the first conductive film.
  • the second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film.
  • the second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening 591A.
  • the conductive film 512B can be used for the second conductive film.
  • the first conductive film electrically connected to the second conductive film in the opening 591A provided in the insulating film 501C can be referred to as a through electrode.
  • the second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • a conductive film functioning as a source electrode or a drain electrode of a transistor used for the switch SW1 of the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) can be used for the second conductive film.
  • Second Display Element 550 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) (see FIGS. 11A and 14).
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the functional layer 520.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the opening provided in the insulating film 501C or the insulating film 501C, for example.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) uses the second display element 550 (i, j) in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized. It is arranged so that the displayed display can be visually recognized. For example, the direction in which the external light is incident and reflected on the first display element 750 (i, j) that displays the image information by controlling the intensity of reflecting the external light is shown in the figure using a dashed arrow ( (See FIG. 12A). Further, the direction in which the second display element 550 (i, j) emits light in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized is indicated by a solid line arrow. This is shown in the figure (see FIG. 11A).
  • the display using the 2nd display element can be visually recognized in a part of field which can visually recognize the display using the 1st display element.
  • the user can visually recognize the display without changing the posture of the display panel.
  • the object color expressed by the light reflected by the first display element can be multiplied by the light source color expressed by the light emitted by the second display element.
  • a pictorial display can be performed using the object color and the light source color.
  • the second display element 550 includes an electrode 551 (i, j), an electrode 552, and a layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material (see FIG. 11A). ).
  • the electrode 552 includes a region overlapping with the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material includes a region sandwiched between the electrode 551 (i, j) and the electrode 552.
  • the electrode 551 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) at the connection portion 522. Note that the electrode 551 (i, j) is electrically connected to the conductive film ANO, and the electrode 552 is electrically connected to the conductive film VCOM2 (see FIG. 14).
  • the insulating film 521 includes a region sandwiched between the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 11A).
  • a stacked film can be used for the insulating film 521.
  • a stacked film of the insulating films 521A and 521B can be used for the insulating film 521.
  • the insulating film 528 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the substrate 570, and includes an opening in a region overlapping with the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • the insulating film 528 formed along the periphery of the electrode 551 (i, j) prevents a short circuit between the electrode 551 (i, j) and the electrode 552.
  • the insulating film 518 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • the insulating film 518 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the transistor M.
  • the insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 518 and the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • the insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 518 and the transistor M.
  • the display panel 700 can include the insulating film 501B.
  • the insulating film 501B includes an opening 592A, an opening 592B, and an opening 592C (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
  • the opening 592A includes a region overlapping with the electrode 751 (i, j) or a region overlapping with the insulating film 501C.
  • the opening 592B includes a region overlapping with the conductive film 511B (see FIG. 11A).
  • the opening 592C includes a region overlapping with the conductive film 511C (see FIG. 12A).
  • the display panel 700 described in this embodiment includes a display region 231 (see FIG. 15A).
  • Display area 231 The display region 231 is scanned with a group of a plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) and another group of a plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m, j).
  • a line G1 (i) and a signal line S1 (j) are included (see FIG. 15A).
  • the scanning line G2 (i), the wiring CSCOM, the conductive film ANO, and the signal line S2 (j) are included.
  • i is an integer of 1 to m
  • j is an integer of 1 to n
  • m and n are integers of 1 or more.
  • a group of the plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) includes a pixel 702 (i, j), and a group of the plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) includes Arranged in the row direction (direction indicated by arrow R1 in the figure).
  • the other group of the plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m, j) includes the pixel 702 (i, j), and the other group of the plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m , J) are arranged in a column direction (direction indicated by an arrow C1 in the drawing) intersecting the row direction.
  • the scan line G1 (i) and the scan line G2 (i) are electrically connected to a group of the plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) arranged in the row direction.
  • the signal line S1 (j) and the signal line S2 (j) are electrically connected to another group of the plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m, j) arranged in the column direction. .
  • the display panel 700 described in this embodiment can include the driver circuit GD or the driver circuit SD (see FIGS. 10A and 15).
  • the drive circuit GD has a function of supplying a selection signal based on the control information.
  • a function of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher is provided based on the control information. Thereby, a moving image can be displayed smoothly.
  • it has a function of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute based on the control information. Thereby, a still image can be displayed in a state where flicker is suppressed.
  • the display panel can include a plurality of driver circuits.
  • the display panel 700B includes a driver circuit GDA and a driver circuit GDB (see FIG. 16A).
  • the frequency with which the drive circuit GDA supplies the selection signal and the frequency with which the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal can be made different.
  • the selection signal can be supplied to another region displaying the moving image at a frequency higher than the frequency of supplying the selection signal to one region displaying the still image.
  • the drive circuit SD includes a drive circuit SD1 and a drive circuit SD2.
  • the drive circuit SD1 has a function of supplying an image signal based on the information V11
  • the drive circuit SD2 has a function of supplying an image signal based on the information V12 (see FIG. 15A).
  • the drive circuit SD1 or the drive circuit SD2 has a function of generating an image signal and a function of supplying the image signal to a pixel circuit that is electrically connected to one display element. Specifically, it has a function of generating a signal whose polarity is inverted. Thereby, for example, a liquid crystal display element can be driven.
  • various sequential circuits such as a shift register can be used for the drive circuit SD.
  • an integrated circuit in which the drive circuit SD1 and the drive circuit SD2 are integrated can be used for the drive circuit SD.
  • an integrated circuit formed on a silicon substrate can be used for the drive circuit SD.
  • an integrated circuit can be mounted on a terminal by using a COG (Chip on glass) method or a COF (Chip on Film) method.
  • a COG Chip on glass
  • COF Chip on Film
  • an integrated circuit can be mounted on a terminal using an anisotropic conductive film.
  • the display panel 700 described in this embodiment includes a functional layer 720, a terminal 519B, a terminal 519C, a substrate 570, a substrate 770, a bonding layer 505, a sealing material 705, a structure KB1, a functional film 770P, and a functional film 770D. Etc. (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
  • the display panel described in this embodiment includes a functional layer 720.
  • the functional layer 720 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the insulating film 501C.
  • the functional layer 720 includes a light-blocking film BM, an insulating film 771, and a coloring film CF1 (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
  • the light-shielding film BM includes an opening in a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j) (see FIG. 12A).
  • the colored film CF1 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • the insulating film 771 includes a region sandwiched between the colored film CF1 and the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material or a region sandwiched between the light shielding film BM and the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material.
  • corrugation based on the thickness of colored film CF1 can be made flat.
  • impurity diffusion from the light-blocking film BM, the coloring film CF1, or the like to the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material can be suppressed.
  • Terminal 519B, Terminal 519C >>
  • the display panel described in this embodiment includes a terminal 519B and a terminal 519C (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
  • the terminal 519B includes a conductive film 511B.
  • the terminal 519B is electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j).
  • the terminal 519C includes a conductive film 511C.
  • the conductive film 511C is electrically connected to, for example, the wiring VCOM1.
  • the conductive material CP is sandwiched between the terminal 519C and the electrode 752, and has a function of electrically connecting the terminal 519C and the electrode 752.
  • conductive particles can be used for the conductive material CP.
  • Substrate 570 Substrate 770
  • the display panel described in this embodiment includes a substrate 570 and a substrate 770.
  • the substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the substrate 570.
  • the substrate 770 includes a region that sandwiches the functional layer 520 with the substrate 570.
  • the substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • a material in which birefringence is suppressed can be used for the region.
  • the display panel described in this embodiment includes a bonding layer 505, a sealing material 705, and a structure KB1.
  • the bonding layer 505 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 together.
  • the sealing material 705 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770 and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770 together.
  • the structure KB1 has a function of providing a predetermined gap between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770.
  • Functional film 770P ⁇ Functional film 770P, Functional film 770D
  • the display panel described in this embodiment includes a functional film 770P and a functional film 770D.
  • the functional film 770P includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • the functional film 770D includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • the functional film 770D is disposed so as to sandwich the substrate 770 with the first display element 750 (i, j). Thereby, for example, the light reflected by the first display element 750 (i, j) can be diffused.
  • the display panel 700 includes a substrate 570, a substrate 770, a structure KB1, a sealing material 705, or a bonding layer 505.
  • the display panel 700 includes the functional layer 520, the optical element 560, the coating film 565, the insulating film 521, or the insulating film 528.
  • the display panel 700 includes a signal line S1 (j), a signal line S2 (j), a scanning line G1 (i), a scanning line G2 (i), a wiring CSCOM, or a conductive film ANO.
  • the display panel 700 includes a first conductive film or a second conductive film.
  • the display panel 700 includes a terminal 519B, a terminal 519C, a conductive film 511B, or a conductive film 511C.
  • the display panel 700 includes a pixel circuit 530 (i, j) or a switch SW1.
  • the display panel 700 includes a first display element 750 (i, j), an electrode 751 (i, j), a reflective film, an opening, a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material, or an electrode 752.
  • the display panel 700 includes the alignment film AF1, the alignment film AF2, the coloring film CF1, the light shielding film BM, the insulating film 771, the functional film 770P, or the functional film 770D.
  • the display panel 700 includes the second display element 550 (i, j), the electrode 551 (i, j), the electrode 552, or the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
  • the display panel 700 includes the insulating film 501B or the insulating film 501C.
  • the display panel 700 includes a drive circuit GD or a drive circuit SD.
  • Substrate 570 A material having heat resistance high enough to withstand heat treatment in the manufacturing process can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a material having a thickness of 0.7 mm or less and a thickness of 0.1 mm or more can be used for the substrate 570.
  • a material polished to a thickness of about 0.1 mm can be used.
  • a large glass substrate can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Thus, a large display device can be manufactured.
  • An organic material, an inorganic material, a composite material of an organic material and an inorganic material, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • an inorganic material such as glass, ceramics, or metal can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • alkali-free glass, soda-lime glass, potash glass, crystal glass, aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, quartz, sapphire, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic oxynitride film, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • Stainless steel, aluminum, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a single crystal semiconductor substrate made of silicon or silicon carbide, a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate, a compound semiconductor substrate such as silicon germanium, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a semiconductor element can be formed on the substrate 570 or the like.
  • an organic material such as a resin, a resin film, or plastic can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a resin film or a resin plate such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a composite material in which a film such as a metal plate, a thin glass plate, or an inorganic material is bonded to a resin film or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate metal, glass, inorganic material, or the like is dispersed in a resin film can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate resin, an organic material, or the like is dispersed in an inorganic material can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a single layer material or a material in which a plurality of layers are stacked can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a material in which a base material and an insulating film that prevents diffusion of impurities contained in the base material are stacked can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a material in which one or a plurality of films selected from a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, or the like that prevents diffusion of impurities contained in glass is used for the substrate 570 or the like. be able to.
  • a material in which a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or the like, which prevents resin and diffusion of impurities that permeate the resin from being stacked, can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a resin film such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin, a resin plate, a laminated material, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a material including a resin having a siloxane bond such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon, aramid, or the like), polyimide, polycarbonate, polyurethane, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, or silicone can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyethersulfone (PES), acrylic, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PEN polyethylene naphthalate
  • PES polyethersulfone
  • acrylic acrylic
  • COP cycloolefin polymer
  • COC cycloolefin copolymer
  • paper, wood, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a flexible substrate can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
  • a method of directly forming a transistor, a capacitor, or the like over a substrate can be used.
  • a method in which a transistor, a capacitor, or the like is formed over a substrate for a process that has heat resistance to heat applied during the manufacturing process, and the formed transistor, capacitor, or the like is transferred to the substrate 570 or the like can be used.
  • a transistor or a capacitor can be formed over a flexible substrate.
  • Substrate 770 For example, a material that can be used for the substrate 570 can be used for the substrate 770. For example, a material having a light-transmitting property selected from materials that can be used for the substrate 570 can be used for the substrate 770. Alternatively, a material with suppressed birefringence selected from materials that can be used for the substrate 570 can be used for the substrate 770.
  • aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, sapphire, or the like can be suitably used for the substrate 770 disposed on the side closer to the user of the display panel. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display panel from being damaged or damaged due to use.
  • a resin film such as a cycloolefin polymer (COP), a cycloolefin copolymer (COC), or triacetyl cellulose (TAC) can be suitably used for the substrate 770.
  • COP cycloolefin polymer
  • COC cycloolefin copolymer
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • a material having a thickness of 0.7 mm or less and a thickness of 0.1 mm or more can be used for the substrate 770.
  • a polished substrate can be used to reduce the thickness.
  • the functional film 770D can be disposed close to the first display element 750 (i, j). As a result, blurring of the image can be reduced and the image can be clearly displayed.
  • Structure KB1 For example, an organic material, an inorganic material, or a composite material of an organic material and an inorganic material can be used for the structure KB1 or the like. Thereby, a predetermined space
  • polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, or a composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the structure KB1.
  • a material having photosensitivity may be used.
  • Sealing material 705 An inorganic material, an organic material, a composite material of an inorganic material and an organic material, or the like can be used for the sealant 705 or the like.
  • an organic material such as a heat-meltable resin or a curable resin can be used for the sealing material 705 or the like.
  • an organic material such as a reactive curable adhesive, a photocurable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, and / or an anaerobic adhesive can be used for the sealing material 705 or the like.
  • an adhesive including epoxy resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, phenol resin, polyimide resin, imide resin, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resin, PVB (polyvinyl butyral) resin, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resin, and the like. Can be used for the sealing material 705 or the like.
  • junction Layer 505 a material that can be used for the sealant 705 can be used for the bonding layer 505.
  • Insulating film 521 For example, an insulating inorganic material, an insulating organic material, or an insulating composite material including an inorganic material and an organic material can be used for the insulating film 521 or the like.
  • an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic oxynitride film, or the like, or a stacked material in which a plurality selected from these films is stacked can be used for the insulating film 521 and the like.
  • a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like, or a film including a stacked material in which a plurality selected from these films is stacked can be used for the insulating film 521 or the like.
  • polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, or the like, or a laminated material or composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the insulating film 521 and the like.
  • a material having photosensitivity may be used.
  • steps originating from various structures overlapping with the insulating film 521 can be planarized.
  • the optical element 560 includes an optical axis Z (see FIG. 1C).
  • the optical axis Z passes through the center of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied and the center of the third region 560C.
  • the second region 560B includes an inclined portion having an inclination ⁇ of 45 ° or more with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis Z, preferably 75 ° or more and 85 ° or less.
  • the illustrated second region 560B generally has an inclination of about 60 ° with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis Z.
  • the second region 560B includes the inclined portion in a range of 0.05 ⁇ m or more and 0.2 ⁇ m or less from the end of the region of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied. Note that in the case where the second display element 550 (i, j) is in contact with the first region 560A, the region to which the visible light of the first region 560A is supplied is the second display element 550 (i, j). It is equal to the area of a region that can supply visible light. For example, the slope of the second region 560B shown is at a distance d from the edge of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
  • the region to which visible light is supplied in the first region 560A has an area larger than 10% of the area of the pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 1D).
  • the third region 560C has an area of 10% or less of the area of the pixel 702 (i, j).
  • the reflective film 751B has an area of 70% or more of the area of the pixel 702 (i, j).
  • the sum of the area of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied and the area of the reflective film 751B is larger than the area of the pixel 702 (i, j).
  • a rectangular pixel 27 ⁇ m wide and 81 ⁇ m long has an area of 2187 ⁇ m 2 . Visible light is supplied to the area of 324 ⁇ m 2 in the first region 560A.
  • the third region 560C has an area of 81 ⁇ m 2
  • the reflective film 751B has an area of 1894 ⁇ m 2 .
  • the area of the third region 560C to which visible light is supplied corresponds to approximately 14.8% of the pixel area.
  • the area of the reflective film 751B corresponds to about 86.6% of the area of the pixel.
  • the sum of the area of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied and the area of the reflective film 751B is 2218 ⁇ m 2 .
  • the second region can collect light incident on the first region at various angles.
  • a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a plurality of materials can be used for the optical element 560.
  • a plurality of materials selected so that the difference in refractive index is in a range of 0.2 or less can be used for the optical element 560. Thereby, reflection or scattering inside the optical element can be suppressed. Alternatively, light loss can be suppressed.
  • various shapes can be used for the optical element 560 (see FIG. 17E).
  • a circle or a polygon can be used for the cross-sectional shape of the optical element 560.
  • a plane or a curved surface can be used for the second region 560B of the optical element 560.
  • Coating film 565 A single-layer film or a stacked film can be used for the coating film 565.
  • a material in which a film having a light-transmitting property and a film having a reflective property are stacked can be used for the coating film 565.
  • an inorganic material such as an oxide film, a fluoride film, or a sulfide film can be used for the light-transmitting film.
  • a metal can be used for a film having reflectivity.
  • a material containing silver can be used for the coating film 565.
  • a material containing silver and palladium or a material containing silver and copper can be used for the reflective film.
  • a dielectric multilayer film can be used as a film having reflectivity.
  • Insulating film 528 For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 528 or the like. Specifically, a film containing polyimide with a thickness of 1 ⁇ m can be used for the insulating film 528.
  • Insulating film 501B For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 501B. For example, a material having a function of supplying hydrogen can be used for the insulating film 501B.
  • a material in which a material containing silicon and oxygen and a material containing silicon and nitrogen are stacked can be used for the insulating film 501B.
  • a material having a function of releasing hydrogen by heating or the like and supplying the released hydrogen to another structure can be used for the insulating film 501B.
  • a material having a function of releasing hydrogen taken in during the manufacturing process by heating or the like and supplying the hydrogen to another structure can be used for the insulating film 501B.
  • a film containing silicon and oxygen formed by a chemical vapor deposition method using silane or the like as a source gas can be used for the insulating film 501B.
  • a material in which a material containing silicon and oxygen having a thickness of 200 nm to 600 nm and a material containing silicon and nitrogen and having a thickness of about 200 nm can be used for the insulating film 501B.
  • Insulating film 501C For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 501C. Specifically, a material containing silicon and oxygen can be used for the insulating film 501C. Thereby, the diffusion of impurities into the pixel circuit or the second display element can be suppressed.
  • a 200-nm-thick film containing silicon, oxygen, and nitrogen can be used for the insulating film 501C.
  • a conductive material can be used for the wiring or the like.
  • a conductive material is formed using a signal line S1 (j), a signal line S2 (j), a scanning line G1 (i), a scanning line G2 (i), a wiring CSCOM, a conductive film ANO, a terminal 519B, It can be used for the terminal 519C, the conductive film 511B, the conductive film 511C, or the like.
  • an inorganic conductive material an organic conductive material, a metal, a conductive ceramic, or the like can be used for the wiring.
  • a metal element selected from aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, copper, chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, nickel, iron, cobalt, palladium, or manganese can be used for the wiring or the like.
  • an alloy containing the above metal element can be used for the wiring or the like.
  • an alloy of copper and manganese is suitable for fine processing using a wet etching method.
  • a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on an aluminum film a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a tantalum nitride film or
  • a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is stacked on a tungsten nitride film, a titanium film, and a three-layer structure in which an aluminum film is stacked on the titanium film and a titanium film is further formed thereon can be used for wiring or the like.
  • a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, or zinc oxide to which gallium is added can be used for the wiring or the like.
  • a film containing graphene or graphite can be used for the wiring or the like.
  • the film containing graphene can be formed.
  • the reduction method include a method of applying heat and a method of using a reducing agent.
  • a film containing metal nanowires can be used for wiring or the like.
  • a nanowire containing silver can be used.
  • a conductive polymer can be used for wiring or the like.
  • the conductive material ACF1 can be used to electrically connect the terminal 519B and the flexible printed circuit board FPC1.
  • First conductive film, second conductive film For example, a material that can be used for a wiring or the like can be used for the first conductive film or the second conductive film.
  • the electrode 751 (i, j), the wiring, or the like can be used for the first conductive film.
  • a conductive film 512B functioning as a source electrode or a drain electrode of a transistor that can be used for the switch SW1, a wiring, or the like can be used for the second conductive film.
  • First display element 750 (i, j) For example, a display element having a function of controlling reflection or transmission of light can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j). For example, a structure in which a liquid crystal element and a polarizing plate are combined, a shutter-type MEMS display element, an optical interference-type MEMS display element, or the like can be used. By using a reflective display element, power consumption of the display panel can be suppressed.
  • a display element using a microcapsule method, an electrophoresis method, an electrowetting method, or the like can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • a reflective liquid crystal display element can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • IPS In-Plane-Switching
  • TN Transmission Nematic
  • FFS Fe Field Switched
  • ASM Analy Symmetrically Applied Micro-cell
  • OCB OpticBridge
  • a liquid crystal element that can be driven using a driving method such as a Crystal) mode or an AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liquid Crystal) mode can be used.
  • VA vertical alignment
  • MVA Multi-Domain Vertical Alignment
  • PVA Plasma Vertical Alignment
  • ECB Electrical Controlled Birefringence ACP mode
  • CPB CPB mode
  • a liquid crystal element that can be driven by a driving method such as an (Advanced Super-View) mode can be used.
  • the first display element 750 includes a first electrode, a second electrode, and a layer containing a liquid crystal material.
  • the layer including a liquid crystal material includes a liquid crystal material whose alignment can be controlled using a voltage between the first electrode and the second electrode.
  • an electric field in a thickness direction (also referred to as a vertical direction) of a layer including a liquid crystal material or a direction intersecting with the vertical direction also referred to as a horizontal direction or an oblique direction
  • an electric field in a thickness direction also referred to as a vertical direction
  • a layer including a liquid crystal material or a direction intersecting with the vertical direction also referred to as a horizontal direction or an oblique direction
  • a thermotropic liquid crystal, a low molecular liquid crystal, a polymer liquid crystal, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal, a ferroelectric liquid crystal, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal, or the like can be used for the layer containing a liquid crystal material.
  • a liquid crystal material exhibiting a cholesteric phase, a smectic phase, a cubic phase, a chiral nematic phase, an isotropic phase, or the like can be used.
  • a liquid crystal material exhibiting a blue phase can be used.
  • a negative liquid crystal material can be used for the layer including the liquid crystal material.
  • a liquid crystal material having a specific resistivity of 1.0 ⁇ 10 13 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 14 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, and more preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 15 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more is used.
  • the layer 753 containing a material Used for the layer 753 containing a material.
  • permeability of the 1st display element 750 (i, j) can be suppressed.
  • flickering of the first display element 750 (i, j) can be suppressed.
  • the frequency of rewriting the first display element 750 (i, j) can be reduced.
  • Electrode 751 (i, j) For example, a material used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 751 (i, j). Specifically, a reflective film can be used for the electrode 751 (i, j). For example, a material in which a conductive film having a light-transmitting property and a reflective film having an opening are stacked can be used for the electrode 751 (i, j).
  • a material that reflects visible light can be used for the reflective film.
  • a material containing silver can be used for the reflective film.
  • a material containing silver and palladium or a material containing silver and copper can be used for the reflective film.
  • the reflective film reflects light transmitted through the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material.
  • the first display element 750 can be a reflective liquid crystal element.
  • a material having irregularities on the surface can be used for the reflective film. Thereby, incident light can be reflected in various directions to display white.
  • the first conductive film, the electrode 751 (i, j), or the like can be used for the reflective film.
  • a film including a region in which a light-transmitting conductive film 751A is sandwiched between the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material can be used for the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 17A).
  • a film including a region between the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material and a light-transmitting conductive film 751C can be used for the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 17B).
  • a film including a region between the light-transmitting conductive film 751A and the light-transmitting conductive film 751C can be used for the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 17C).
  • a film having reflectivity with respect to visible light may be used for the first electrode 751 (i, j) (see FIG. 17D).
  • the reflective film has a shape in which a region 751H that does not block the light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) is formed (see FIGS. 18A to 18C).
  • a shape including one or a plurality of openings can be used for the reflective film.
  • a shape such as a polygon, a quadrangle, an ellipse, a circle, or a cross can be used for the region 751H.
  • an elongated streak shape, a slit shape, or a checkered shape can be used for the region 751H.
  • the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) will be dark.
  • the display using the second display element 550 (i, j) becomes dark.
  • the reliability of the second display element 550 (i, j) may be impaired.
  • the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 1) is arranged on a straight line extending in the row direction (the direction indicated by the arrow R1 in the drawing) passing through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j). It is not provided (see FIG. 18A).
  • the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 1, j) passes through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and extends in the column direction (the direction indicated by the arrow C1 in the drawing). It is not disposed on top (see FIG. 18B).
  • the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 2) is disposed on a straight line extending in the row direction passing through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 18A).
  • a region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 1) has a straight line between the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 2). It arrange
  • the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 2, j) is disposed on a straight line passing through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and extending in the column direction (FIG. 18 ( B)).
  • the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 1, j) is between the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 2, j). It arrange
  • the second display element of another pixel adjacent to the one pixel is changed to the second display element of the one pixel. It can be kept away from the display element.
  • a display element that displays a color different from the color displayed by the second display element of one pixel can be provided in the second display element of another pixel adjacent to the one pixel.
  • the difficulty of arranging a plurality of display elements that display different colors adjacent to each other can be reduced. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • an electrode 751 (i, j) or the like whose end is cut short so that the region 751H is formed can be used for the reflective film (see FIG. 18C).
  • an electrode 751 (i, j) or the like having a shape in which an end is cut so that the column direction (the direction indicated by the arrow C1 in the drawing) is shortened can be used.
  • Electrode 752 For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 752. For example, a material having a light-transmitting property selected from materials that can be used for wiring and the like can be used for the electrode 752.
  • a conductive oxide, a metal film that is thin enough to transmit light, a metal nanowire, or the like can be used for the electrode 752.
  • a conductive oxide containing indium can be used for the electrode 752.
  • a metal thin film with a thickness of 1 nm to 10 nm can be used for the electrode 752.
  • a metal nanowire containing silver can be used for the electrode 752.
  • indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide to which gallium is added, zinc oxide to which aluminum is added, or the like can be used for the electrode 752.
  • Alignment film AF1 Alignment film AF2
  • a material containing polyimide or the like can be used for the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2.
  • a material that is rubbed so that the liquid crystal material is aligned in a predetermined direction or a material that is formed using a photo-alignment technique can be used.
  • a film containing soluble polyimide can be used for the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2.
  • the temperature required for forming the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2 can be lowered.
  • damage to other components when forming the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2 can be reduced.
  • Colored film CF1 A material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used for the colored film CF1.
  • the colored film CF1 can be used for a color filter, for example.
  • a material that transmits blue, green, or red light can be used for the colored film CF1.
  • a material that transmits yellow light, white light, or the like can be used for the colored film.
  • Light shielding film BM For example, a material that suppresses light transmission can be used for the light-shielding film BM. Thereby, the light shielding film BM can be used for, for example, a black matrix.
  • a resin containing a pigment or a dye can be used for the light shielding film BM.
  • a resin in which carbon black is dispersed can be used for the light shielding film.
  • an inorganic compound, an inorganic oxide, a composite oxide including a solid solution of a plurality of inorganic oxides, or the like can be used for the light-shielding film BM.
  • a black chromium film, a film containing cupric oxide, a film containing copper chloride or tellurium chloride can be used for the light-shielding film BM.
  • Insulating film 771 For example, polyimide, epoxy resin, acrylic resin, or the like can be used for the insulating film 771.
  • Functional film 770P For example, an antireflection film, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a light collecting film, or the like can be used for the functional film 770P or the functional film 770D.
  • a film containing a dichroic dye can be used for the functional film 770P or the functional film 770D.
  • a material having a columnar structure including an axis along a direction intersecting the surface of the base material can be used for the functional film 770P or the functional film 770D.
  • an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust a water-repellent film that makes it difficult to adhere dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses generation of scratches due to use, and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • a circularly polarizing film can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • a light diffusion film can be used for the functional film 770D.
  • Second display element 550 (i, j) For example, a display element having a function of emitting light can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j). Specifically, an organic electroluminescence element, an inorganic electroluminescence element, a light emitting diode, a QDLED (Quantum Dot LED), or the like can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • an organic electroluminescence element, an inorganic electroluminescence element, a light emitting diode, a QDLED (Quantum Dot LED), or the like can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • a light-emitting organic compound can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
  • a quantum dot can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
  • the half value width is narrow and it is possible to emit brightly colored light.
  • a laminated material laminated so as to emit blue light a laminated material laminated so as to emit green light, or a laminated material laminated so as to emit red light, etc.
  • a laminated material laminated so as to emit blue light a laminated material laminated so as to emit green light
  • a laminated material laminated so as to emit red light etc.
  • a strip-shaped stacked material that is long in the column direction along the signal line S2 (j) can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
  • a stacked material stacked so as to emit white light can be used for the layer 553 (j) including a light-emitting material.
  • a layer containing a luminescent material including a fluorescent material that emits blue light, a layer containing a material other than a fluorescent material that emits green and red light, or a fluorescent material that emits yellow light A layered material in which a layer including any of the above materials is stacked can be used for the layer 553 (j) including a light-emitting material.
  • a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • a material having a property of transmitting visible light and selected from materials that can be used for wirings or the like can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • a conductive oxide or a conductive oxide containing indium, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide to which gallium is added, or the like is used as the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • a metal film that is thin enough to transmit light can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • a metal film that transmits part of light and reflects another part of light can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • the microresonator structure can be provided in the second display element 550 (i, j). As a result, light with a predetermined wavelength can be extracted more efficiently than other light.
  • a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 552.
  • a material having reflectivity with respect to visible light can be used for the electrode 552.
  • ⁇ Drive circuit GD Various sequential circuits such as a shift register can be used for the drive circuit GD.
  • a transistor MD, a capacitor, or the like can be used for the drive circuit GD.
  • a transistor that can be used for the switch SW1 or a transistor including a semiconductor film that can be formed in the same process as the transistor M can be used.
  • a different structure from the transistor that can be used for the switch SW1 can be used for the transistor MD.
  • a transistor including the conductive film 524 can be used for the transistor MD (see FIG. 11B).
  • ⁇ Transistor> a semiconductor film that can be formed in the same process can be used for a transistor in a driver circuit and a pixel circuit.
  • a bottom-gate transistor, a top-gate transistor, or the like can be used as a driver circuit transistor or a pixel circuit transistor.
  • a bottom-gate transistor production line using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor can be easily modified to a bottom-gate transistor production line using an oxide semiconductor as a semiconductor.
  • a top gate type production line using polysilicon as a semiconductor can be easily modified to a top gate type transistor production line using an oxide semiconductor as a semiconductor. Both modifications can make effective use of existing production lines.
  • a transistor in which a semiconductor containing a Group 14 element is used for a semiconductor film can be used.
  • a semiconductor containing silicon can be used for the semiconductor film.
  • a transistor in which single crystal silicon, polysilicon, microcrystalline silicon, amorphous silicon, or the like is used for a semiconductor film can be used.
  • the temperature required for manufacturing a transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor is lower than that of a transistor using single crystal silicon as a semiconductor.
  • the field effect mobility of a transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor is higher than that of a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor.
  • the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved.
  • a pixel provided with extremely high definition, a gate driver circuit, and a source driver circuit can be formed over the same substrate. As a result, the number of parts constituting the electronic device can be reduced.
  • the reliability of a transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor is superior to a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor.
  • a transistor using a compound semiconductor can be used.
  • a semiconductor containing gallium arsenide can be used for the semiconductor film.
  • a transistor using an organic semiconductor can be used.
  • an organic semiconductor containing polyacenes or graphene can be used for the semiconductor film.
  • a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a semiconductor film can be used.
  • an oxide semiconductor containing indium or an oxide semiconductor containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film.
  • a transistor whose leakage current in an off state is smaller than that of a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor film can be used.
  • a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a semiconductor film can be used.
  • the time during which the pixel circuit can hold an image signal can be lengthened.
  • the selection signal can be supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute while suppressing the occurrence of flicker.
  • fatigue accumulated in the user of the information processing apparatus can be reduced.
  • power consumption associated with driving can be reduced.
  • a transistor including the semiconductor film 508, the conductive film 504, the conductive film 512A, and the conductive film 512B can be used for the switch SW1 (see FIG. 12B).
  • the insulating film 506 includes a region sandwiched between the semiconductor film 508 and the conductive film 504.
  • the conductive film 504 includes a region overlapping with the semiconductor film 508.
  • the conductive film 504 has a function of a gate electrode.
  • the insulating film 506 has a function of a gate insulating film.
  • the conductive films 512A and 512B are electrically connected to the semiconductor film 508.
  • the conductive film 512A has one of the function of the source electrode and the function of the drain electrode, and the conductive film 512B has the other of the function of the source electrode and the function of the drain electrode.
  • a transistor including the conductive film 524 can be used for a transistor in a driver circuit or a pixel circuit (see FIG. 11B).
  • the conductive film 524 includes a region in which the semiconductor film 508 is sandwiched between the conductive film 504 and the conductive film 504.
  • the insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the conductive film 524 and the semiconductor film 508.
  • the conductive film 524 can be electrically connected to a wiring that supplies the same potential as the conductive film 504.
  • a conductive film in which a 10-nm-thick film containing tantalum and nitrogen and a 300-nm-thick film containing copper are stacked can be used for the conductive film 504.
  • the film containing copper includes a region between which the film containing tantalum and nitrogen is sandwiched between the film containing copper.
  • a material in which a 400-nm-thick film containing silicon and nitrogen and a 200-nm-thick film containing silicon, oxygen, and nitrogen are stacked can be used for the insulating film 506.
  • the film containing silicon and nitrogen includes a region between the semiconductor film 508 and the film containing silicon, oxygen, and nitrogen.
  • a 25-nm-thick film containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the film containing tungsten includes a region in contact with the semiconductor film 508.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 4A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 4B is a cross-section having a configuration different from that of the pixel illustrated in FIG. FIG.
  • the configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is different from the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2, for example, in that the coating film 565 includes a region in contact with the insulating film 518.
  • the coating film 565 includes a region in contact with the insulating film 518.
  • a region in contact with the insulating film 518 can be formed in the coating film 565 by using a method of forming the coating film 565 in the opening provided in the insulating film 518.
  • the insulating film 521A in which an opening is formed in a region overlapping with the region 751H as a resist mask, the insulating film 518 and the like are etched to form an opening, and the coating film 565 is formed in the opening. Form (see FIG. 3).
  • the coating film 565 is formed over the insulating film 518 in which an opening is formed in a region overlapping with the region 751H (see FIG. 4A).
  • the insulating film 518 and the like are etched stepwise using a plurality of resist masks, and then a coating film 565 is formed. Accordingly, the shape of the coating film 565 and the shape of the second region 560B can be stepped (see FIG. 4B).
  • FIG. 5 illustrates the structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG.
  • the configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example can include a colored film CF2 (see FIG. 5). Note that the point that the functional layer 520 includes the colored film CF2 is different from, for example, the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
  • the functional layer 520 includes a colored film CF2.
  • the colored film CF2 includes a region sandwiched between the optical element 560 and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 5).
  • Colored film CF2 A material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used for the colored film CF2.
  • the colored film CF2 can be used for a color filter, for example.
  • a material that transmits blue, green, or red light can be used for the colored film CF2.
  • a material that transmits yellow light, white light, or the like can be used for the colored film.
  • a material having a function of converting irradiated light into light of a predetermined color can be used for the colored film CF2.
  • quantum dots can be used for the colored film CF2. Thereby, display with high color purity can be performed.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 6A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 6B includes a configuration different from that of the pixel illustrated in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a pixel.
  • the configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is different from the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2, for example, in that the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 518B or the insulating film 521C.
  • the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 518B or the insulating film 521C.
  • the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 518B between the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 6A).
  • an insulating film 518B is provided between the light-transmitting conductive film 751C and the optical element 560.
  • a stacked film of the insulating film 518A and the insulating film 518B can be used as the insulating film 518.
  • the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 521C between the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 6B).
  • the insulating film 521C is provided between the insulating film 521B and the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • a stacked film of the insulating film 521A, the insulating film 521B, and the insulating film 521C can be used as the insulating film 521.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 7B has a configuration different from that of the pixel illustrated in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a pixel.
  • the configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is different except that the first region 560A has a curved shape and the second display element 550 (i, j) has a curved shape, for example.
  • a configuration similar to that of the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2 is provided.
  • different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
  • the first region 560A has a shape curved toward the third region 560C (see FIG. 7A).
  • the first region 560A has a shape curved in a direction away from the third region 560C (see FIG. 7B).
  • region can be expanded, without expanding the projection area with respect to the plane orthogonal to an optical axis.
  • the area of the second display element formed along the first region can be increased without increasing the projected area with respect to the plane orthogonal to the optical axis.
  • the area of the second display element can be increased while maintaining a distance from the adjacent second display element.
  • the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region.
  • the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 8A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view illustrating part of FIG. 8A. is there.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates the structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 9A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 9B is a cross-section having a different structure from the pixel illustrated in FIG. 9A.
  • FIG. 9A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 9B is a cross-section having a different structure from the pixel illustrated in FIG. 9A.
  • the configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is the same as that of the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2 except that the lens 580 is provided.
  • different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
  • the display panel described in this embodiment includes a lens 580, and the lens 580 includes a region sandwiched between the optical element 560 and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 8A and FIG. 8). (See FIG. 8B).
  • the lens 580 includes a material having a refractive index of 1.5 to 2.5, and the lens 580 is a convex lens.
  • emits can be condensed toward the optical axis of an optical element, for example.
  • the light emitted from the second display element can be used efficiently.
  • the area of the second display element can be increased.
  • the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered
  • the area of the second display element can be increased.
  • a plano-convex lens can be used for the lens 580 (see FIGS. 8A and 9A).
  • a biconvex lens can be used for the lens 580 (see FIG. 9B).
  • a material that transmits visible light can be used for the lens 580.
  • a material having a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5 can be used for the lens 580.
  • an inorganic material or an organic material can be used for the lens 580.
  • a material containing an oxide or sulfide can be used for the lens 580.
  • cerium oxide, hafnium oxide, lanthanum oxide, magnesium oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, titanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zinc oxide, oxide containing indium and tin, oxide containing indium, gallium and zinc, etc. can be used for the lens 580.
  • zinc sulfide or the like can be used for the lens 580.
  • a material containing a resin can be used for the lens 580.
  • a resin into which chlorine, bromine, or iodine is introduced, a resin into which heavy metal atoms are introduced, a resin into which an aromatic ring is introduced, a resin into which sulfur is introduced, or the like can be used for the lens 580.
  • a resin including nanoparticles of a material having a higher refractive index than that of the resin can be used for the lens 580. Titanium oxide or zirconium oxide can be used for the nanoparticles.
  • FIG. 15A is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15B is a block diagram illustrating a structure of the pixel shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 16A is a block diagram illustrating a structure different from the structure of the display panel illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device described in this embodiment includes a control portion 238 and a display panel 700 (see FIG. 15A).
  • the control unit 238 has a function to which the image information V1 and the control information SS are supplied.
  • the control unit 238 has a function of generating the first information V11 and the second information V12 based on the image information V1.
  • the control unit 238 has a function of supplying the first information V11 and the second information V12.
  • control unit 238 includes a decompression circuit 234 and an image processing circuit 235M.
  • the display panel 700 has a function of being supplied with the first information V11 and the second information V12.
  • the display panel 700 includes a pixel 702 (i, j).
  • the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a first display element 750 (i, j) and a second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 15B).
  • the first display element 750 (i, j) has a function of displaying based on the first information V11, and the first display element 750 (i, j) is a reflective display element.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of displaying based on the second information V12, and the second display element 550 (i, j) is a light emitting element.
  • the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used for the display panel 700.
  • the display panel 700B can be used.
  • a television receiver system see FIG. 16B-1
  • a video monitor see FIG. 16B-2
  • a notebook computer see FIG. 16B-3
  • the like can be provided. .
  • the first display element can use external light for display.
  • image information can be displayed using the second display element.
  • the image information can be displayed using the second display element so as to overlap with the image information displayed using the first display element.
  • image information displayed using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element.
  • the expansion circuit 234 has a function of expanding the image information V1 supplied in a compressed state.
  • the decompression circuit 234 includes a storage unit.
  • the storage unit has a function of storing, for example, decompressed image information (see FIG. 15A).
  • the image processing circuit 235M includes, for example, an area 235M (1) and an area 235M (2).
  • the region 235M (1) or the region 235M (2) has a function of storing information included in the image information V1, for example.
  • the image processing circuit 235M includes, for example, a function of correcting the image information V1 based on a predetermined characteristic curve to generate information V11 and a function of supplying the information V11. Specifically, a function for generating the information V11 is provided so that the first display element displays a good image.
  • the image processing circuit 235M includes, for example, a function of correcting the image information V1 based on a predetermined characteristic curve to generate the information V12 and a function of supplying the information V12. Specifically, a function of generating information V12 is provided so that the second display element displays a good image.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates the structure of an input / output panel that can be used for the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20A is a top view of the input / output panel.
  • FIG. 20B is a schematic diagram for explaining a part of the input portion of the input / output panel, and
  • FIG. 20C is a schematic diagram for explaining a part of FIG. 20B.
  • 21 and 22 illustrate a structure of an input / output panel that can be used for the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 21A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line X1-X2, the cutting line X3-X4 in FIG. 20A, and the cutting line X5-X6 in FIG. 20C, and FIG. It is sectional drawing explaining the one part structure of A).
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along section line X7-X8 in FIG. 20C, X9-X10 in FIG. 20A, and section line X11-X12.
  • the input / output device described in this embodiment includes an input unit 240 and a display unit 230 (see FIG. 19).
  • the display panel 700 described in Embodiment 1 can be used for the display portion 230.
  • the input unit 240 includes an area overlapping with the display unit 230, and the input unit 240 includes a detection area 241 (see FIG. 19).
  • the detection area 241 includes a detection element 775 (g, h).
  • the detection element 775 (g, h) has a function of detecting an element close to a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j).
  • the input unit 240 includes a detection region 241, an oscillation circuit OSC, and a detection circuit DC (see FIG. 19).
  • the detection area 241 includes a control line CL (g) and a detection signal line ML (h).
  • the control line CL (g) has a function of supplying a control signal
  • the detection signal line ML (h) has a function of supplying a detection signal
  • Sensing element 775 (g, h)
  • the detection element 775 (g, h) is electrically connected to the control line CL (g) and the detection signal line ML (h).
  • the detection element 775 has a function of supplying a detection signal that changes based on a distance from a region adjacent to the region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j) and a control signal.
  • the sensing element 775 includes an electrode C (g) and an electrode M (h).
  • the electrode C (g) includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j), and the electrode C (g) is electrically connected to the control line CL (g).
  • the electrode M (h) includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j), and the electrode M (h) is electrically connected to the detection signal line ML (h).
  • the electrode M (h) is disposed so as to form an electric field between the electrode M (h) and the electrode C (g) that is partly blocked by the proximity of the region overlapping the pixel 702 (i, j).
  • position information can be input using a finger or the like that is brought close to the display portion as a pointer.
  • the position information can be associated with image information displayed on the display unit.
  • a conductive film having a light-transmitting property can be used for the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h).
  • a conductive film including an opening in a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j) can be used for the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h). Accordingly, it is possible to detect an object close to a region overlapping with the display panel without blocking the display on the display panel.
  • a metal film having higher conductivity than the transparent conductive film can be used for the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h). Thereby, the thickness of the input / output device can be reduced.
  • the light shielding film BM includes, for example, a region overlapping with the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h) and is sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the electrode C (g) or the substrate 770 and the detection signal line ML (h). Provide an area. Thereby, the intensity
  • the detection region 241 includes a group of detection elements 775 (g, 1) to detection elements 775 (g, q) and another group of detection elements 775 (1, h) to detection elements 775 (p, h). (See FIG. 19). Note that g is an integer of 1 to p, h is an integer of 1 to q, and p and q are integers of 1 or more.
  • the group of sensing elements 775 (g, 1) to 775 (g, q) includes the sensing elements 775 (g, h) and are arranged in the row direction (direction indicated by an arrow R2 in the drawing). Note that the direction indicated by the arrow R2 in FIG. 19 may be the same as or different from the direction indicated by the arrow R1 in FIG.
  • another group of the detection elements 775 (1, h) to 775 (p, h) includes the detection elements 775 (g, h), and the column direction (arrow C2 in FIG. 19) intersects the row direction. In the direction indicated by.
  • the group of sensing elements 775 (g, 1) to 775 (g, q) arranged in the row direction includes an electrode C (g) electrically connected to the control line CL (g) (FIG. 20 (B)).
  • Another group of the detection elements 775 (1, h) to 775 (p, h) arranged in the column direction has electrodes M (h) electrically connected to the detection signal lines ML (h). Including.
  • the control line CL (g) includes a conductive film BR (g, h) (see FIGS. 20B, 20C, and 21A).
  • the conductive film BR (g, h) includes a region overlapping with the detection signal line ML (h).
  • the insulating film 706 includes a region sandwiched between the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film BR (g, h). Thereby, short circuit of the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film BR (g, h) can be prevented.
  • the oscillation circuit OSC is electrically connected to the control line CL (g) and has a function of supplying a control signal.
  • a rectangular wave, a sawtooth wave, a triangular wave, or the like can be used as the control signal.
  • the detection circuit DC is electrically connected to the detection signal line ML (h) and has a function of supplying a detection signal based on a change in potential of the detection signal line ML (h).
  • the detection signal includes, for example, position information P1.
  • Display unit 230 For example, the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used for the display portion 230. Alternatively, the display device described in Embodiment 2 can be used for the display portion 230.
  • part of light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) may be reflected by the control line CL (g), the electrode 752, or the like after passing through the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. is there.
  • reflection may be repeated between the electrode 752 and the electrode 751 (i, j).
  • reflection may be repeated between the substrate 770 and the electrode 751 (i, j).
  • emits can display image information like indirect illumination.
  • the second display element can display softly.
  • the input / output panel 700TP2 is different from the display panel 700 described in Embodiment 1, for example, in that the functional layer 720 has a different structure and has a top-gate transistor.
  • the functional layer 720 has a different structure and has a top-gate transistor.
  • the functional layer 720 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the insulating film 501C.
  • the functional layer 720 includes a light shielding film BM, an insulating film 771, a coloring film CF1, a control line CL (g), a detection signal line ML (h), and a detection element 775 (g, h) ( (See FIG. 21A or FIG. 22).
  • Conductive film 511D >> Further, the input / output panel 700TP2 described in this embodiment includes a conductive film 511D (see FIG. 22).
  • a conductive material CP or the like is provided between the control line CL (g) and the conductive film 511D so that the control line CL (g) and the conductive film 511D can be electrically connected.
  • a conductive material CP or the like can be provided between the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film 511D so that the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film 511D can be electrically connected.
  • a material that can be used for a wiring or the like can be used for the conductive film 511D.
  • Terminal 519D the input / output panel 700TP2 described in this embodiment includes a terminal 519D.
  • the terminal 519D is electrically connected to the conductive film 511D.
  • a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the terminal 519D.
  • the same structure as the terminal 519B or the terminal 519C can be used for the terminal 519D (see FIG. 22).
  • the terminal 519D and the flexible printed circuit board FPC2 can be electrically connected using the conductive material ACF2.
  • the control signal can be supplied to the control line CL (g) using the terminal 519D.
  • the detection signal can be supplied from the detection signal line ML (h) using the terminal 519D.
  • a transistor that can be used for the switch SW1, the transistor M and the transistor MD includes a conductive film 504 including a region overlapping with the insulating film 501C and a semiconductor film 508 including a region sandwiched between the insulating film 501C and the conductive film 504.
  • the conductive film 504 has a function of a gate electrode (see FIG. 21B).
  • the semiconductor film 508 includes a first region 508A and a second region 508B that do not overlap with the conductive film 504, and a third region 508C that overlaps with the conductive film 504 between the first region 508A and the second region 508B; Is provided.
  • the transistor MD includes an insulating film 506 between the third region 508C and the conductive film 504. Note that the insulating film 506 functions as a gate insulating film.
  • the first region 508A and the second region 508B have a lower resistivity than the third region 508C and have a function of a source region or a function of a drain region.
  • the first region 508A and the second region 508B can be formed in the semiconductor film 508 by performing plasma treatment using a gas containing a rare gas on the oxide semiconductor film.
  • the conductive film 504 can be used as a mask. Accordingly, the shape of part of the third region 508C can be self-aligned with the shape of the end portion of the conductive film 504.
  • the transistor MD includes a conductive film 512A in contact with the first region 508A and a conductive film 512B in contact with the second region 508B.
  • the conductive films 512A and 512B have a function of a source electrode or a drain electrode.
  • a transistor that can be formed in the same process as the transistor MD can be used as the transistor M.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a structure of the input / output panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of a pixel included in the input / output panel.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a structure of the input / output panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • 28A is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of the functional film of the input / output panel illustrated in FIG. 27,
  • FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of the input unit, and
  • FIG. It is sectional drawing explaining the structure of a 2nd unit,
  • FIG.28 (D) is sectional drawing explaining the structure of a 1st unit.
  • the input / output panel 700TP3 described in this configuration example includes a pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 27).
  • the input / output panel 700TP3 includes a first unit 10, a second unit 20, an input unit 30, and a functional film 770P (see FIG. 28).
  • the first unit 10 includes a functional layer 520
  • the second unit 20 includes a functional layer 720.
  • Pixel 702 (i, j) includes a part of the functional layer 520, a first display element 750 (i, j), and a second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 27). .
  • the functional layer 520 includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, an insulating film 501C, and a pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) (not shown) includes, for example, a transistor M.
  • the functional layer 520 includes an optical element 560, a coating film 565, and a lens 580.
  • the functional layer 520 includes an insulating film 528 and an insulating film 521. A material in which the insulating films 521A and 521B are stacked can be used for the insulating film 521.
  • a material having a refractive index of about 1.55 can be used for the insulating film 521A or the insulating film 521B.
  • a material with a refractive index of about 1.6 can be used for the insulating film 521A or the insulating film 521B.
  • acrylic resin or polyimide can be used for the insulating film 521A or the insulating film 521B.
  • the insulating film 501C includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film, and the insulating film 501C includes an opening 591A.
  • the first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element 750 (i, j). Specifically, it is electrically connected to the electrode 751 (i, j) of the first display element 750 (i, j). Note that the electrode 751 (i, j) can be used for the first conductive film.
  • the second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film.
  • the second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening 591A.
  • the conductive film 512B can be used for the second conductive film.
  • the second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • a conductive film functioning as a source electrode or a drain electrode of a transistor used for the switch SW1 of the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) can be used for the second conductive film.
  • the first conductive film electrically connected to the second conductive film in the opening 591A provided in the insulating film 501C can be referred to as a through electrode.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the functional layer 520.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the lens 580 or the optical element 560, for example.
  • the second display element 550 (i, j) can visually recognize the display using the second display element in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized. It is arranged. For example, a shape including a region 751H that does not block light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) is used for the electrode 751 (i, j) of the first display element 750 (i, j). The direction in which the external light is incident and reflected on the first display element 750 (i, j) that displays the image information by controlling the intensity of reflecting the external light is shown in the drawing by using a broken arrow.
  • the direction in which the second display element 550 (i, j) emits light in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized is indicated by a solid line arrow. Shown in the figure.
  • the display using the 2nd display element can be visually recognized in a part of field which can visually recognize the display using the 1st display element.
  • the user can visually recognize the display without changing the posture of the input / output panel.
  • the object color expressed by the light reflected by the first display element can be multiplied by the light source color expressed by the light emitted by the second display element.
  • a pictorial display can be performed using the object color and the light source color.
  • the first display element 750 (i, j) includes an electrode 751 (i, j), an electrode 752, and a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material.
  • an alignment film AF1 and an alignment film AF2 are provided.
  • a reflective liquid crystal element can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • a transparent conductive film having a refractive index of about 2.0 can be used for the electrode 752 or the electrode 751 (i, j).
  • an oxide containing indium, tin, and silicon can be used for the electrode 752 or the electrode 751 (i, j).
  • a material having a refractive index of about 1.6 can be used for the alignment film.
  • the second display element 550 includes an electrode 551 (i, j), an electrode 552, and a layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
  • the electrode 552 includes a region overlapping with the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material includes a region sandwiched between the electrode 551 (i, j) and the electrode 552.
  • the electrode 551 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) at the connection portion 522.
  • an organic EL element can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • a transparent conductive film having a refractive index of about 2.0 can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • an oxide containing indium, tin, and silicon can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
  • a material having a refractive index of about 1.8 can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
  • the optical element 560 has translucency, and the optical element 560 includes a first region, a second region, and a third region.
  • the first region includes a region to which visible light is supplied from the second display element 550 (i, j), the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film 565, and the third region is visible light. A function to inject a part is provided.
  • the third region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
  • the coating film 565 has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film 565 has a function of reflecting part of visible light and supplying it to the third region.
  • a metal can be used for the coating film 565.
  • a material containing silver can be used for the coating film 565.
  • a material containing silver, palladium, or the like, or a material containing silver, copper, or the like can be used for the coating film 565.
  • the functional layer 720 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the insulating film 501C.
  • the functional layer 720 includes an insulating film 771 and a colored film CF1.
  • the colored film CF1 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • the insulating film 771 includes a region sandwiched between the coloring film CF1 and the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. Thereby, the unevenness
  • an acrylic resin having a refractive index of about 1.55 can be used for the insulating film 771.
  • Substrate 570, Substrate 770 The input / output panel described in this embodiment includes a substrate 570 and a substrate 770.
  • the substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the substrate 570.
  • the substrate 770 includes a region that sandwiches the functional layer 520 with the substrate 570.
  • the substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • a material in which birefringence is suppressed can be used for the region.
  • a resin material having a refractive index of about 1.5 can be used for the substrate 770.
  • the input / output panel described in this embodiment includes a bonding layer 505.
  • the bonding layer 505 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 together.
  • the input / output panel described in this embodiment includes a structure KB1 and a structure KB2.
  • the structure KB1 has a function of providing a predetermined gap between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770.
  • the structure KB1 includes a region overlapping with the region 751H, and the structure KB1 has a light-transmitting property. Thereby, the light emitted by the second display element 550 (i, j) can be supplied to one surface and emitted from the other surface.
  • the structure KB1 includes a region overlapping with the optical element 560.
  • a material selected so that the difference from the refractive index of the material used for the optical element 560 is 0.2 or less is used for the structure KB1.
  • emits can be utilized efficiently.
  • the area of the second display element can be increased.
  • the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered
  • the structure KB2 has a function of controlling the thickness of the polarizing layer 770PB to a predetermined thickness.
  • the structure KB2 includes a region overlapping with the second display element 550 (i, j), and the structure KB2 has a light-transmitting property.
  • a material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2.
  • the structure KB1 or the structure KB2 can be used for a color filter, for example.
  • a material that transmits blue, green, or red light can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2.
  • a material that transmits yellow light, white light, or the like can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2.
  • polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, or the like, or a composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2.
  • a material having photosensitivity may be used.
  • an acrylic resin having a refractive index of about 1.5 can be used for the structure KB1.
  • An acrylic resin having a refractive index of about 1.55 can be used for the structure KB2.
  • the input unit 30 includes a detection element.
  • the detection element has a function of detecting an element close to a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j). Accordingly, position information can be input using a finger or the like that is brought close to the display unit as a pointer.
  • a capacitive proximity sensor an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor, an optical proximity sensor, a resistive proximity sensor, or a surface acoustic wave proximity sensor can be used for the input unit 30.
  • a proximity sensor of a surface type capacitance method, a projection type capacitance method, or an infrared detection type can be used.
  • a touch sensor having a refractive index near 1.6 including a capacitive proximity sensor can be used for the input unit 30.
  • the input / output panel 700TP3 described in this embodiment includes a functional film 770D and a functional film 770P.
  • the functional film 770D includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j).
  • the functional film 770D includes a region that sandwiches the first display element 750 (i, j) between the functional layer 520 and the functional layer 520D.
  • a light diffusion film can be used for the functional film 770D.
  • a material having a columnar structure including an axis along a direction intersecting the surface of the base material can be used for the functional film 770D.
  • light can be easily transmitted in a direction along the axis and can be easily scattered in other directions.
  • light reflected by the first display element 750 (i, j) can be diffused.
  • the functional film 770P includes the polarizing layer 770PB, the retardation film 770PA, or the structure KB2.
  • the polarizing layer 770PB includes an opening
  • the retardation film 770PA includes a region overlapping with the polarizing layer 770PB.
  • the structure KB2 is provided in the opening.
  • a dichroic dye, a liquid crystal material, and a resin can be used for the polarizing layer 770PB.
  • the polarizing layer 770PB has polarizing properties. Accordingly, the functional film 770P can be used for the polarizing plate.
  • the polarizing layer 770PB includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j), and the structure KB2 includes a region overlapping with the second display element 550 (i, j).
  • the liquid crystal element can be used for the first display element.
  • a reflective liquid crystal element can be used for the first display element.
  • light emitted from the second display element can be extracted efficiently.
  • the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered
  • the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved.
  • an antireflection film, a polarizing film, or a retardation film can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • a film containing a dichroic dye and a retardation film can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust a water-repellent film that makes it difficult to adhere dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses generation of scratches due to use, and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • a material having a refractive index near 1.6 can be used for the diffusion film. Further, a material having a refractive index of about 1.6 can be used for the retardation film 770PA.
  • FIG. 23A is a block diagram illustrating a structure of an information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 23B and FIG. 23C are projection views for explaining an example of the appearance of the information processing apparatus 200.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a program of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24A is a flowchart for describing main processing of the program of one embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 24B is a flowchart for describing interrupt processing.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a program interrupt process according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the information processing device 200 described in this embodiment includes an input / output device 220 and an arithmetic device 210 (see FIG. 23A).
  • the input / output device is electrically connected to the arithmetic device 210.
  • the information processing device 200 can include a housing (see FIG. 23B or FIG. 23C).
  • the input / output device 220 includes a display portion 230 and an input portion 240 (see FIG. 23A).
  • the input / output device 220 includes a detection unit 250.
  • the input / output device 220 can include a communication unit 290.
  • the input / output device 220 has a function of supplying image information V1 or control information SS, and a function of supplying position information P1 or detection information S1.
  • the arithmetic device 210 has a function of supplying the position information P1 or the detection information S1.
  • the arithmetic device 210 has a function of supplying image information V1.
  • the arithmetic device 210 has a function of operating based on the position information P1 or the detection information S1, for example.
  • the housing has a function of housing the input / output device 220 or the arithmetic device 210.
  • the housing has a function of supporting the display unit 230 or the arithmetic device 210.
  • the display unit 230 has a function of displaying an image based on the image information V1.
  • the display unit 230 has a function of displaying an image based on the control information SS.
  • the input unit 240 has a function of supplying the position information P1.
  • the detection unit 250 has a function of supplying the detection information S1.
  • the detection unit 250 has a function of detecting the illuminance of an environment where the information processing apparatus 200 is used, and a function of supplying illuminance information.
  • the information processing apparatus can operate by grasping the intensity of light received by the casing of the information processing apparatus in an environment where the information processing apparatus is used.
  • the user of the information processing apparatus can select a display method.
  • a display method using the first display element can be selected, and for example, power consumption can be suppressed.
  • a method using the second display element is selected, and for example, display can be performed in a dark place.
  • a method of using the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) for display is selected, and for example, a comfortable display according to the user's preference is displayed. Can do.
  • a novel information processing apparatus that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
  • a touch panel in which a touch sensor is superimposed on a display panel is not only a display unit but also an input unit.
  • the information processing device 200 of one embodiment of the present invention includes a housing or the arithmetic device 210.
  • the computing device 210 includes a computing unit 211, a storage unit 212, a transmission path 214, and an input / output interface 215.
  • the information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the input / output device 220.
  • the input / output device 220 includes a display unit 230, an input unit 240, a detection unit 250, and a communication unit 290.
  • the information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the arithmetic device 210 or the input / output device 220.
  • the calculation device 210 includes a calculation unit 211 and a storage unit 212.
  • a transmission path 214 and an input / output interface 215 are provided.
  • the calculation unit 211 has a function of executing a program, for example.
  • Storage unit 212 has a function of storing, for example, a program executed by the calculation unit 211, initial information, setting information, or an image.
  • a hard disk a flash memory, a memory including a transistor including an oxide semiconductor, or the like can be used.
  • the input / output interface 215 includes a terminal or a wiring, and has a function of supplying information and receiving information.
  • the transmission line 214 can be electrically connected.
  • the input / output device 220 can be electrically connected.
  • the transmission path 214 includes wiring, supplies information, and has a function of being supplied with information.
  • the input / output interface 215 can be electrically connected. Further, it can be electrically connected to the calculation unit 211, the storage unit 212, or the input / output interface 215.
  • the input / output device 220 includes a display unit 230, an input unit 240, a detection unit 250, or a communication unit 290.
  • the input / output device described in Embodiment 3 can be used. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced.
  • the display portion 230 includes a control portion 238, a drive circuit GD, a drive circuit SD, and a display panel 700 (see FIG. 15A).
  • the display device described in Embodiment 2 can be used for the display portion 230.
  • ⁇ Input unit 240> Various human interfaces or the like can be used for the input unit 240 (see FIG. 23).
  • a keyboard, mouse, touch sensor, microphone, camera, or the like can be used for the input unit 240.
  • a touch sensor including a region overlapping with the display portion 230 can be used.
  • An input / output device including a touch sensor including a display unit 230 and a region overlapping with the display unit 230 can be referred to as a touch panel or a touch screen.
  • the user can make various gestures (tap, drag, swipe, pinch in, etc.) using a finger touching the touch panel as a pointer.
  • various gestures tap, drag, swipe, pinch in, etc.
  • the computing device 210 may analyze information such as the position or trajectory of a finger that touches the touch panel, and a specific gesture may be supplied when the analysis result satisfies a predetermined condition. Accordingly, the user can supply a predetermined operation command associated with the predetermined gesture in advance using the gesture.
  • the user can supply a “scroll command” for changing the display position of the image information using a gesture for moving a finger that touches the touch panel along the touch panel.
  • the detection unit 250 has a function of detecting surrounding conditions and supplying detection information. Specifically, illuminance information, posture information, pressure information, position information, and the like can be supplied.
  • a light detector for example, a light detector, an attitude detector, an acceleration sensor, an orientation sensor, a GPS (Global positioning System) signal receiving circuit, a pressure sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, a camera, or the like can be used for the detection unit 250.
  • a GPS Global positioning System
  • the communication unit 290 has a function of supplying information to the network and acquiring information from the network.
  • program The program of one embodiment of the present invention includes the following steps (see FIG. 24A).
  • predetermined image information to be displayed at startup a predetermined mode for displaying the image information, and information for specifying a predetermined display method for displaying the image information are acquired from the storage unit 212.
  • one still image information or other moving image information can be used as predetermined image information.
  • the first mode or the second mode can be used as a predetermined mode.
  • the first display method, the second display method, or the third display method can be used as a predetermined display method.
  • interrupt processing is permitted (see FIGS. 24A and S2).
  • an arithmetic unit that is permitted to perform interrupt processing can perform interrupt processing in parallel with main processing.
  • the arithmetic unit that has returned to the main process from the interrupt process can reflect the result obtained by the interrupt process to the main process.
  • the arithmetic unit performs interrupt processing, and when returning from the interrupt processing, the counter may be set to a value other than the initial value. As a result, interrupt processing can always be performed after the program is started.
  • the image information is displayed using the predetermined mode or the predetermined display method selected in the first step or the interruption process (see FIGS. 24A and S3).
  • the predetermined mode specifies a mode for displaying information
  • the predetermined display method specifies a method for displaying image information. Further, for example, the image information V1, the information V11, or the information V12 can be used as information to be displayed.
  • one method for displaying the image information V1 can be associated with the first mode.
  • another method for displaying the image information V1 can be associated with the second mode. Thereby, a display method can be selected based on the selected mode.
  • three different methods for displaying the image information V1 can be associated with the first display method to the third display method. Thereby, it is possible to display based on the selected display method.
  • a method of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of 30 Hz or more, preferably 60 Hz or more, and displaying based on the selection signal can be associated with the first mode.
  • the selection signal when the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, the motion of the moving image can be displayed smoothly.
  • an image when an image is updated at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, an image that changes so as to smoothly follow the user's operation can be displayed on the information processing apparatus 200 being operated by the user.
  • Second mode a method of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute, and performing display based on the selection signal is described in the second mode.
  • the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute, a display in which flicker or flicker is suppressed can be displayed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced.
  • the display can be updated at a frequency of once per second or a frequency of once per minute.
  • the light-emitting element when a light-emitting element is used for the second display element, the light-emitting element can emit light in a pulse shape to display image information.
  • the organic EL element can emit light in a pulse shape, and the afterglow can be used for display. Since the organic EL element has excellent frequency characteristics, there are cases where the time for driving the light emitting element can be shortened and the power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, heat generation is suppressed, so that deterioration of the light-emitting element can be reduced in some cases.
  • First display method Specifically, a method using the first display element 750 (i, j) for display can be used for the first display method. Thereby, for example, power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, the image information can be favorably displayed with high contrast in a bright environment.
  • Second display method Specifically, a method using the second display element 550 (i, j) for display can be used for the second display method. Thereby, for example, an image can be favorably displayed in a dark environment. Alternatively, a photograph or the like can be displayed with good color reproducibility. Alternatively, a fast moving video can be displayed smoothly.
  • the brightness which displays the image information V1 can be determined based on illumination intensity information. For example, when the illuminance is 5,000 lux or more and less than 100,000 lux, the image information V1 is displayed using the second display element 550 (i, j) so that it is brighter than when the illuminance is less than 5,000 lux.
  • Third display method Specifically, a method in which the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) are used for display can be used in the third display method. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, an image can be favorably displayed in a dark environment. Alternatively, a photograph or the like can be displayed with good color reproducibility. Alternatively, a fast moving video can be displayed smoothly. Or the display which a user feels comfortable can be performed.
  • a function of adjusting display brightness by using the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) for display can be referred to as a dimming function.
  • the brightness of a reflective display element can be supplemented by using a display element having a function of emitting light.
  • a function of adjusting the display color by using the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) for display can be referred to as a toning function.
  • the color of the reflective display element can be changed using a display element having a function of emitting light.
  • the yellowish hue displayed by the reflective liquid crystal element can be made closer to white using a blue organic EL element.
  • the character information can be displayed like characters printed on plain paper.
  • a display that is easy on the eyes can be displayed.
  • the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) are used for display, the color reflected by the object and the color emitted by the object are multiplied. Thereby, a pictorial display can be performed.
  • the brightness of the image information V1 displayed using the second display element 550 (i, j), which is displayed by being superimposed on the image information V1 displayed using the first display element 750 (i, j), is set. It can be determined according to illuminance information and user preference. Thereby, the display which a user feels comfortable can be performed.
  • an end command supplied in the interrupt process may be used for determination.
  • the interrupt process includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 24B).
  • the detection unit 250 is used to detect the illuminance of the environment in which the information processing apparatus 200 is used (see FIGS. 24B and S6). Note that the color temperature or chromaticity of the ambient light may be detected instead of the illuminance of the environment.
  • a display method is determined based on the detected illuminance information. For example, when the illuminance is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the first display method is determined, and when the illuminance is lower than the predetermined value, the second display method is determined. Alternatively, when the illuminance is in a predetermined range, the third display method may be determined (see FIGS. 24B and S7).
  • the first display method is determined.
  • the second display method is determined, and the illuminance is less than 100,000 lux.
  • the third display method may be determined.
  • the display color is adjusted using the second display element 550 (i, j) in the third display method. You may adjust.
  • the first status control information SS is supplied
  • the second status control information SS is supplied
  • the third status control information SS is supplied.
  • the control information SS of the third status is supplied.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a program of one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart for explaining interrupt processing different from the interrupt processing shown in FIG.
  • the configuration example 2 of the information processing device is different from the interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 24B in that the interrupt processing includes a step of changing the mode based on the supplied predetermined event. .
  • the interrupt processing includes a step of changing the mode based on the supplied predetermined event.
  • the interrupt process includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 25).
  • the process when a predetermined event is supplied, the process proceeds to a seventh step, and when the predetermined event is not supplied, the process proceeds to an eighth step (see FIG. 25 (U6)).
  • the predetermined period can be a period of 5 seconds or less, 1 second or less, or 0.5 seconds or less, preferably 0.1 seconds or less and longer than 0 seconds.
  • the mode is changed (see FIG. 25 (U7)). Specifically, when the first mode is selected, the second mode is selected, and when the second mode is selected, the first mode is selected.
  • Predetermined event For example, an event such as “click” or “drag” supplied using a pointing device such as a mouse, an event such as “tap”, “drag” or “swipe” supplied to a touch panel using a finger or the like as a pointer Can be used.
  • an event such as “click” or “drag” supplied using a pointing device such as a mouse
  • an event such as “tap”, “drag” or “swipe” supplied to a touch panel using a finger or the like as a pointer Can be used.
  • an argument of a command associated with a predetermined event can be given using the position of the slide bar pointed to by the pointer, the swipe speed, the drag speed, or the like.
  • the information detected by the detection unit 250 can be compared with a preset threshold value, and the comparison result can be used as an event.
  • a pressure-sensitive detector or the like that contacts a button or the like that can be pushed into the housing can be used for the detection unit 250.
  • an end instruction can be associated with a particular event.
  • a “page turning command” for switching display from one displayed image information to another image information can be associated with a predetermined event.
  • an argument that determines a page turning speed used when executing the “page turning instruction” can be given using a predetermined event.
  • a “scroll command” for moving the display position of a part of one image information displayed to display another part continuous to the part can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument that determines the speed of moving the display position used when executing the “scroll command” can be given using a predetermined event.
  • a command for setting a display method or a command for generating image information can be associated with a predetermined event.
  • An argument that determines the brightness of the image to be generated can be associated with a predetermined event.
  • an argument for determining the brightness of the image to be generated may be determined based on the brightness of the environment detected by the detection unit 250.
  • a command for acquiring information distributed using a push-type service using the communication unit 290 can be associated with a predetermined event.
  • the teaching material distributed in a classroom such as a school or a university can be received and the information processing apparatus 200 can be used as a textbook (see FIG. 23C).
  • a material distributed in a conference room of a company or the like can be received and used as a conference material.
  • FIGS. 26A to 26G illustrate electronic devices. These electronic devices include a housing 5000, a display portion 5001, a speaker 5003, an LED lamp 5004, operation keys 5005 (including a power switch or operation switch), a connection terminal 5006, a sensor 5007 (force, displacement, position, speed, Measure acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell or infrared A microphone 5008, and the like.
  • operation keys 5005 including a power switch or operation switch
  • connection terminal 5006 a sensor 5007 (force, displacement, position, speed, Measure acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell or infrared A microphone 5008, and the like.
  • FIG. 26A illustrates a mobile computer which can include a switch 5009, an infrared port 5010, and the like in addition to the above components.
  • FIG. 26B illustrates a portable image reproducing device (eg, a DVD reproducing device) provided with a recording medium, which includes a second display portion 5002, a recording medium reading portion 5011, and the like in addition to the above components. it can.
  • FIG. 26C illustrates a goggle type display which can include a second display portion 5002, a support portion 5012, an earphone 5013, and the like in addition to the above components.
  • FIG. 26D illustrates a portable game machine that can include the memory medium reading portion 5011 and the like in addition to the above objects.
  • FIG. 26E illustrates a digital camera with a television receiving function, which can include an antenna 5014, a shutter button 5015, an image receiving portion 5016, and the like in addition to the above objects.
  • FIG. 26F illustrates a portable game machine that can include the second display portion 5002, the recording medium reading portion 5011, and the like in addition to the above objects.
  • FIG. 26G illustrates a portable television receiver that can include a charger 5017 and the like capable of transmitting and receiving signals in addition to the above components.
  • the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 26A to 26G can have a variety of functions. For example, a function for displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function for displaying a calendar, date or time, etc., a function for controlling processing by various software (programs) , Wireless communication function, function to connect to various computer networks using wireless communication function, function to transmit or receive various data using wireless communication function, read program or data recorded in recording medium
  • a function of displaying on the display portion can be provided. Further, in an electronic device having a plurality of display units, one display unit mainly displays image information and another one display unit mainly displays character information, or the plurality of display units consider parallax.
  • a function of displaying a three-dimensional image, etc. by displaying the obtained image. Furthermore, in an electronic device having an image receiving unit, a function for capturing a still image, a function for capturing a moving image, a function for correcting a captured image automatically or manually, and a captured image on a recording medium (externally or incorporated in a camera) A function of saving, a function of displaying a photographed image on a display portion, and the like can be provided. Note that the functions of the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 26A to 26G are not limited to these, and can have various functions.
  • FIG. 26H illustrates a smart watch, which includes a housing 7302, a display panel 7304, operation buttons 7311 and 7312, a connection terminal 7313, a band 7321, a clasp 7322, and the like.
  • a display panel 7304 mounted on a housing 7302 also serving as a bezel portion has a non-rectangular display region. Note that the display panel 7304 may have a rectangular display region.
  • the display panel 7304 can display an icon 7305 indicating time, another icon 7306, and the like.
  • the smart watch illustrated in FIG. 26H can have a variety of functions. For example, a function for displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function for displaying a calendar, date or time, etc., a function for controlling processing by various software (programs) , Wireless communication function, function to connect to various computer networks using wireless communication function, function to transmit or receive various data using wireless communication function, read program or data recorded in recording medium A function of displaying on the display portion can be provided.
  • a speaker In addition, a speaker, a sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current are included in the housing 7302. , Voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared measurement function), microphone, and the like. Note that a smart watch can be manufactured by using a light-emitting element for the display panel 7304.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the input / output module.
  • FIG. 29A is an exploded view illustrating the structure of the input / output module of one embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 29B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of the input / output module of one embodiment of the present invention. .
  • the display module 6000 includes a display panel 6006, a frame 6009, a printed board 6010, and a battery 6011 which are connected to the FPC 6005 between the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 (see FIG. 29A).
  • a display device manufactured using one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display panel 6006.
  • a display module can be manufactured with a high yield.
  • the shapes and dimensions of the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 6006.
  • a touch panel may be provided over the display panel 6006.
  • a resistive film type or capacitive type touch panel can be used by being superimposed on the display panel 6006.
  • the display panel 6006 can have a touch panel function.
  • the frame 6009 has a function as an electromagnetic shield for blocking electromagnetic waves generated by the operation of the printed board 6010 in addition to a protective function of the display panel 6006.
  • the frame 6009 may function as a heat sink.
  • the printed board 6010 includes a power supply circuit, a signal processing circuit for outputting a video signal and a clock signal.
  • the power source for supplying power to the power supply circuit may be an external commercial power source or a power source by a battery 6011 provided separately.
  • the battery 6011 can be omitted when a commercial power source is used.
  • the display module 6000 may be additionally provided with a member such as a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet.
  • FIG. 29B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a display module 6000 including an optical touch sensor.
  • the display module 6000 includes a light emitting unit 6015 and a light receiving unit 6016 provided on the printed board 6010. Further, a region surrounded by the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 has a pair of light guide portions (light guide portion 6017a and light guide portion 6017b).
  • the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 for example, plastic can be used. Further, the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 can each be thin (for example, 0.5 mm to 5 mm). Therefore, the display module 6000 can be made extremely light. Further, since the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 can be manufactured with a small amount of material, manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • the display panel 6006 is provided so as to overlap the printed circuit board 6010 and the battery 6011 with a frame 6009 interposed therebetween.
  • the display panel 6006 and the frame 6009 are fixed to the light guide unit 6017a and the light guide unit 6017b.
  • Light 6018 emitted from the light emitting unit 6015 passes through the upper part of the display panel 6006 by the light guide unit 6017a and reaches the light receiving unit 6016 through the light guide unit 6017b.
  • the touch operation can be detected by blocking the light 6018 by a detection target such as a finger or a stylus.
  • a plurality of light emitting units 6015 are provided along two adjacent sides of the display panel 6006.
  • a plurality of light receiving portions 6016 are provided at positions facing the light emitting portion 6015 with the display panel 6006 interposed therebetween. Thereby, the information on the position where the touch operation is performed can be acquired.
  • a light source such as an LED element can be used.
  • a light source that emits infrared rays that are not visually recognized by the user and harmless to the user as the light emitting unit 6015.
  • the light receiving unit 6016 can be a photoelectric element that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit 6015 and converts the light into an electrical signal.
  • a photodiode capable of receiving infrared light can be used.
  • the light guide portion 6017a and the light guide portion 6017b As the light guide portion 6017a and the light guide portion 6017b, a member that transmits at least the light 6018 can be used.
  • the light emitting unit 6015 and the light receiving unit 6016 can be arranged below the display panel 6006, and external light reaches the light receiving unit 6016 and the touch sensor malfunctions. Can be suppressed.
  • X and Y are assumed to be objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.).
  • an element that enables electrical connection between X and Y for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, a diode, a display, etc.
  • Element, light emitting element, load, etc. are not connected between X and Y
  • elements for example, switches, transistors, capacitive elements, inductors
  • resistor element for example, a diode, a display element, a light emitting element, a load, or the like.
  • an element for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitive element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, a display, etc.
  • the switch has a function of controlling on / off. That is, the switch is in a conductive state (on state) or a non-conductive state (off state), and has a function of controlling whether or not to pass a current. Alternatively, the switch has a function of selecting and switching a path through which a current flows.
  • the case where X and Y are electrically connected includes the case where X and Y are directly connected.
  • a circuit for example, a logic circuit (an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, etc.) that enables a functional connection between X and Y, signal conversion, etc.
  • Circuit (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes signal potential level, etc.), voltage source, current source, switching Circuit, amplifier circuit (circuit that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifier, differential amplifier circuit, source follower circuit, buffer circuit, etc.), signal generation circuit, memory circuit, control circuit, etc.)
  • a circuit for example, a logic circuit (an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, etc.) that enables a functional connection between X and Y, signal conversion, etc.
  • Circuit (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down
  • X and Y are functionally connected.
  • the case where X and Y are functionally connected includes the case where X and Y are directly connected and the case where X and Y are electrically connected.
  • the source (or the first terminal) of the transistor is electrically connected to X through (or not through) Z1, and the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor is connected to Z2.
  • Y is electrically connected, or the source (or the first terminal, etc.) of the transistor is directly connected to a part of Z1, and another part of Z1 Is directly connected to X, and the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is directly connected to a part of Z2, and another part of Z2 is directly connected to Y.
  • X and Y, and the source (or the first terminal or the like) and the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor are electrically connected to each other.
  • the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) and the Y are electrically connected in this order.
  • the source (or the first terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to X
  • the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y
  • X or the source ( Or the first terminal or the like, the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, or the like) and Y are electrically connected in this order.
  • X is electrically connected to Y through the source (or the first terminal) and the drain (or the second terminal) of the transistor, and X is the source of the transistor (or the first terminal). Terminal, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are provided in this connection order.
  • Terminal, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are provided in this connection order.
  • a source (or a first terminal or the like of a transistor) is electrically connected to X through at least a first connection path, and the first connection path is The second connection path does not have a second connection path, and the second connection path includes a transistor source (or first terminal or the like) and a transistor drain (or second terminal or the like) through the transistor.
  • the first connection path is a path through Z1
  • the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y through at least the third connection path.
  • the third connection path is connected and does not have the second connection path, and the third connection path is a path through Z2.
  • the source (or the first terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to X via Z1 by at least a first connection path, and the first connection path is a second connection path.
  • the second connection path has a connection path through the transistor, and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is at least connected to Z2 by the third connection path.
  • Y, and the third connection path does not have the second connection path.
  • the source of the transistor (or the first terminal or the like) is electrically connected to X through Z1 by at least a first electrical path, and the first electrical path is a second electrical path Does not have an electrical path, and the second electrical path is an electrical path from the source (or first terminal or the like) of the transistor to the drain (or second terminal or the like) of the transistor;
  • the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y through Z2 by at least a third electrical path, and the third electrical path is a fourth electrical path.
  • the fourth electrical path is an electrical path from the drain (or second terminal or the like) of the transistor to the source (or first terminal or the like) of the transistor.
  • X, Y, Z1, and Z2 are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, and the like).
  • the term “electrically connected” in this specification includes in its category such a case where one conductive film has functions of a plurality of components.

Abstract

Provided is a novel display panel having excellent convenience or reliability. This display panel has pixels, and each of the pixels is provided with an optical element, a coating film, a first display element, and a second display element. The optical element is provided with translucency, and a first region, a second region, and a third region, the first region includes a region supplied with visible light, the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film, and the third region is provided with a function of outputting a part of the visible light, and an area equal to or smaller than that of the region supplied with the visible light, said region being a part of the first region. The coating film is provided with reflectivity with respect to the visible light, and functions of reflecting a part of the visible light, and supplying the part of the visible light to the third region, the first display element is provided with a reflecting film, and a function of controlling light reflected by the reflecting film, said reflecting film being provided with a shape, with which the light outputted from the third region of the optical element is not blocked, and the second display element is provided with a function of supplying the visible light.

Description

表示パネル、表示装置、入出力装置、情報処理装置Display panel, display device, input / output device, information processing device
本発明の一態様は、表示パネル、表示装置、入出力装置または情報処理装置に関する。 One embodiment of the present invention relates to a display panel, a display device, an input / output device, or an information processing device.
なお、本発明の一態様は、上記の技術分野に限定されない。本明細書等で開示する発明の一態様の技術分野は、物、方法、または、製造方法に関するものである。または、本発明の一態様は、プロセス、マシン、マニュファクチャ、または、組成物(コンポジション・オブ・マター)に関するものである。そのため、より具体的に本明細書で開示する本発明の一態様の技術分野としては、半導体装置、表示装置、発光装置、蓄電装置、記憶装置、それらの駆動方法、または、それらの製造方法、を一例として挙げることができる。 Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field. The technical field of one embodiment of the invention disclosed in this specification and the like relates to an object, a method, or a manufacturing method. Alternatively, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a process, a machine, a manufacture, or a composition (composition of matter). Therefore, as a technical field of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed more specifically in this specification, a semiconductor device, a display device, a light-emitting device, a power storage device, a memory device, a driving method thereof, or a manufacturing method thereof, Can be cited as an example.
基板の同一面側に集光手段と画素電極を設け、集光手段の光軸上に画素電極の可視光を透過する領域を重ねて設ける構成を有する液晶表示装置や、集光方向Xと非集光方向Yを有する異方性の集光手段を用い、非集光方向Yと画素電極の可視光を透過する領域の長軸方向を一致して設ける構成を有する液晶表示装置が、知られている(特許文献1)。 A liquid crystal display device having a configuration in which a condensing unit and a pixel electrode are provided on the same surface side of the substrate, and a region that transmits visible light of the pixel electrode is provided on the optical axis of the condensing unit. There is known a liquid crystal display device having a configuration in which an anisotropic condensing unit having a condensing direction Y is used and a non-condensing direction Y and a major axis direction of a region of a pixel electrode that transmits visible light coincide with each other. (Patent Document 1).
1つの画素において、液晶層を介して入射する光を反射して表示を行う領域(反射領域)と、バックライトからの光を透過して表示を行う領域(透過領域)とを設け、照明光源として、外光を用いる反射モードと、バックライトを用いる透過モードの両モードでの画像表示を可能とする構成が知られている(特許文献2)。また、1つの画素にはそれぞれ別の画素電極層に接続された2つのトランジスタが設けられ、2つのトランジスタを別々に動作させることによって、反射領域の表示と、透過領域の表示とを独立して制御することができる。 In one pixel, an illumination light source is provided with a region (reflective region) for displaying light by reflecting light incident through the liquid crystal layer and a region (transmissive region) for displaying light by transmitting light from the backlight. For example, a configuration that enables image display in both a reflection mode using external light and a transmission mode using a backlight is known (Patent Document 2). In addition, two transistors connected to different pixel electrode layers are provided in one pixel, and the display of the reflective region and the display of the transmissive region are independently performed by operating the two transistors separately. Can be controlled.
特開2011−191750号公報JP 2011-191750 A 特開2011−154356号公報JP 2011-154356 A
本発明の一態様は、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することを課題の一とする。または、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、新規な表示パネル、新規な表示装置、新規な入出力装置、新規な情報処理装置または新規な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。 An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel information processing device that is highly convenient or reliable. Another object is to provide a novel display panel, a novel display device, a novel input / output device, a novel information processing device, or a novel semiconductor device.
なお、これらの課題の記載は、他の課題の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、これらの課題の全てを解決する必要はないものとする。なお、これら以外の課題は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、自ずと明らかとなるものであり、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、これら以外の課題を抽出することが可能である。 Note that the description of these problems does not disturb the existence of other problems. Note that one embodiment of the present invention does not have to solve all of these problems. Issues other than these will be apparent from the description of the specification, drawings, claims, etc., and other issues can be extracted from the descriptions of the specification, drawings, claims, etc. It is.
(1)本発明の一態様は、画素を有する表示パネルである。画素は、光学素子、被覆膜、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子を備える。 (1) One embodiment of the present invention is a display panel including a pixel. The pixel includes an optical element, a coating film, a first display element, and a second display element.
光学素子は透光性を備え、光学素子は第1の領域、第2の領域および第3の領域を備える。第1の領域は可視光を供給される領域を含み、第2の領域は被覆膜と接する領域を含み、第3の領域は当該可視光の一部を射出する機能を備え、第3の領域は第1の領域の可視光を供給される領域の面積以下の面積を備える。 The optical element has translucency, and the optical element includes a first region, a second region, and a third region. The first region includes a region to which visible light is supplied, the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film, and the third region has a function of emitting a part of the visible light. The region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
被覆膜は可視光に対する反射性を備え、被覆膜は可視光の一部を反射して、第3の領域に供給する機能を備える。 The coating film has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film has a function of reflecting a part of visible light and supplying it to the third region.
第1の表示素子は反射膜を備え、第1の表示素子は反射膜が反射する光を制御する機能を備え、反射膜は光学素子の第3の領域が射出する光を遮らない形状を備える。 The first display element includes a reflective film, the first display element has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film, and the reflective film has a shape that does not block the light emitted by the third region of the optical element. .
第2の表示素子は可視光を供給する機能を備える。 The second display element has a function of supplying visible light.
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いて、反射膜が反射する光の強度を制御して、表示をすることができる。または、第2の表示素子を用いて、第1の表示素子を用いた表示を補うことができる。または、第1の領域に供給した可視光を、効率よく第3の領域から射出することができる。または、第1の領域に供給される光を集光して、第3の領域から射出することができる。例えば、第2の表示素子に有機EL素子を用いる場合、有機EL素子の面積を第3の領域の面積より広くすることができる。または、第3の領域より広い面積の有機EL素子が供給する光を第3の領域に集光することができる。または、第3の領域が射出する光の強度を保ちながら、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Accordingly, display can be performed by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element. Alternatively, display using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element. Alternatively, visible light supplied to the first region can be efficiently emitted from the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied to the first region can be condensed and emitted from the third region. For example, when an organic EL element is used for the second display element, the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the density of the current flowing through the organic EL element while maintaining the intensity of light emitted from the third region. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(2)また、本発明の一態様は、光学素子が光軸を備える上記の表示パネルである。光軸は第1の領域の可視光が供給される領域の中心および第3の領域の中心を通る。また、第2の領域は光軸と直交する平面に対し45°以上の傾きを有する傾斜部を備える。 (2) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which an optical element includes an optical axis. The optical axis passes through the center of the first region to which visible light is supplied and the center of the third region. The second region includes an inclined portion having an inclination of 45 ° or more with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis.
(3)また、本発明の一態様は、第2の領域が傾斜部を第1の領域の可視光を供給される領域の端から0.05μm以上0.2μm以下の範囲に備える上記の表示パネルである。 (3) In addition, according to one embodiment of the present invention, the display in which the second region has an inclined portion in a range of 0.05 μm or more and 0.2 μm or less from the end of the region where the visible light of the first region is supplied It is a panel.
(4)また、本発明の一態様は、第1の領域の可視光が供給される領域が画素の面積の10%より大きい面積を備え、第3の領域は画素の面積の10%以下の面積を備える上記の表示パネルである。また、反射膜は画素の面積の70%以上の面積を備え、第1の領域の可視光が供給される領域の面積および反射膜の面積の和は、画素の面積より大きい。 (4) In addition, according to one embodiment of the present invention, a region to which visible light is supplied in the first region has an area larger than 10% of the area of the pixel, and the third region has 10% or less of the area of the pixel. It is said display panel provided with an area. The reflective film has an area of 70% or more of the area of the pixel, and the sum of the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied and the area of the reflective film is larger than the area of the pixel.
これにより、第2の領域は、第1の領域にさまざまな角度で入射する光を集光することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the second region can collect light incident on the first region at various angles. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(5)また、本発明の一態様は、第2の領域が透光性の材料を含む上記の表示パネルである。透光性の材料は、1.3以上2.5以下の屈折率を備える。また、被覆膜は透光性の膜を備え、透光性の膜は第2の領域と接する領域を備え、透光性の膜は第2の領域より低い屈折率を備える。 (5) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which the second region includes a light-transmitting material. The translucent material has a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5. The covering film includes a light-transmitting film, the light-transmitting film includes a region in contact with the second region, and the light-transmitting film has a refractive index lower than that of the second region.
(6)また、本発明の一態様は、被覆膜が金属膜を含む上記の表示パネルである。 (6) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which the coating film includes a metal film.
これにより、被覆膜は効率よく光を反射することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the coating film can reflect light efficiently. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(7)また、本発明の一態様は、第1の領域が第3の領域に向けて湾曲した形状を備える上記の表示パネルである。 (7) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel including a shape in which the first region is curved toward the third region.
(8)また、本発明の一態様は、第1の領域が第3の領域から遠ざかる方向に湾曲した形状を備える上記の表示パネルである。 (8) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel including a shape in which the first region is curved in a direction away from the third region.
これにより、光軸と直交する平面に対する投影面積を広げることなく、第1の領域の面積を広げることができる。または、光軸と直交する平面に対する投影面積を広げることなく、第1の領域に沿って形成される第2の表示素子の面積を広げることができる。または、隣接する第2の表示素子との間隔を保ちながら第2の表示素子の面積を広げることができる。例えば、第2の表示素子に有機EL素子を用いる場合、有機EL素子の面積を第3の領域の面積より広くすることができる。または、第3の領域より広い面積の有機EL素子が供給する光を第3の領域に集光することができる。または、第3の領域が射出する光の強度を保ちながら、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。または、発光色が異なる有機EL素子が隣接して配置された表示パネルを容易に作製することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the area of a 1st area | region can be expanded, without expanding the projection area with respect to the plane orthogonal to an optical axis. Alternatively, the area of the second display element formed along the first region can be increased without increasing the projected area with respect to the plane orthogonal to the optical axis. Alternatively, the area of the second display element can be increased while maintaining a distance from the adjacent second display element. For example, when an organic EL element is used for the second display element, the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the density of the current flowing through the organic EL element while maintaining the intensity of light emitted from the third region. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. Alternatively, a display panel in which organic EL elements having different emission colors are arranged adjacent to each other can be easily manufactured. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(9)また、本発明の一態様は、レンズを備える上記の表示パネルである。 (9) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel including a lens.
レンズは光学素子と第2の表示素子の間に挟まれる領域を備え、レンズは1.3以上2.5以下の屈折率を備える材料を含み、レンズは凸レンズである。 The lens includes a region sandwiched between the optical element and the second display element, the lens includes a material having a refractive index of 1.3 or more and 2.5 or less, and the lens is a convex lens.
これにより、第2の表示素子が射出する光を、例えば、光学素子の光軸に向けて集光することができる。または、第2の表示素子が射出する光を効率よく利用することができる。または、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、第2の表示素子の面積を広くすることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the light which a 2nd display element inject | emits can be condensed toward the optical axis of an optical element, for example. Alternatively, the light emitted from the second display element can be used efficiently. Or the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered | hung. Alternatively, the area of the second display element can be increased. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(10)また、本発明の一態様は、画素が、第1の導電膜と、第2の導電膜と、絶縁膜と、画素回路と、を有する上記の表示パネルである。 (10) Another embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel in which a pixel includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, an insulating film, and a pixel circuit.
絶縁膜は第1の導電膜および第2の導電膜の間に挟まれる領域を備え、絶縁膜は開口部を備える。 The insulating film includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film, and the insulating film includes an opening.
第1の導電膜は第1の表示素子と電気的に接続される。 The first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element.
第2の導電膜は第1の導電膜と重なる領域を備え、第2の導電膜は開口部において第1の導電膜と電気的に接続され、第2の導電膜は画素回路と電気的に接続される。 The second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film, the second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening, and the second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit. Connected.
第2の表示素子は画素回路と電気的に接続され、第2の表示素子は絶縁膜に向けて光を射出する機能を備え、第2の表示素子は第1の表示素子を用いた表示を視認できる範囲の一部において第2の表示素子を用いた表示を視認できるように配設される。 The second display element is electrically connected to the pixel circuit, the second display element has a function of emitting light toward the insulating film, and the second display element performs display using the first display element. It arrange | positions so that the display using a 2nd display element can be visually recognized in a part of visible range.
(11)また、本発明の一態様は、表示領域を有する上記の表示パネルである。 (11) One embodiment of the present invention is the above display panel having a display region.
表示領域は、一群の複数の画素、他の一群の複数の画素、走査線および信号線を備える。 The display area includes a group of pixels, another group of pixels, scanning lines, and signal lines.
一群の複数の画素は上記の画素を含み、一群の複数の画素は行方向に配設される。 The plurality of pixels in the group includes the above-described pixels, and the plurality of pixels in the group are arranged in the row direction.
他の一群の複数の画素は上記の画素を含み、他の一群の複数の画素は、行方向と交差する列方向に配設される。 Another group of the plurality of pixels includes the above-described pixels, and the other group of the plurality of pixels is arranged in the column direction intersecting the row direction.
走査線は一群の複数の画素と電気的に接続され、信号線は他の一群の複数の画素と電気的に接続される。 The scan line is electrically connected to a plurality of pixels in a group, and the signal line is electrically connected to a plurality of pixels in another group.
これにより、例えば同一の工程を用いて形成することができる画素回路を用いて、第1の表示素子と、第1の表示素子とは異なる方法を用いて表示をする第2の表示素子と、を駆動することができる。または、絶縁膜を用いて、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子の間または第1の表示素子および画素回路の間における不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, for example, using a pixel circuit that can be formed using the same process, the first display element and the second display element that displays using a method different from the first display element, Can be driven. Alternatively, by using an insulating film, diffusion of impurities between the first display element and the second display element or between the first display element and the pixel circuit can be suppressed. As a result, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(12)また、本発明の一態様は、上記の表示パネルと、制御部と、を有する表示装置である。 (12) One embodiment of the present invention is a display device including the display panel and a control unit.
制御部は画像情報および制御情報を供給される機能を備え、制御部は画像情報に基づいて第1の情報または第2の情報を生成する機能を備え、制御部は第1の情報および第2の情報を供給する機能を備える。 The control unit has a function of supplying image information and control information, the control unit has a function of generating the first information or the second information based on the image information, and the control unit has the first information and the second information. It has a function to supply information.
表示パネルは、第1の情報および第2の情報を供給される機能を備える。 The display panel has a function of being supplied with the first information and the second information.
第1の表示素子は第1の情報に基づいて表示する機能を備え、第2の表示素子は第2の情報に基づいて表示する機能を備える。 The first display element has a function of displaying based on the first information, and the second display element has a function of displaying based on the second information.
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。または、第2の表示素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。または、第1の表示素子を用いて表示される画像情報と重なるように、第2の表示素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。または、第1の表示素子を用いて表示される画像情報を第2の表示素子を用いて補うことができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, image information can be displayed using the first display element. Alternatively, image information can be displayed using the second display element. Alternatively, the image information can be displayed using the second display element so as to overlap with the image information displayed using the first display element. Alternatively, image information displayed using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element. As a result, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(13)また、本発明の一態様は、入力部と、表示部と、を有する入出力装置である。 (13) One embodiment of the present invention is an input / output device including an input portion and a display portion.
表示部は上記の表示パネルを備える。 The display unit includes the display panel.
入力部は表示部と重なる領域を備え、入力部は検知領域を備え、検知領域は検知素子を備え、検知素子は画素と重なる領域に近接するものを検知する機能を備える。 The input unit includes a region overlapping with the display unit, the input unit includes a detection region, the detection region includes a detection element, and the detection element has a function of detecting an object close to the region overlapping with the pixel.
(14)また、本発明の一態様は、検知領域が制御線および検知信号線を備える上記の入出力装置である。 (14) One embodiment of the present invention is the above input / output device in which the detection region includes a control line and a detection signal line.
制御線は制御信号を供給する機能を備え、検知信号線は検知信号を供給される機能を備える。 The control line has a function of supplying a control signal, and the detection signal line has a function of being supplied with a detection signal.
検知素子は制御線および検知信号線と電気的に接続され、検知素子は画素と重なる領域に近接するものとの距離および制御信号に基づいて変化する検知信号を供給する機能を備え、検知素子は第1の電極と、第2の電極と、を備える。 The detection element is electrically connected to the control line and the detection signal line, and the detection element has a function of supplying a detection signal that changes based on a distance to the area adjacent to the pixel and a control signal, and the detection element A first electrode; and a second electrode.
第1の電極は画素と重なる領域に透光性を有する領域を備え、第1の電極は制御線と電気的に接続される。 The first electrode includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel, and the first electrode is electrically connected to the control line.
第2の電極は画素と重なる領域に透光性を有する領域を備え、第2の電極は検知信号線と電気的に接続され、第2の電極は画素と重なる領域に近接するものによって一部が遮られる電界を、第1の電極との間に形成するように配置される。 The second electrode includes a region having a light-transmitting property in a region overlapping with the pixel, the second electrode is electrically connected to the detection signal line, and the second electrode is partially connected to the region overlapping with the pixel. Is arranged so as to form an electric field between the first electrode and the first electrode.
これにより、表示部を用いて画像情報を表示しながら、表示部と重なる領域に近接するものを検知することができる。または、表示部に近接させる指などをポインタに用いて、位置情報を入力することができる。または、位置情報を表示部に表示する画像情報に関連付けることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することができる。 Accordingly, it is possible to detect an object that is close to a region overlapping with the display unit while displaying image information using the display unit. Alternatively, position information can be input using a finger or the like that is brought close to the display portion as a pointer. Alternatively, the position information can be associated with image information displayed on the display unit. As a result, a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
(15)また、本発明の一態様は、キーボード、ハードウェアボタン、ポインティングデバイス、タッチセンサ、照度センサ、撮像装置、音声入力装置、視点入力装置、姿勢検出装置、のうち一以上と、上記の表示パネルと、を含む、情報処理装置である。 (15) One embodiment of the present invention includes one or more of a keyboard, a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an imaging device, a voice input device, a viewpoint input device, and a posture detection device, And an information processing apparatus including a display panel.
これにより、さまざまな入力装置を用いて供給する情報に基づいて、画像情報または制御情報を演算装置に生成させることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, based on the information supplied using various input devices, image information or control information can be generated by the arithmetic device. As a result, a novel information processing apparatus that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
本明細書に添付した図面では、構成要素を機能ごとに分類し、互いに独立したブロックとしてブロック図を示しているが、実際の構成要素は機能ごとに完全に切り分けることが難しく、一つの構成要素が複数の機能に係わることもあり得る。 In the drawings attached to the present specification, the components are classified by function, and the block diagram is shown as an independent block. However, it is difficult to completely separate the actual components for each function. May involve multiple functions.
本明細書においてトランジスタが有するソースとドレインは、トランジスタの極性及び各端子に与えられる電位の高低によって、その呼び方が入れ替わる。一般的に、nチャネル型トランジスタでは、低い電位が与えられる端子がソースと呼ばれ、高い電位が与えられる端子がドレインと呼ばれる。また、pチャネル型トランジスタでは、低い電位が与えられる端子がドレインと呼ばれ、高い電位が与えられる端子がソースと呼ばれる。本明細書では、便宜上、ソースとドレインとが固定されているものと仮定して、トランジスタの接続関係を説明する場合があるが、実際には上記電位の関係に従ってソースとドレインの呼び方が入れ替わる。 In this specification, the terms “source” and “drain” of a transistor interchange with each other depending on the polarity of the transistor or the level of potential applied to each terminal. In general, in an n-channel transistor, a terminal to which a low potential is applied is called a source, and a terminal to which a high potential is applied is called a drain. In a p-channel transistor, a terminal to which a low potential is applied is called a drain, and a terminal to which a high potential is applied is called a source. In this specification, for the sake of convenience, the connection relationship between transistors may be described on the assumption that the source and the drain are fixed. However, the names of the source and the drain are actually switched according to the above-described potential relationship. .
本明細書においてトランジスタのソースとは、活性層として機能する半導体膜の一部であるソース領域、或いは上記半導体膜に接続されたソース電極を意味する。同様に、トランジスタのドレインとは、上記半導体膜の一部であるドレイン領域、或いは上記半導体膜に接続されたドレイン電極を意味する。また、ゲートはゲート電極を意味する。 In this specification, the source of a transistor means a source region that is part of a semiconductor film functioning as an active layer or a source electrode connected to the semiconductor film. Similarly, a drain of a transistor means a drain region that is part of the semiconductor film or a drain electrode connected to the semiconductor film. The gate means a gate electrode.
本明細書においてトランジスタが直列に接続されている状態とは、例えば、第1のトランジスタのソースまたはドレインの一方のみが、第2のトランジスタのソースまたはドレインの一方のみに接続されている状態を意味する。また、トランジスタが並列に接続されている状態とは、第1のトランジスタのソースまたはドレインの一方が第2のトランジスタのソースまたはドレインの一方に接続され、第1のトランジスタのソースまたはドレインの他方が第2のトランジスタのソースまたはドレインの他方に接続されている状態を意味する。 In this specification, the state where the transistors are connected in series means, for example, a state where only one of the source and the drain of the first transistor is connected to only one of the source and the drain of the second transistor. To do. In addition, the state where the transistors are connected in parallel means that one of the source and the drain of the first transistor is connected to one of the source and the drain of the second transistor, and the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is connected. It means a state of being connected to the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor.
本明細書において接続とは、電気的な接続を意味しており、電流、電圧または電位が、供給可能、或いは伝送可能な状態に相当する。従って、接続している状態とは、直接接続している状態を必ずしも指すわけではなく、電流、電圧または電位が、供給可能、或いは伝送可能であるように、配線、抵抗、ダイオード、トランジスタなどの回路素子を介して間接的に接続している状態も、その範疇に含む。 In this specification, the connection means an electrical connection, and corresponds to a state where current, voltage, or potential can be supplied or transmitted. Therefore, the connected state does not necessarily indicate a directly connected state, and a wiring, a resistor, a diode, a transistor, or the like is provided so that current, voltage, or potential can be supplied or transmitted. The state of being indirectly connected through a circuit element is also included in the category.
本明細書において回路図上は独立している構成要素どうしが接続されている場合であっても、実際には、例えば配線の一部が電極として機能する場合など、一の導電膜が、複数の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている場合もある。本明細書において接続とは、このような、一の導電膜が、複数の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている場合も、その範疇に含める。 In this specification, even when independent components on the circuit diagram are connected to each other, in practice, for example, when a part of the wiring functions as an electrode, In some cases, it also has the functions of the components. In this specification, the term “connection” includes a case where one conductive film has functions of a plurality of components.
また、本明細書中において、トランジスタの第1の電極または第2の電極の一方がソース電極を、他方がドレイン電極を指す。 In this specification, one of a first electrode and a second electrode of a transistor refers to a source electrode, and the other refers to a drain electrode.
本発明の一態様によれば、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。または、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。または、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することができる。または、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。または、新規な表示パネル、新規な表示装置、新規な入出力装置、新規な情報処理装置または新規な半導体装置を提供することができる。 According to one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided. Alternatively, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided. Alternatively, a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided. Alternatively, a novel information processing device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided. Alternatively, a novel display panel, a novel display device, a novel input / output device, a novel information processing device, or a novel semiconductor device can be provided.
なお、これらの効果の記載は、他の効果の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、必ずしも、これらの効果の全てを有する必要はない。なお、これら以外の効果は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、自ずと明らかとなるものであり、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、これら以外の効果を抽出することが可能である。 Note that the description of these effects does not disturb the existence of other effects. Note that one embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily have all of these effects. It should be noted that the effects other than these are naturally obvious from the description of the specification, drawings, claims, etc., and it is possible to extract the other effects from the descriptions of the specification, drawings, claims, etc. It is.
実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する模式図。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの構成を説明する上面図。FIG. 6 is a top view illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの構成を説明する断面図。4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment. FIG. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの構成を説明する断面図。4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment. FIG. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素の構成を説明する下面図。FIG. 10 is a bottom view illustrating a structure of a pixel of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの画素回路を説明する回路図。FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram illustrating a pixel circuit of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルを用いた表示装置の構成を説明するブロック図。FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display device using a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの構成を説明するブロック図。FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display panel according to Embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの反射膜の構成を説明する断面図。Sectional drawing explaining the structure of the reflecting film of the display panel which concerns on Embodiment. 実施の形態に係る表示パネルの反射膜の構成を説明する上面図。FIG. 6 is a top view illustrating a structure of a reflective film of a display panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力装置の構成を説明するブロック図。FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力装置の構成を説明する上面図。FIG. 6 is a top view illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力装置の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力装置の構成を説明する断面図。FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of an input / output device according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明するブロック図および投影図。FIG. 2 is a block diagram and a projection view illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の駆動方法を説明するフロー図。FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a method for driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment. 実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の駆動方法を説明するフロー図。FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a method for driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment. 実施の形態に係る電子機器の構成を説明する図。8A and 8B illustrate a structure of an electronic device according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力パネルの構成を説明する図。FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of an input / output panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力パネルの構成を説明する図。FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of an input / output panel according to an embodiment. 実施の形態に係る入出力モジュールの構成を説明する図。FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of an input / output module according to an embodiment.
本発明の一態様の表示パネルは、画素を有し、画素は光学素子、被覆膜、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子を備える。光学素子は透光性、第1の領域、第2の領域および第3の領域を備える。第1の領域は可視光を供給される領域を含み、第2の領域は被覆膜と接する領域を含み、第3の領域は可視光の一部を射出する機能を備え、第3の領域は第1の領域の可視光を供給される領域の面積以下の面積を備える。被覆膜は可視光に対する反射性を備え、被覆膜は可視光の一部を反射して、第3の領域に供給する機能を備える。第1の表示素子は反射膜を備え、第1の表示素子は反射膜が反射する光を制御する機能を備える。反射膜は光学素子の第3の領域が射出する光を遮らない形状を備える。第2の表示素子は、可視光を供給する機能を備える。 The display panel of one embodiment of the present invention includes a pixel, and the pixel includes an optical element, a coating film, a first display element, and a second display element. The optical element has translucency, a first region, a second region, and a third region. The first region includes a region to which visible light is supplied, the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film, and the third region has a function of emitting a part of visible light, and the third region Comprises an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied. The coating film has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film has a function of reflecting a part of visible light and supplying it to the third region. The first display element includes a reflective film, and the first display element has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film. The reflective film has a shape that does not block the light emitted by the third region of the optical element. The second display element has a function of supplying visible light.
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いて、反射膜が反射する光の強度を制御して、表示をすることができる。または、第2の表示素子を用いて、第1の表示素子を用いた表示を補うことができる。または、第1の領域に供給した可視光を、効率よく第3の領域から射出することができる。または、第1の領域に供給される光を集光して、第3の領域から射出することができる。例えば、第2の表示素子に有機EL素子を用いる場合、有機EL素子の面積を第3の領域の面積より広くすることができる。または、第3の領域より広い面積の有機EL素子が供給する光を第3の領域に集光することができる。または、第3の領域が射出する光の強度を保ちながら、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Accordingly, display can be performed by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element. Alternatively, display using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element. Alternatively, visible light supplied to the first region can be efficiently emitted from the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied to the first region can be condensed and emitted from the third region. For example, when an organic EL element is used for the second display element, the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the density of the current flowing through the organic EL element while maintaining the intensity of light emitted from the third region. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
実施の形態について、図面を用いて詳細に説明する。但し、本発明は以下の説明に限定されず、本発明の趣旨及びその範囲から逸脱することなくその形態及び詳細を様々に変更し得ることは当業者であれば容易に理解される。従って、本発明は以下に示す実施の形態の記載内容に限定して解釈されるものではない。なお、以下に説明する発明の構成において、同一部分又は同様な機能を有する部分には同一の符号を異なる図面間で共通して用い、その繰り返しの説明は省略する。 Embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the following description, and it is easily understood by those skilled in the art that modes and details can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the description of the embodiments below. Note that in structures of the invention described below, the same portions or portions having similar functions are denoted by the same reference numerals in different drawings, and description thereof is not repeated.
(実施の形態1)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示パネル700の構成について、図1、図2、図10乃至図16を参照しながら説明する。
(Embodiment 1)
In this embodiment, the structure of the display panel 700 of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
図1は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図1(A)は画素の投影図であり、図1(B)は図1(A)に示す画素の構成の一部を説明する分解立体図である。また、図1(C)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2における画素の構成の一部を説明する断面図であり、図1(D)は図1(A)に示す画素を説明する上面図である。 FIG. 1 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a projection view of a pixel, and FIG. 1B is an exploded view illustrating a part of the configuration of the pixel shown in FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view illustrating part of the structure of the pixel along the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A. FIG. 1D illustrates the pixel illustrated in FIG. It is a top view to explain.
図2は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図2(A)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2における画素の断面図であり、図2(B)は図2(A)に示す画素の一部の構成を説明する断面図であり、図2(C)は図2(A)に示す画素の一部の構成を説明する断面図である。 FIG. 2 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 2A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel taken along a cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of part of the pixel illustrated in FIG. FIG. 2C is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of part of the pixel illustrated in FIG.
図10は本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図10(A)は表示パネルの上面図であり、図10(B)は図10(A)に示す表示パネルの画素の一部を説明する上面図である。図10(C)は図10(B)に示す画素の構成を説明する模式図である。 FIG. 10 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10A is a top view of the display panel, and FIG. 10B is a top view illustrating part of the pixels of the display panel illustrated in FIG. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram illustrating the structure of the pixel illustrated in FIG.
図11および図12は表示パネルの構成を説明する断面図である。図11(A)は図10(A)の切断線X1−X2、切断線X3−X4、切断線X5−X6における断面図であり、図11(B)は図11(A)の一部を説明する図である。 11 and 12 are cross-sectional views illustrating the structure of the display panel. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line X1-X2, the cutting line X3-X4, and the cutting line X5-X6 in FIG. 10A. FIG. 11B is a partial view of FIG. It is a figure explaining.
図12(A)は図10(A)の切断線X7−X8、切断線X9−X10における断面図であり、図12(B)は図12(A)の一部を説明する図である。 12A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line X7-X8 and the cutting line X9-X10 in FIG. 10A, and FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating part of FIG.
図13(A)は図10(B)に示す表示パネルの画素の一部を説明する下面図であり、図13(B)は図13(A)に示す構成の一部を省略して説明する下面図である。 13A is a bottom view illustrating part of the pixels of the display panel illustrated in FIG. 10B, and FIG. 13B is illustrated with a part of the structure illustrated in FIG. 13A omitted. FIG.
図14は本発明の一態様の表示パネルが備える画素回路の構成を説明する回路図である。 FIG. 14 is a circuit diagram illustrating a structure of a pixel circuit included in the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
図15(A)は本発明の一態様の表示パネルおよびそれを用いた表示装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。図15(B)は、図15(A)に示す画素の構成を説明するブロック図である。 FIG. 15A is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention and a display device using the display panel. FIG. 15B is a block diagram illustrating a structure of the pixel shown in FIG.
図16(A)は図15(A)に示す表示パネルの構成とは異なる構成を説明するブロック図である。図16(B)は本発明の一態様の表示パネルを用いた表示装置の図である。 FIG. 16A is a block diagram illustrating a structure different from the structure of the display panel illustrated in FIG. FIG. 16B illustrates a display device using the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention.
なお、本明細書において、1以上の整数を値にとる変数を符号に用いる場合がある。例えば、1以上の整数の値をとる変数pを含む(p)を、最大p個の構成要素のいずれかを特定する符号の一部に用いる場合がある。また、例えば、1以上の整数の値をとる変数mおよび変数nを含む(m,n)を、最大m×n個の構成要素のいずれかを特定する符号の一部に用いる場合がある。 In the present specification, a variable having an integer value of 1 or more may be used for the sign. For example, (p) including a variable p that takes an integer value of 1 or more may be used as a part of a code that identifies any of the maximum p components. Further, for example, a variable m that takes an integer value of 1 or more and (m, n) including a variable n may be used as part of a code that identifies any of the maximum m × n components.
<表示パネルの構成例1.>
本実施の形態で説明する表示パネル700は、画素702(i,j)を有する(図15(A)参照)。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 1. >
A display panel 700 described in this embodiment includes a pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 15A).
《画素の構成例1.》
画素702(i,j)は、光学素子560、被覆膜565、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を備える(図1(A)、図1(B)、図2(A)および図2(B)参照)。
<< Pixel Configuration Example 1. >>
The pixel 702 (i, j) includes an optical element 560, a coating film 565, a first display element 750 (i, j), and a second display element 550 (i, j) (FIG. 1A, (Refer FIG. 1 (B), FIG. 2 (A), and FIG. 2 (B)).
《光学素子の構成例》
光学素子560は透光性を備え、光学素子560は第1の領域560A、第2の領域560Bおよび第3の領域560Cを備える(図1(B)、図1(C)および図2(B)参照)。
<< Configuration example of optical element >>
The optical element 560 has a light-transmitting property, and the optical element 560 includes a first region 560A, a second region 560B, and a third region 560C (FIGS. 1B, 1C, and 2B). )reference).
第1の領域560Aは可視光を供給される領域を含む。例えば、第1の領域560Aは第2の表示素子550(i,j)から可視光を供給される。 First region 560A includes a region to which visible light is supplied. For example, the first region 560A is supplied with visible light from the second display element 550 (i, j).
第2の領域560Bは被覆膜565と接する領域を含む。 The second region 560B includes a region in contact with the coating film 565.
第3の領域560Cは可視光の一部を射出する機能を備え、第3の領域は第1の領域560Aの可視光を供給される領域の面積以下の面積を備える。 The third region 560C has a function of emitting part of visible light, and the third region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied.
《被覆膜の構成例》
被覆膜565は可視光に対する反射性を備え、被覆膜565は可視光の一部を反射して第3の領域560Cに供給する機能を備える。例えば、第2の表示素子550(i,j)が射出する可視光を第3の領域560Cに向けて反射することができる。具体的には、実線の矢印で図示するように、第1の領域560Aから光学素子560に入射した可視光の一部は、第2の領域560Bに接する被覆膜565によって反射され、第3の領域560Cから射出することができる(図2(B)参照)。
<Configuration example of coating film>
The coating film 565 has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film 565 has a function of reflecting a part of visible light and supplying it to the third region 560C. For example, visible light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) can be reflected toward the third region 560C. Specifically, as illustrated by a solid arrow, a part of visible light incident on the optical element 560 from the first region 560A is reflected by the coating film 565 in contact with the second region 560B, and the third region The region 560C can be ejected (see FIG. 2B).
《第1の表示素子750(i,j)の構成例》
第1の表示素子750(i,j)は反射膜751Bを備え、第1の表示素子750(i,j)は反射膜751Bが反射する光を制御する機能を備える(図2(A)参照)。
<< Configuration Example of First Display Element 750 (i, j) >>
The first display element 750 (i, j) includes a reflective film 751B, and the first display element 750 (i, j) has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 2A). ).
反射膜751Bは、光学素子560の第3の領域560Cが射出する光を遮らない形状を備える(図1(B)参照)。例えば、第3の領域560Cと重なる領域に光を遮らない領域751Hを備える形状を反射膜751Bに用いることができる。 The reflective film 751B has a shape that does not block the light emitted from the third region 560C of the optical element 560 (see FIG. 1B). For example, a shape including a region 751H that does not block light in a region overlapping with the third region 560C can be used for the reflective film 751B.
なお、例えば、透光性を備える導電膜751Aおよび透光性を備える導電膜751Cを積層した材料を、電極751(i,j)の第3の領域560Cと重なる領域に用い、導電膜751A、反射膜751Bおよび導電膜751Cを積層した材料を、第3の領域560Cと重ならない領域に用いることができる(図2(A)参照)。 Note that for example, a material in which a conductive film 751A having a light-transmitting property and a conductive film 751C having a light-transmitting property are stacked is used for a region overlapping with the third region 560C of the electrode 751 (i, j). A material in which the reflective film 751B and the conductive film 751C are stacked can be used for a region that does not overlap with the third region 560C (see FIG. 2A).
例えば、反射膜751Bを反射型の液晶素子に用いることができる。また、反射型の液晶表示素子を第1の表示素子750(i,j)に用いることができる。 For example, the reflective film 751B can be used for a reflective liquid crystal element. In addition, a reflective liquid crystal display element can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
具体的には、第1の表示素子750(i,j)は、電極751(i,j)、電極752および液晶材料を含む層753を備える。電極752は、電極751(i,j)との間に液晶材料の配向を制御する電界が形成されるように配置される(図2(A)参照)。 Specifically, the first display element 750 (i, j) includes an electrode 751 (i, j), an electrode 752, and a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. The electrode 752 is disposed so as to form an electric field for controlling the alignment of the liquid crystal material between the electrode 751 (i, j) (see FIG. 2A).
なお、第1の表示素子750(i,j)は、配向膜AF1および配向膜AF2を備える。配向膜AF2は、配向膜AF1との間に液晶材料を含む層753を挟む領域を備える。 Note that the first display element 750 (i, j) includes an alignment film AF1 and an alignment film AF2. The alignment film AF2 includes a region in which a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between the alignment film AF1.
《第2の表示素子550(i,j)の構成例1.》
第2の表示素子550(i,j)は可視光を供給する機能を備える(図2(A)参照)。例えば、第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、可視光を第1の領域560Aに供給する機能を備える。
<< Configuration Example 1 of Second Display Element 550 (i, j) >>
The second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of supplying visible light (see FIG. 2A). For example, the second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of supplying visible light to the first region 560A.
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いて、反射膜が反射する光の強度を制御して、表示をすることができる。または、第1の表示素子は外光を表示に利用することができる。または、外光の映り込みを認識しにくくすることができる。または、第2の表示素子を用いて、第1の表示素子を用いた表示を補うことができる。または、第1の領域に供給した可視光を、効率よく第3の領域から射出することができる。または、第1の領域に供給される光を集光して、第3の領域から射出することができる。例えば、第2の表示素子に有機EL素子を用いる場合、有機EL素子の面積を第3の領域の面積より広くすることができる。または、第3の領域より広い面積の有機EL素子が供給する光を第3の領域に集光することができる。または、第3の領域が射出する光の強度を保ちながら、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Accordingly, display can be performed by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element. Alternatively, the first display element can use external light for display. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize external light reflection. Alternatively, display using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element. Alternatively, visible light supplied to the first region can be efficiently emitted from the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied to the first region can be condensed and emitted from the third region. For example, when an organic EL element is used for the second display element, the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the density of the current flowing through the organic EL element while maintaining the intensity of light emitted from the third region. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
《画素の構成例2.》
また、画素702(i,j)が備える光学素子560の第2の領域560Bは、透光性の材料を含む。当該透光性の材料は、1.3以上2.5以下の屈折率を備える(図2(C)参照)。
<< Pixel Configuration Example 2. >>
In addition, the second region 560B of the optical element 560 included in the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a light-transmitting material. The light-transmitting material has a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5 (see FIG. 2C).
また、画素702(i,j)の被覆膜565は、透光性の膜565Bを備える。当該透光性の膜565Bは、第2の領域560Bと接する領域を備え、透光性の膜565Bは、第2の領域560Bより低い屈折率を備える。 Further, the coating film 565 of the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a light-transmitting film 565B. The light-transmitting film 565B includes a region in contact with the second region 560B, and the light-transmitting film 565B includes a refractive index lower than that of the second region 560B.
また、画素702(i,j)が備える被覆膜565は、金属膜565Aを含む。 In addition, the covering film 565 included in the pixel 702 (i, j) includes a metal film 565A.
これにより、被覆膜は効率よく光を反射することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the coating film can reflect light efficiently. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
《画素の構成例3.》
また、画素702(i,j)は、機能層520の一部と、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と、第2の表示素子550(i,j)と、を有する(図11(A)、図12(A)および図14参照)。
<< Pixel Configuration Example 3. >>
The pixel 702 (i, j) includes a part of the functional layer 520, a first display element 750 (i, j), and a second display element 550 (i, j) (FIG. 11). (See (A), FIG. 12 (A) and FIG. 14).
《機能層520》
機能層520は、第1の導電膜、第2の導電膜、絶縁膜501Cおよび画素回路530(i,j)を含む。また、機能層520は、光学素子560および被覆膜565を含む(図11(A)参照)。なお、画素回路530(i,j)は、例えばトランジスタMを含む。
<Functional layer 520>
The functional layer 520 includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, an insulating film 501C, and a pixel circuit 530 (i, j). The functional layer 520 includes an optical element 560 and a coating film 565 (see FIG. 11A). Note that the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) includes a transistor M, for example.
また、機能層520は、絶縁膜528、絶縁膜521A、絶縁膜521B、絶縁膜518および絶縁膜516を含む。 The functional layer 520 includes an insulating film 528, an insulating film 521A, an insulating film 521B, an insulating film 518, and an insulating film 516.
《画素回路》
画素回路530(i,j)は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を駆動する機能を備える(図14参照)。
<Pixel circuit>
The pixel circuit 530 (i, j) has a function of driving the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 14).
これにより、例えば同一の工程を用いて形成することができる画素回路を用いて、第1の表示素子と、第1の表示素子とは異なる方法を用いて表示をする第2の表示素子と、を駆動することができる。具体的には、反射型の表示素子を第1の表示素子に用いて、消費電力を低減することができる。または、外光が明るい環境下において高いコントラストで画像を良好に表示することができる。または、光を射出する第2の表示素子を用いて、暗い環境下で画像を良好に表示することができる。または、絶縁膜を用いて、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子の間または第1の表示素子および画素回路の間における不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, for example, using a pixel circuit that can be formed using the same process, the first display element and the second display element that displays using a method different from the first display element, Can be driven. Specifically, power consumption can be reduced by using a reflective display element as the first display element. Alternatively, an image can be favorably displayed with high contrast in an environment where the outside light is bright. Alternatively, an image can be favorably displayed in a dark environment by using the second display element that emits light. Alternatively, by using an insulating film, diffusion of impurities between the first display element and the second display element or between the first display element and the pixel circuit can be suppressed. As a result, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
スイッチ、トランジスタ、ダイオード、抵抗素子、インダクタまたは容量素子等を画素回路530(i,j)に用いることができる。 A switch, a transistor, a diode, a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, or the like can be used for the pixel circuit 530 (i, j).
例えば、単数または複数のトランジスタをスイッチに用いることができる。または、並列に接続された複数のトランジスタ、直列に接続された複数のトランジスタ、直列と並列が組み合わされて接続された複数のトランジスタを、一のスイッチに用いることができる。 For example, one or more transistors can be used for the switch. Alternatively, a plurality of transistors connected in parallel, a plurality of transistors connected in series, and a plurality of transistors connected in combination of series and parallel can be used for one switch.
例えば、画素回路530(i,j)は、信号線S1(j)、信号線S2(j)、走査線G1(i)、走査線G2(i)、配線CSCOMおよび導電膜ANOと電気的に接続される(図14参照)。なお、図示しないが、導電膜512Aは、信号線S1(j)と電気的に接続される。 For example, the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) is electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j), the signal line S2 (j), the scanning line G1 (i), the scanning line G2 (i), the wiring CSCOM, and the conductive film ANO. Connected (see FIG. 14). Note that although not illustrated, the conductive film 512A is electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j).
画素回路530(i,j)は、スイッチSW1、容量素子C11を含む(図14参照)。 The pixel circuit 530 (i, j) includes a switch SW1 and a capacitor C11 (see FIG. 14).
画素回路530(i,j)は、スイッチSW2、トランジスタMおよび容量素子C12を含む。 Pixel circuit 530 (i, j) includes switch SW2, transistor M, and capacitor C12.
例えば、走査線G1(i)と電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、信号線S1(j)と電気的に接続される第1の電極と、を有するトランジスタを、スイッチSW1に用いることができる。 For example, a transistor including a gate electrode electrically connected to the scan line G1 (i) and a first electrode electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j) can be used for the switch SW1. .
容量素子C11は、スイッチSW1に用いるトランジスタの第2の電極と電気的に接続される第1の電極と、配線CSCOMと電気的に接続される第2の電極と、を有する。 The capacitor C11 includes a first electrode that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW1, and a second electrode that is electrically connected to the wiring CSCOM.
例えば、走査線G2(i)と電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、信号線S2(j)と電気的に接続される第1の電極と、を有するトランジスタを、スイッチSW2に用いることができる。 For example, a transistor including a gate electrode electrically connected to the scan line G2 (i) and a first electrode electrically connected to the signal line S2 (j) can be used for the switch SW2. .
トランジスタMは、スイッチSW2に用いるトランジスタの第2の電極と電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、導電膜ANOと電気的に接続される第1の電極と、を有する。 The transistor M includes a gate electrode that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW2, and a first electrode that is electrically connected to the conductive film ANO.
なお、半導体膜をゲート電極との間に挟むように設けられた導電膜を備えるトランジスタを、トランジスタMに用いることができる。例えば、トランジスタMのゲート電極と同じ電位を供給することができる配線と電気的に接続される導電膜を当該導電膜に用いることができる。 Note that a transistor including a conductive film provided so that a semiconductor film is interposed between a gate electrode and the gate electrode can be used for the transistor M. For example, a conductive film that is electrically connected to a wiring that can supply the same potential as the gate electrode of the transistor M can be used for the conductive film.
容量素子C12は、スイッチSW2に用いるトランジスタの第2の電極と電気的に接続される第1の電極と、トランジスタMの第1の電極と電気的に接続される第2の電極と、を有する。 The capacitor C12 includes a first electrode that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW2, and a second electrode that is electrically connected to the first electrode of the transistor M. .
なお、第1の表示素子750(i,j)の第1の電極を、スイッチSW1に用いるトランジスタの第2の電極と電気的に接続する。また、第1の表示素子750(i,j)の第2の電極を、配線VCOM1と電気的に接続する。これにより、第1の表示素子750を駆動することができる。 Note that the first electrode of the first display element 750 (i, j) is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor used for the switch SW1. In addition, the second electrode of the first display element 750 (i, j) is electrically connected to the wiring VCOM1. Accordingly, the first display element 750 can be driven.
また、第2の表示素子550(i,j)の電極551(i,j)をトランジスタMの第2の電極と電気的に接続し、第2の表示素子550(i,j)の電極552を導電膜VCOM2と電気的に接続する。これにより、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を駆動することができる。 In addition, the electrode 551 (i, j) of the second display element 550 (i, j) is electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor M, and the electrode 552 of the second display element 550 (i, j). Is electrically connected to the conductive film VCOM2. Accordingly, the second display element 550 (i, j) can be driven.
《絶縁膜501C》
絶縁膜501Cは、第1の導電膜および第2の導電膜の間に挟まれる領域を備え、絶縁膜501Cは開口部591Aを備える(図12(A)参照)。また、絶縁膜501Cは開口部591Cを備える。
<< Insulating film 501C >>
The insulating film 501C includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film, and the insulating film 501C includes an opening 591A (see FIG. 12A). The insulating film 501C includes an opening 591C.
《第1の導電膜》
第1の導電膜は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と電気的に接続される。具体的には、第1の表示素子750(i,j)の電極751(i,j)と電気的に接続される。なお、電極751(i,j)を、第1の導電膜に用いることができる。
<< First conductive film >>
The first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element 750 (i, j). Specifically, it is electrically connected to the electrode 751 (i, j) of the first display element 750 (i, j). Note that the electrode 751 (i, j) can be used for the first conductive film.
《第2の導電膜》
第2の導電膜は、第1の導電膜と重なる領域を備える。第2の導電膜は、開口部591Aにおいて第1の導電膜と電気的に接続される。例えば、導電膜512Bを第2の導電膜に用いることができる。ところで、絶縁膜501Cに設けられた開口部591Aにおいて第2の導電膜と電気的に接続される第1の導電膜を、貫通電極ということができる。
<< Second conductive film >>
The second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film. The second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening 591A. For example, the conductive film 512B can be used for the second conductive film. By the way, the first conductive film electrically connected to the second conductive film in the opening 591A provided in the insulating film 501C can be referred to as a through electrode.
第2の導電膜は、画素回路530(i,j)と電気的に接続される。例えば、画素回路530(i,j)のスイッチSW1に用いるトランジスタのソース電極またはドレイン電極として機能する導電膜を、第2の導電膜に用いることができる。 The second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j). For example, a conductive film functioning as a source electrode or a drain electrode of a transistor used for the switch SW1 of the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) can be used for the second conductive film.
《第2の表示素子550(i,j)の構成例2.》
また、第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、画素回路530(i,j)と電気的に接続される(図11(A)および図14参照)。第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、機能層520に向けて光を射出する機能を備える。第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、例えば、絶縁膜501Cまたは絶縁膜501Cに設けられた開口に向けて光を射出する機能を備える。
<< Configuration Example of Second Display Element 550 (i, j) 2. >>
In addition, the second display element 550 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) (see FIGS. 11A and 14). The second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the functional layer 520. The second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the opening provided in the insulating film 501C or the insulating film 501C, for example.
第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を用いた表示を視認できる範囲の一部において、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を用いた表示を視認できるように配設される。例えば、外光を反射する強度を制御して画像情報を表示する第1の表示素子750(i,j)に外光が入射し反射する方向を、破線の矢印を用いて図中に示す(図12(A)参照)。また、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を用いた表示を視認できる範囲の一部に第2の表示素子550(i,j)が光を射出する方向を、実線の矢印を用いて図中に示す(図11(A)参照)。 The second display element 550 (i, j) uses the second display element 550 (i, j) in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized. It is arranged so that the displayed display can be visually recognized. For example, the direction in which the external light is incident and reflected on the first display element 750 (i, j) that displays the image information by controlling the intensity of reflecting the external light is shown in the figure using a dashed arrow ( (See FIG. 12A). Further, the direction in which the second display element 550 (i, j) emits light in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized is indicated by a solid line arrow. This is shown in the figure (see FIG. 11A).
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いた表示を視認することができる領域の一部において、第2の表示素子を用いた表示を視認することができる。または、表示パネルの姿勢等を変えることなく使用者は表示を視認することができる。または、第1の表示素子が反射する光が表現する物体色と、第2の表示素子が射出する光が表現する光源色とを掛け合わせることができる。または、物体色および光源色を用いて絵画的な表示をすることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the display using the 2nd display element can be visually recognized in a part of field which can visually recognize the display using the 1st display element. Alternatively, the user can visually recognize the display without changing the posture of the display panel. Alternatively, the object color expressed by the light reflected by the first display element can be multiplied by the light source color expressed by the light emitted by the second display element. Alternatively, a pictorial display can be performed using the object color and the light source color. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
例えば、第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、電極551(i,j)と、電極552と、発光性の材料を含む層553(j)と、を備える(図11(A)参照)。 For example, the second display element 550 (i, j) includes an electrode 551 (i, j), an electrode 552, and a layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material (see FIG. 11A). ).
電極552は、電極551(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。 The electrode 552 includes a region overlapping with the electrode 551 (i, j).
発光性の材料を含む層553(j)は、電極551(i,j)および電極552の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material includes a region sandwiched between the electrode 551 (i, j) and the electrode 552.
電極551(i,j)は、接続部522において、画素回路530(i,j)と電気的に接続される。なお、電極551(i,j)は、導電膜ANOと電気的に接続され、電極552は、導電膜VCOM2と電気的に接続される(図14参照)。 The electrode 551 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) at the connection portion 522. Note that the electrode 551 (i, j) is electrically connected to the conductive film ANO, and the electrode 552 is electrically connected to the conductive film VCOM2 (see FIG. 14).
《絶縁膜521、絶縁膜528、絶縁膜518、絶縁膜516等》
絶縁膜521は、画素回路530(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える(図11(A)参照)。
<< Insulating Film 521, Insulating Film 528, Insulating Film 518, Insulating Film 516, etc. >>
The insulating film 521 includes a region sandwiched between the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 11A).
例えば、積層膜を絶縁膜521に用いることができる。例えば、絶縁膜521Aおよび絶縁膜521Bの積層膜を絶縁膜521に用いることができる。 For example, a stacked film can be used for the insulating film 521. For example, a stacked film of the insulating films 521A and 521B can be used for the insulating film 521.
絶縁膜528は、絶縁膜521および基板570の間に挟まれる領域を備え、第2の表示素子550(i,j)と重なる領域に開口部を備える。電極551(i,j)の周縁に沿って形成される絶縁膜528は、電極551(i,j)および電極552の短絡を防止する。 The insulating film 528 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the substrate 570, and includes an opening in a region overlapping with the second display element 550 (i, j). The insulating film 528 formed along the periphery of the electrode 551 (i, j) prevents a short circuit between the electrode 551 (i, j) and the electrode 552.
絶縁膜518は、絶縁膜521および画素回路530(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える。例えば、絶縁膜518は、絶縁膜521およびトランジスタMの間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The insulating film 518 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the pixel circuit 530 (i, j). For example, the insulating film 518 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the transistor M.
絶縁膜516は、絶縁膜518および画素回路530(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える。例えば、絶縁膜516は、絶縁膜518およびトランジスタMの間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 518 and the pixel circuit 530 (i, j). For example, the insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 518 and the transistor M.
また、表示パネル700は、絶縁膜501Bを有することができる。絶縁膜501Bは、開口部592A、開口部592Bおよび開口部592Cを備える(図11(A)または図12(A)参照)。 In addition, the display panel 700 can include the insulating film 501B. The insulating film 501B includes an opening 592A, an opening 592B, and an opening 592C (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
開口部592Aは、電極751(i,j)と重なる領域または絶縁膜501Cと重なる領域を備える。 The opening 592A includes a region overlapping with the electrode 751 (i, j) or a region overlapping with the insulating film 501C.
開口部592Bは、導電膜511Bと重なる領域を備える(図11(A)参照)。 The opening 592B includes a region overlapping with the conductive film 511B (see FIG. 11A).
また、開口部592Cは、導電膜511Cと重なる領域を備える(図12(A)参照)。 The opening 592C includes a region overlapping with the conductive film 511C (see FIG. 12A).
<表示パネルの構成例2.>
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネル700は、表示領域231を有する(図15(A)参照)。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 2. >
In addition, the display panel 700 described in this embodiment includes a display region 231 (see FIG. 15A).
《表示領域231》
表示領域231は、一群の複数の画素702(i,1)乃至画素702(i,n)と、他の一群の複数の画素702(1,j)乃至画素702(m,j)と、走査線G1(i)と、信号線S1(j)と、を有する(図15(A)参照)。また、走査線G2(i)と、配線CSCOMと、導電膜ANOと、信号線S2(j)と、を有する。なお、iは1以上m以下の整数であり、jは1以上n以下の整数であり、mおよびnは1以上の整数である。
<< Display area 231 >>
The display region 231 is scanned with a group of a plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) and another group of a plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m, j). A line G1 (i) and a signal line S1 (j) are included (see FIG. 15A). In addition, the scanning line G2 (i), the wiring CSCOM, the conductive film ANO, and the signal line S2 (j) are included. Note that i is an integer of 1 to m, j is an integer of 1 to n, and m and n are integers of 1 or more.
一群の複数の画素702(i,1)乃至画素702(i,n)は画素702(i,j)を含み、一群の複数の画素702(i,1)乃至画素702(i,n)は行方向(図中に矢印R1で示す方向)に配設される。 A group of the plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) includes a pixel 702 (i, j), and a group of the plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) includes Arranged in the row direction (direction indicated by arrow R1 in the figure).
他の一群の複数の画素702(1,j)乃至画素702(m,j)は画素702(i,j)を含み、他の一群の複数の画素702(1,j)乃至画素702(m,j)は行方向と交差する列方向(図中に矢印C1で示す方向)に配設される。 The other group of the plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m, j) includes the pixel 702 (i, j), and the other group of the plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m , J) are arranged in a column direction (direction indicated by an arrow C1 in the drawing) intersecting the row direction.
走査線G1(i)および走査線G2(i)は、行方向に配設される一群の複数の画素702(i,1)乃至画素702(i,n)と電気的に接続される。 The scan line G1 (i) and the scan line G2 (i) are electrically connected to a group of the plurality of pixels 702 (i, 1) to 702 (i, n) arranged in the row direction.
信号線S1(j)および信号線S2(j)は、列方向に配設される他の一群の複数の画素702(1,j)乃至画素702(m,j)と電気的に接続される。 The signal line S1 (j) and the signal line S2 (j) are electrically connected to another group of the plurality of pixels 702 (1, j) to 702 (m, j) arranged in the column direction. .
<表示パネルの構成例3.>
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネル700は、駆動回路GDまたは駆動回路SDを備えることができる(図10(A)および図15参照)。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 3. >
In addition, the display panel 700 described in this embodiment can include the driver circuit GD or the driver circuit SD (see FIGS. 10A and 15).
《駆動回路GD》
駆動回路GDは、制御情報に基づいて選択信号を供給する機能を有する。
<< Drive circuit GD >>
The drive circuit GD has a function of supplying a selection signal based on the control information.
一例を挙げれば、制御情報に基づいて、30Hz以上、好ましくは60Hz以上の頻度で一の走査線に選択信号を供給する機能を備える。これにより、動画像をなめらかに表示することができる。 For example, a function of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher is provided based on the control information. Thereby, a moving image can be displayed smoothly.
例えば、制御情報に基づいて、30Hz未満、好ましくは1Hz未満より好ましくは一分に一回未満の頻度で一の走査線に選択信号を供給する機能を備える。これにより、フリッカーが抑制された状態で静止画像を表示することができる。 For example, it has a function of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute based on the control information. Thereby, a still image can be displayed in a state where flicker is suppressed.
また、表示パネルは、複数の駆動回路を有することができる。例えば、表示パネル700Bは、駆動回路GDAおよび駆動回路GDBを有する(図16(A)参照)。 In addition, the display panel can include a plurality of driver circuits. For example, the display panel 700B includes a driver circuit GDA and a driver circuit GDB (see FIG. 16A).
また、例えば、複数の駆動回路を備える場合、駆動回路GDAが選択信号を供給する頻度と、駆動回路GDBが選択信号を供給する頻度とを、異ならせることができる。具体的には、静止画像を表示する一の領域に選択信号を供給する頻度より高い頻度で、動画像を表示する他の領域に選択信号を供給することができる。これにより、一の領域にフリッカーが抑制された状態で静止画像を表示し、他の領域に滑らかに動画像を表示することができる。 For example, when a plurality of drive circuits are provided, the frequency with which the drive circuit GDA supplies the selection signal and the frequency with which the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal can be made different. Specifically, the selection signal can be supplied to another region displaying the moving image at a frequency higher than the frequency of supplying the selection signal to one region displaying the still image. Thereby, a still image can be displayed in a state where flicker is suppressed in one area, and a moving image can be displayed smoothly in another area.
《駆動回路SD》
駆動回路SDは、駆動回路SD1と、駆動回路SD2と、を有する。駆動回路SD1は、情報V11に基づいて画像信号を供給する機能を有し、駆動回路SD2は、情報V12に基づいて画像信号を供給する機能を有する(図15(A)参照)。
<< Drive circuit SD >>
The drive circuit SD includes a drive circuit SD1 and a drive circuit SD2. The drive circuit SD1 has a function of supplying an image signal based on the information V11, and the drive circuit SD2 has a function of supplying an image signal based on the information V12 (see FIG. 15A).
駆動回路SD1または駆動回路SD2は、画像信号を生成する機能と、当該画像信号を一の表示素子と電気的に接続される画素回路に供給する機能を備える。具体的には、極性が反転する信号を生成する機能を備える。これにより、例えば、液晶表示素子を駆動することができる。 The drive circuit SD1 or the drive circuit SD2 has a function of generating an image signal and a function of supplying the image signal to a pixel circuit that is electrically connected to one display element. Specifically, it has a function of generating a signal whose polarity is inverted. Thereby, for example, a liquid crystal display element can be driven.
例えば、シフトレジスタ等のさまざまな順序回路等を駆動回路SDに用いることができる。 For example, various sequential circuits such as a shift register can be used for the drive circuit SD.
例えば、駆動回路SD1および駆動回路SD2が集積された集積回路を、駆動回路SDに用いることができる。具体的には、シリコン基板上に形成された集積回路を駆動回路SDに用いることができる。 For example, an integrated circuit in which the drive circuit SD1 and the drive circuit SD2 are integrated can be used for the drive circuit SD. Specifically, an integrated circuit formed on a silicon substrate can be used for the drive circuit SD.
例えば、COG(Chip on glass)法またはCOF(Chip on Film)法を用いて、集積回路を端子に実装することができる。具体的には、異方性導電膜を用いて、集積回路を端子に実装することができる。 For example, an integrated circuit can be mounted on a terminal by using a COG (Chip on glass) method or a COF (Chip on Film) method. Specifically, an integrated circuit can be mounted on a terminal using an anisotropic conductive film.
<表示パネルの構成例4.>
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネル700は、機能層720、端子519B、端子519C、基板570、基板770、接合層505、封止材705、構造体KB1、機能膜770P、機能膜770D等を備える(図11(A)または図12(A)参照)。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 4. >
In addition, the display panel 700 described in this embodiment includes a functional layer 720, a terminal 519B, a terminal 519C, a substrate 570, a substrate 770, a bonding layer 505, a sealing material 705, a structure KB1, a functional film 770P, and a functional film 770D. Etc. (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
《機能層720》
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネルは、機能層720を有する。機能層720は、基板770および絶縁膜501Cの間に挟まれる領域を備える。機能層720は、遮光膜BMと、絶縁膜771と、着色膜CF1と、を有する(図11(A)または図12(A)参照)。
<< Functional layer 720 >>
In addition, the display panel described in this embodiment includes a functional layer 720. The functional layer 720 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the insulating film 501C. The functional layer 720 includes a light-blocking film BM, an insulating film 771, and a coloring film CF1 (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
遮光膜BMは、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域に開口部を備える(図12(A)参照)。 The light-shielding film BM includes an opening in a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j) (see FIG. 12A).
着色膜CF1は、基板770および第1の表示素子750(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The colored film CF1 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the first display element 750 (i, j).
絶縁膜771は、着色膜CF1と液晶材料を含む層753の間に挟まれる領域または遮光膜BMと液晶材料を含む層753の間に挟まれる領域を備える。これにより、着色膜CF1の厚さに基づく凹凸を平坦にすることができる。または、遮光膜BMまたは着色膜CF1等から液晶材料を含む層753への不純物の拡散を、抑制することができる。 The insulating film 771 includes a region sandwiched between the colored film CF1 and the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material or a region sandwiched between the light shielding film BM and the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. Thereby, the unevenness | corrugation based on the thickness of colored film CF1 can be made flat. Alternatively, impurity diffusion from the light-blocking film BM, the coloring film CF1, or the like to the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material can be suppressed.
《端子519B、端子519C》
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネルは、端子519Bおよび端子519Cを有する(図11(A)または図12(A)参照)。
<< Terminal 519B, Terminal 519C >>
In addition, the display panel described in this embodiment includes a terminal 519B and a terminal 519C (see FIG. 11A or FIG. 12A).
端子519Bは、導電膜511Bを備える。端子519Bは、例えば、信号線S1(j)と電気的に接続される。 The terminal 519B includes a conductive film 511B. For example, the terminal 519B is electrically connected to the signal line S1 (j).
端子519Cは、導電膜511Cを備える。導電膜511Cは、例えば、配線VCOM1と電気的に接続される。 The terminal 519C includes a conductive film 511C. The conductive film 511C is electrically connected to, for example, the wiring VCOM1.
なお、導電材料CPは、端子519Cと電極752の間に挟まれ、端子519Cと電極752を電気的に接続する機能を備える。例えば、導電性の粒子を導電材料CPに用いることができる。 Note that the conductive material CP is sandwiched between the terminal 519C and the electrode 752, and has a function of electrically connecting the terminal 519C and the electrode 752. For example, conductive particles can be used for the conductive material CP.
《基板570、基板770》
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネルは、基板570と、基板770と、を有する。
<< Substrate 570, Substrate 770 >>
In addition, the display panel described in this embodiment includes a substrate 570 and a substrate 770.
基板770は、基板570と重なる領域を備える。基板770は、基板570との間に機能層520を挟む領域を備える。 The substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the substrate 570. The substrate 770 includes a region that sandwiches the functional layer 520 with the substrate 570.
基板770は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。例えば、複屈折が抑制された材料を当該領域に用いることができる。 The substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j). For example, a material in which birefringence is suppressed can be used for the region.
《接合層505、封止材705、構造体KB1》
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネルは、接合層505と、封止材705と、構造体KB1と、を有する。
<< Junction Layer 505, Sealant 705, Structure KB1 >>
In addition, the display panel described in this embodiment includes a bonding layer 505, a sealing material 705, and a structure KB1.
接合層505は、機能層520および基板570の間に挟まれる領域を備え、機能層520および基板570を貼り合せる機能を備える。 The bonding layer 505 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 together.
封止材705は、機能層520および基板770の間に挟まれる領域を備え、機能層520および基板770を貼り合わせる機能を備える。 The sealing material 705 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770 and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770 together.
構造体KB1は、機能層520および基板770の間に所定の間隙を設ける機能を備える。 The structure KB1 has a function of providing a predetermined gap between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770.
《機能膜770P、機能膜770D》
また、本実施の形態で説明する表示パネルは、機能膜770Pと、機能膜770Dと、を有する。
<< Functional film 770P, Functional film 770D >>
In addition, the display panel described in this embodiment includes a functional film 770P and a functional film 770D.
機能膜770Pは、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。 The functional film 770P includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j).
機能膜770Dは、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。機能膜770Dは、第1の表示素子750(i,j)との間に基板770を挟むように配設される。これにより、例えば、第1の表示素子750(i,j)が反射する光を拡散することができる。 The functional film 770D includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j). The functional film 770D is disposed so as to sandwich the substrate 770 with the first display element 750 (i, j). Thereby, for example, the light reflected by the first display element 750 (i, j) can be diffused.
<構成要素の例>
表示パネル700は、基板570、基板770、構造体KB1、封止材705または接合層505を有する。
<Examples of components>
The display panel 700 includes a substrate 570, a substrate 770, a structure KB1, a sealing material 705, or a bonding layer 505.
また、表示パネル700は、機能層520、光学素子560、被覆膜565、絶縁膜521または絶縁膜528を有する。 The display panel 700 includes the functional layer 520, the optical element 560, the coating film 565, the insulating film 521, or the insulating film 528.
また、表示パネル700は、信号線S1(j)、信号線S2(j)、走査線G1(i)、走査線G2(i)、配線CSCOMまたは導電膜ANOを有する。 The display panel 700 includes a signal line S1 (j), a signal line S2 (j), a scanning line G1 (i), a scanning line G2 (i), a wiring CSCOM, or a conductive film ANO.
また、表示パネル700は、第1の導電膜または第2の導電膜を有する。 In addition, the display panel 700 includes a first conductive film or a second conductive film.
また、表示パネル700は、端子519B、端子519C、導電膜511Bまたは導電膜511Cを有する。 In addition, the display panel 700 includes a terminal 519B, a terminal 519C, a conductive film 511B, or a conductive film 511C.
また、表示パネル700は、画素回路530(i,j)またはスイッチSW1を有する。 In addition, the display panel 700 includes a pixel circuit 530 (i, j) or a switch SW1.
また、表示パネル700は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)、電極751(i,j)、反射膜、開口部、液晶材料を含む層753または電極752を有する。 In addition, the display panel 700 includes a first display element 750 (i, j), an electrode 751 (i, j), a reflective film, an opening, a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material, or an electrode 752.
また、表示パネル700は、配向膜AF1、配向膜AF2、着色膜CF1、遮光膜BM、絶縁膜771、機能膜770Pまたは機能膜770Dを有する。 The display panel 700 includes the alignment film AF1, the alignment film AF2, the coloring film CF1, the light shielding film BM, the insulating film 771, the functional film 770P, or the functional film 770D.
また、表示パネル700は、第2の表示素子550(i,j)、電極551(i,j)、電極552または発光性の材料を含む層553(j)を有する。 The display panel 700 includes the second display element 550 (i, j), the electrode 551 (i, j), the electrode 552, or the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
また、表示パネル700は、絶縁膜501Bまたは絶縁膜501Cを有する。 In addition, the display panel 700 includes the insulating film 501B or the insulating film 501C.
また、表示パネル700は、駆動回路GDまたは駆動回路SDを有する。 In addition, the display panel 700 includes a drive circuit GD or a drive circuit SD.
《基板570》
作製工程中の熱処理に耐えうる程度の耐熱性を有する材料を基板570等に用いることができる。例えば、厚さ0.7mm以下厚さ0.1mm以上の材料を基板570に用いることができる。具体的には、厚さ0.1mm程度まで研磨した材料を用いることができる。
<< Substrate 570 >>
A material having heat resistance high enough to withstand heat treatment in the manufacturing process can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. For example, a material having a thickness of 0.7 mm or less and a thickness of 0.1 mm or more can be used for the substrate 570. Specifically, a material polished to a thickness of about 0.1 mm can be used.
例えば、第6世代(1500mm×1850mm)、第7世代(1870mm×2200mm)、第8世代(2200mm×2400mm)、第9世代(2400mm×2800mm)、第10世代(2950mm×3400mm)等の面積が大きなガラス基板を基板570等に用いることができる。これにより、大型の表示装置を作製することができる。 For example, the areas of the sixth generation (1500 mm × 1850 mm), the seventh generation (1870 mm × 2200 mm), the eighth generation (2200 mm × 2400 mm), the ninth generation (2400 mm × 2800 mm), the tenth generation (2950 mm × 3400 mm), etc. A large glass substrate can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Thus, a large display device can be manufactured.
有機材料、無機材料または有機材料と無機材料等の複合材料等を基板570等に用いることができる。例えば、ガラス、セラミックス、金属等の無機材料を基板570等に用いることができる。 An organic material, an inorganic material, a composite material of an organic material and an inorganic material, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. For example, an inorganic material such as glass, ceramics, or metal can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
具体的には、無アルカリガラス、ソーダ石灰ガラス、カリガラス、クリスタルガラス、アルミノ珪酸ガラス、強化ガラス、化学強化ガラス、石英またはサファイア等を、基板570等に用いることができる。具体的には、無機酸化物膜、無機窒化物膜または無機酸窒化物膜等を、基板570等に用いることができる。例えば、酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜等を、基板570等に用いることができる。ステンレス・スチールまたはアルミニウム等を、基板570等に用いることができる。 Specifically, alkali-free glass, soda-lime glass, potash glass, crystal glass, aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, quartz, sapphire, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Specifically, an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic oxynitride film, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. For example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Stainless steel, aluminum, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
例えば、シリコンや炭化シリコンからなる単結晶半導体基板、多結晶半導体基板、シリコンゲルマニウム等の化合物半導体基板、SOI基板等を基板570等に用いることができる。これにより、半導体素子を基板570等に形成することができる。 For example, a single crystal semiconductor substrate made of silicon or silicon carbide, a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate, a compound semiconductor substrate such as silicon germanium, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Thereby, a semiconductor element can be formed on the substrate 570 or the like.
例えば、樹脂、樹脂フィルムまたはプラスチック等の有機材料を基板570等に用いることができる。具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネートまたはアクリル樹脂等の樹脂フィルムまたは樹脂板を、基板570等に用いることができる。 For example, an organic material such as a resin, a resin film, or plastic can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Specifically, a resin film or a resin plate such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
例えば、金属板、薄板状のガラス板または無機材料等の膜を樹脂フィルム等に貼り合わせた複合材料を基板570等に用いることができる。例えば、繊維状または粒子状の金属、ガラスもしくは無機材料等を樹脂フィルムに分散した複合材料を、基板570等に用いることができる。例えば、繊維状または粒子状の樹脂もしくは有機材料等を無機材料に分散した複合材料を、基板570等に用いることができる。 For example, a composite material in which a film such as a metal plate, a thin glass plate, or an inorganic material is bonded to a resin film or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. For example, a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate metal, glass, inorganic material, or the like is dispersed in a resin film can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. For example, a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate resin, an organic material, or the like is dispersed in an inorganic material can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
また、単層の材料または複数の層が積層された材料を、基板570等に用いることができる。例えば、基材と基材に含まれる不純物の拡散を防ぐ絶縁膜等が積層された材料を、基板570等に用いることができる。具体的には、ガラスとガラスに含まれる不純物の拡散を防ぐ酸化シリコン層、窒化シリコン層または酸化窒化シリコン層等から選ばれた一または複数の膜が積層された材料を、基板570等に用いることができる。または、樹脂と樹脂を透過する不純物の拡散を防ぐ酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜または酸化窒化シリコン膜等が積層された材料を、基板570等に用いることができる。 In addition, a single layer material or a material in which a plurality of layers are stacked can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. For example, a material in which a base material and an insulating film that prevents diffusion of impurities contained in the base material are stacked can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Specifically, a material in which one or a plurality of films selected from a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, or the like that prevents diffusion of impurities contained in glass is used for the substrate 570 or the like. be able to. Alternatively, a material in which a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or the like, which prevents resin and diffusion of impurities that permeate the resin from being stacked, can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート若しくはアクリル樹脂等の樹脂フィルム、樹脂板または積層材料等を基板570等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a resin film such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin, a resin plate, a laminated material, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド(ナイロン、アラミド等)、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート、ポリウレタン、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂もしくはシリコーン等のシロキサン結合を有する樹脂を含む材料を基板570等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a material including a resin having a siloxane bond such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon, aramid, or the like), polyimide, polycarbonate, polyurethane, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, or silicone can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
具体的には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)、ポリエーテルサルフォン(PES)またはアクリル等を基板570等に用いることができる。または、シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)、シクロオレフィンコポリマー(COC)等を用いることができる。 Specifically, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyethersulfone (PES), acrylic, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like. Alternatively, a cycloolefin polymer (COP), a cycloolefin copolymer (COC), or the like can be used.
また、紙または木材などを基板570等に用いることができる。 Further, paper, wood, or the like can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
例えば、可撓性を有する基板を基板570等に用いることができる。 For example, a flexible substrate can be used for the substrate 570 or the like.
なお、トランジスタまたは容量素子等を基板に直接形成する方法を用いることができる。また、例えば作製工程中に加わる熱に耐熱性を有する工程用の基板にトランジスタまたは容量素子等を形成し、形成されたトランジスタまたは容量素子等を基板570等に転置する方法を用いることができる。これにより、例えば可撓性を有する基板にトランジスタまたは容量素子等を形成できる。 Note that a method of directly forming a transistor, a capacitor, or the like over a substrate can be used. For example, a method in which a transistor, a capacitor, or the like is formed over a substrate for a process that has heat resistance to heat applied during the manufacturing process, and the formed transistor, capacitor, or the like is transferred to the substrate 570 or the like can be used. Thus, for example, a transistor or a capacitor can be formed over a flexible substrate.
《基板770》
例えば、基板570に用いることができる材料を基板770に用いることができる。例えば、基板570に用いることができる材料から選択された透光性を備える材料を、基板770に用いることができる。または、基板570に用いることができる材料から選択された複屈折が抑制された材料を、基板770に用いることができる。
<< Substrate 770 >>
For example, a material that can be used for the substrate 570 can be used for the substrate 770. For example, a material having a light-transmitting property selected from materials that can be used for the substrate 570 can be used for the substrate 770. Alternatively, a material with suppressed birefringence selected from materials that can be used for the substrate 570 can be used for the substrate 770.
例えば、アルミノ珪酸ガラス、強化ガラス、化学強化ガラスまたはサファイア等を、表示パネルの使用者に近い側に配置される基板770に好適に用いることができる。これにより、使用に伴う表示パネルの破損や傷付きを防止することができる。 For example, aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, sapphire, or the like can be suitably used for the substrate 770 disposed on the side closer to the user of the display panel. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display panel from being damaged or damaged due to use.
例えば、シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)、シクロオレフィンコポリマー(COC)、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC)等の樹脂フィルムを、基板770に好適に用いることができる。これにより、重量を低減することができる。または、例えば、落下に伴う破損等の発生頻度を低減することができる。 For example, a resin film such as a cycloolefin polymer (COP), a cycloolefin copolymer (COC), or triacetyl cellulose (TAC) can be suitably used for the substrate 770. Thereby, a weight can be reduced. Or, for example, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of breakage due to dropping.
また、例えば、厚さ0.7mm以下厚さ0.1mm以上の材料を基板770に用いることができる。具体的には、厚さを薄くするために研磨した基板を用いることができる。これにより、機能膜770Dを第1の表示素子750(i,j)に近づけて配置することができる。その結果、画像のボケを低減し、画像を鮮明に表示することができる。 For example, a material having a thickness of 0.7 mm or less and a thickness of 0.1 mm or more can be used for the substrate 770. Specifically, a polished substrate can be used to reduce the thickness. Accordingly, the functional film 770D can be disposed close to the first display element 750 (i, j). As a result, blurring of the image can be reduced and the image can be clearly displayed.
《構造体KB1》
例えば、有機材料、無機材料または有機材料と無機材料の複合材料を構造体KB1等に用いることができる。これにより、所定の間隔を、構造体KB1等を挟む構成の間に設けることができる。
<< Structure KB1 >>
For example, an organic material, an inorganic material, or a composite material of an organic material and an inorganic material can be used for the structure KB1 or the like. Thereby, a predetermined space | interval can be provided between the structures which pinch | interpose structure KB1 grade | etc.,.
具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート、ポリシロキサン若しくはアクリル樹脂等またはこれらから選択された複数の樹脂の複合材料などを構造体KB1に用いることができる。また、感光性を有する材料を用いて形成してもよい。 Specifically, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, or a composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the structure KB1. Alternatively, a material having photosensitivity may be used.
《封止材705》
無機材料、有機材料または無機材料と有機材料の複合材料等を封止材705等に用いることができる。
<< Sealing material 705 >>
An inorganic material, an organic material, a composite material of an inorganic material and an organic material, or the like can be used for the sealant 705 or the like.
例えば、熱溶融性の樹脂または硬化性の樹脂等の有機材料を、封止材705等に用いることができる。 For example, an organic material such as a heat-meltable resin or a curable resin can be used for the sealing material 705 or the like.
例えば、反応硬化型接着剤、光硬化型接着剤、熱硬化型接着剤または/および嫌気型接着剤等の有機材料を封止材705等に用いることができる。 For example, an organic material such as a reactive curable adhesive, a photocurable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, and / or an anaerobic adhesive can be used for the sealing material 705 or the like.
具体的には、エポキシ樹脂、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、イミド樹脂、PVC(ポリビニルクロライド)樹脂、PVB(ポリビニルブチラル)樹脂、EVA(エチレンビニルアセテート)樹脂等を含む接着剤を封止材705等に用いることができる。 Specifically, an adhesive including epoxy resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, phenol resin, polyimide resin, imide resin, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resin, PVB (polyvinyl butyral) resin, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resin, and the like. Can be used for the sealing material 705 or the like.
《接合層505》
例えば、封止材705に用いることができる材料を接合層505に用いることができる。
<< Junction Layer 505 >>
For example, a material that can be used for the sealant 705 can be used for the bonding layer 505.
《絶縁膜521》
例えば、絶縁性の無機材料、絶縁性の有機材料または無機材料と有機材料を含む絶縁性の複合材料を、絶縁膜521等に用いることができる。
<< Insulating film 521 >>
For example, an insulating inorganic material, an insulating organic material, or an insulating composite material including an inorganic material and an organic material can be used for the insulating film 521 or the like.
具体的には、無機酸化物膜、無機窒化物膜または無機酸化窒化物膜等またはこれらから選ばれた複数を積層した積層材料を、絶縁膜521等に用いることができる。例えば、酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜等またはこれらから選ばれた複数を積層した積層材料を含む膜を、絶縁膜521等に用いることができる。 Specifically, an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic oxynitride film, or the like, or a stacked material in which a plurality selected from these films is stacked can be used for the insulating film 521 and the like. For example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like, or a film including a stacked material in which a plurality selected from these films is stacked can be used for the insulating film 521 or the like.
具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート、ポリシロキサン若しくはアクリル樹脂等またはこれらから選択された複数の樹脂の積層材料もしくは複合材料などを絶縁膜521等に用いることができる。また、感光性を有する材料を用いて形成してもよい。 Specifically, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, or the like, or a laminated material or composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the insulating film 521 and the like. Alternatively, a material having photosensitivity may be used.
これにより、例えば絶縁膜521と重なるさまざまな構造に由来する段差を平坦化することができる。 Thereby, for example, steps originating from various structures overlapping with the insulating film 521 can be planarized.
《光学素子560》
光学素子560は光軸Zを備える(図1(C)参照)。光軸Zは第1の領域560Aの可視光が供給される領域の中心および第3の領域560Cの中心を通る。また、第2の領域560Bは、光軸Zと直交する平面に対し45°以上の傾きθ、好ましくは75°以上85°以下の傾きθを有する傾斜部を備える。例えば、図示されている第2の領域560Bは光軸Zと直交する平面に対し約60°の傾きを全体に備える。
<< Optical element 560 >>
The optical element 560 includes an optical axis Z (see FIG. 1C). The optical axis Z passes through the center of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied and the center of the third region 560C. The second region 560B includes an inclined portion having an inclination θ of 45 ° or more with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis Z, preferably 75 ° or more and 85 ° or less. For example, the illustrated second region 560B generally has an inclination of about 60 ° with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis Z.
また、第2の領域560Bは、当該傾斜部を第1の領域560Aの可視光を供給される領域の端から0.05μm以上0.2μm以下の範囲に備える。なお、第1の領域560Aに第2の表示素子550(i,j)が接する場合、第1の領域560Aの可視光が供給される領域は、第2の表示素子550(i,j)の可視光を供給することができる領域の面積と等しい。例えば、図示されている第2の領域560Bの傾斜は、第1の領域の可視光を供給される領域の端から距離dにある。 The second region 560B includes the inclined portion in a range of 0.05 μm or more and 0.2 μm or less from the end of the region of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied. Note that in the case where the second display element 550 (i, j) is in contact with the first region 560A, the region to which the visible light of the first region 560A is supplied is the second display element 550 (i, j). It is equal to the area of a region that can supply visible light. For example, the slope of the second region 560B shown is at a distance d from the edge of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
また、第1の領域560Aの可視光が供給される領域は、画素702(i,j)の面積の10%より大きい面積を備える(図1(D)参照)。 In addition, the region to which visible light is supplied in the first region 560A has an area larger than 10% of the area of the pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 1D).
第3の領域560Cは、画素702(i,j)の面積の10%以下の面積を備える。 The third region 560C has an area of 10% or less of the area of the pixel 702 (i, j).
反射膜751Bは、画素702(i,j)の面積の70%以上の面積を備える。 The reflective film 751B has an area of 70% or more of the area of the pixel 702 (i, j).
第1の領域560Aの可視光が供給される領域の面積および反射膜751Bの面積の和は、画素702(i,j)の面積より大きい。 The sum of the area of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied and the area of the reflective film 751B is larger than the area of the pixel 702 (i, j).
例えば、横27μm縦81μmの矩形の画素は、2187μmの面積を備える。第1の領域560Aの324μmの面積に可視光を供給する。また、第3の領域560Cは81μmの面積を備え、反射膜751Bは1894μmの面積を備える。 For example, a rectangular pixel 27 μm wide and 81 μm long has an area of 2187 μm 2 . Visible light is supplied to the area of 324 μm 2 in the first region 560A. The third region 560C has an area of 81 μm 2 , and the reflective film 751B has an area of 1894 μm 2 .
この構成において、第3の領域560Cの可視光が供給される領域の面積は、画素の面積の約14.8%に相当する。 In this configuration, the area of the third region 560C to which visible light is supplied corresponds to approximately 14.8% of the pixel area.
反射膜751Bの面積は、画素の面積の約86.6%に相当する。 The area of the reflective film 751B corresponds to about 86.6% of the area of the pixel.
第1の領域560Aの可視光が供給される領域の面積および反射膜751Bの面積の和は、2218μmである。 The sum of the area of the first region 560A to which visible light is supplied and the area of the reflective film 751B is 2218 μm 2 .
これにより、第2の領域は、第1の領域にさまざまな角度で入射する光を集光することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the second region can collect light incident on the first region at various angles. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
なお、複数の材料を光学素子560に用いることができる。例えば、屈折率の差が0.2以下の範囲になるように選択された複数の材料を光学素子560に用いることができる。これにより、光学素子の内部における反射または散乱を抑制することができる。または、光の損失を抑制することができる。 Note that a plurality of materials can be used for the optical element 560. For example, a plurality of materials selected so that the difference in refractive index is in a range of 0.2 or less can be used for the optical element 560. Thereby, reflection or scattering inside the optical element can be suppressed. Alternatively, light loss can be suppressed.
また、さまざまな形状を光学素子560に用いることができる(図17(E)参照)。例えば、円または多角形を光学素子560の断面の形状に用いることができる。または、平面または曲面を光学素子560の第2の領域560Bに用いることができる。 In addition, various shapes can be used for the optical element 560 (see FIG. 17E). For example, a circle or a polygon can be used for the cross-sectional shape of the optical element 560. Alternatively, a plane or a curved surface can be used for the second region 560B of the optical element 560.
《被覆膜565》
単層の膜または積層膜を被覆膜565に用いることができる。例えば、透光性を備える膜および反射性を備える膜を積層した材料を被覆膜565に用いることができる。
<< Coating film 565 >>
A single-layer film or a stacked film can be used for the coating film 565. For example, a material in which a film having a light-transmitting property and a film having a reflective property are stacked can be used for the coating film 565.
例えば、酸化物膜、フッ化物膜、硫化物膜等の無機材料を透光性を備える膜に用いることができる。 For example, an inorganic material such as an oxide film, a fluoride film, or a sulfide film can be used for the light-transmitting film.
例えば、金属を反射性を備える膜に用いることができる。具体的には、銀を含む材料を被覆膜565に用いることができる。例えば、銀およびパラジウム等を含む材料または銀および銅等を含む材料を反射膜に用いることができる。また、誘電体の多層膜を反射性を備える膜に用いることができる。 For example, a metal can be used for a film having reflectivity. Specifically, a material containing silver can be used for the coating film 565. For example, a material containing silver and palladium or a material containing silver and copper can be used for the reflective film. In addition, a dielectric multilayer film can be used as a film having reflectivity.
《絶縁膜528》
例えば、絶縁膜521に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜528等に用いることができる。具体的には、厚さ1μmのポリイミドを含む膜を絶縁膜528に用いることができる。
<< Insulating film 528 >>
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 528 or the like. Specifically, a film containing polyimide with a thickness of 1 μm can be used for the insulating film 528.
《絶縁膜501B》
例えば、絶縁膜521に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。また、例えば、水素を供給する機能を備える材料を絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。
<< Insulating film 501B >>
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 501B. For example, a material having a function of supplying hydrogen can be used for the insulating film 501B.
具体的には、シリコンおよび酸素を含む材料と、シリコンおよび窒素を含む材料と、を積層した材料を、絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。例えば、加熱等により水素を放出し、放出した水素を他の構成に供給する機能を備える材料を、絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。具体的には、作製工程中に取り込まれた水素を加熱等により放出し、他の構成に供給する機能を備える材料を絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。 Specifically, a material in which a material containing silicon and oxygen and a material containing silicon and nitrogen are stacked can be used for the insulating film 501B. For example, a material having a function of releasing hydrogen by heating or the like and supplying the released hydrogen to another structure can be used for the insulating film 501B. Specifically, a material having a function of releasing hydrogen taken in during the manufacturing process by heating or the like and supplying the hydrogen to another structure can be used for the insulating film 501B.
例えば、原料ガスにシラン等を用いる化学気相成長法により形成されたシリコンおよび酸素を含む膜を、絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。 For example, a film containing silicon and oxygen formed by a chemical vapor deposition method using silane or the like as a source gas can be used for the insulating film 501B.
具体的には、シリコンおよび酸素を含む厚さ200nm以上600nm以下の材料と、シリコンおよび窒素を含む厚さ200nm程度の材料と、を積層した材料を絶縁膜501Bに用いることができる。 Specifically, a material in which a material containing silicon and oxygen having a thickness of 200 nm to 600 nm and a material containing silicon and nitrogen and having a thickness of about 200 nm can be used for the insulating film 501B.
《絶縁膜501C》
例えば、絶縁膜521に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜501Cに用いることができる。具体的には、シリコンおよび酸素を含む材料を絶縁膜501Cに用いることができる。これにより、画素回路または第2の表示素子等への不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。
<< Insulating film 501C >>
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 501C. Specifically, a material containing silicon and oxygen can be used for the insulating film 501C. Thereby, the diffusion of impurities into the pixel circuit or the second display element can be suppressed.
例えば、シリコン、酸素および窒素を含む厚さ200nmの膜を絶縁膜501Cに用いることができる。 For example, a 200-nm-thick film containing silicon, oxygen, and nitrogen can be used for the insulating film 501C.
《配線、端子、導電膜》
導電性を備える材料を配線等に用いることができる。具体的には、導電性を備える材料を、信号線S1(j)、信号線S2(j)、走査線G1(i)、走査線G2(i)、配線CSCOM、導電膜ANO、端子519B、端子519C、導電膜511Bまたは導電膜511C等に用いることができる。
<< wiring, terminals, conductive film >>
A conductive material can be used for the wiring or the like. Specifically, a conductive material is formed using a signal line S1 (j), a signal line S2 (j), a scanning line G1 (i), a scanning line G2 (i), a wiring CSCOM, a conductive film ANO, a terminal 519B, It can be used for the terminal 519C, the conductive film 511B, the conductive film 511C, or the like.
例えば、無機導電性材料、有機導電性材料、金属または導電性セラミックスなどを配線等に用いることができる。 For example, an inorganic conductive material, an organic conductive material, a metal, a conductive ceramic, or the like can be used for the wiring.
具体的には、アルミニウム、金、白金、銀、銅、クロム、タンタル、チタン、モリブデン、タングステン、ニッケル、鉄、コバルト、パラジウムまたはマンガンから選ばれた金属元素などを、配線等に用いることができる。または、上述した金属元素を含む合金などを、配線等に用いることができる。特に、銅とマンガンの合金がウエットエッチング法を用いた微細加工に好適である。 Specifically, a metal element selected from aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, copper, chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, nickel, iron, cobalt, palladium, or manganese can be used for the wiring or the like. . Alternatively, an alloy containing the above metal element can be used for the wiring or the like. In particular, an alloy of copper and manganese is suitable for fine processing using a wet etching method.
具体的には、アルミニウム膜上にチタン膜を積層する二層構造、窒化チタン膜上にチタン膜を積層する二層構造、窒化チタン膜上にタングステン膜を積層する二層構造、窒化タンタル膜または窒化タングステン膜上にタングステン膜を積層する二層構造、チタン膜と、そのチタン膜上にアルミニウム膜を積層し、さらにその上にチタン膜を形成する三層構造等を配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on an aluminum film, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a tantalum nitride film or A two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is stacked on a tungsten nitride film, a titanium film, and a three-layer structure in which an aluminum film is stacked on the titanium film and a titanium film is further formed thereon can be used for wiring or the like. .
具体的には、酸化インジウム、インジウム錫酸化物、インジウム亜鉛酸化物、酸化亜鉛、ガリウムを添加した酸化亜鉛などの導電性酸化物を、配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, or zinc oxide to which gallium is added can be used for the wiring or the like.
具体的には、グラフェンまたはグラファイトを含む膜を配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a film containing graphene or graphite can be used for the wiring or the like.
例えば、酸化グラフェンを含む膜を形成し、酸化グラフェンを含む膜を還元することにより、グラフェンを含む膜を形成することができる。還元する方法としては、熱を加える方法や還元剤を用いる方法等を挙げることができる。 For example, by forming a film containing graphene oxide and reducing the film containing graphene oxide, the film containing graphene can be formed. Examples of the reduction method include a method of applying heat and a method of using a reducing agent.
例えば、金属ナノワイヤーを含む膜を配線等に用いることができる。具体的には、銀を含むナノワイヤーを用いることができる。 For example, a film containing metal nanowires can be used for wiring or the like. Specifically, a nanowire containing silver can be used.
具体的には、導電性高分子を配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a conductive polymer can be used for wiring or the like.
なお、例えば、導電材料ACF1を用いて、端子519Bとフレキシブルプリント基板FPC1を電気的に接続することができる。 Note that, for example, the conductive material ACF1 can be used to electrically connect the terminal 519B and the flexible printed circuit board FPC1.
《第1の導電膜、第2の導電膜》
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を第1の導電膜または第2の導電膜に用いることができる。
<< First conductive film, second conductive film >>
For example, a material that can be used for a wiring or the like can be used for the first conductive film or the second conductive film.
また、電極751(i,j)または配線等を第1の導電膜に用いることができる。 Further, the electrode 751 (i, j), the wiring, or the like can be used for the first conductive film.
また、スイッチSW1に用いることができるトランジスタのソース電極またはドレイン電極として機能する導電膜512Bまたは配線等を第2の導電膜に用いることができる。 In addition, a conductive film 512B functioning as a source electrode or a drain electrode of a transistor that can be used for the switch SW1, a wiring, or the like can be used for the second conductive film.
《第1の表示素子750(i,j)》
例えば、光の反射または透過を制御する機能を備える表示素子を、第1の表示素子750(i,j)に用いることができる。例えば、液晶素子と偏光板を組み合わせた構成またはシャッター方式のMEMS表示素子、光干渉方式のMEMS表示素子等を用いることができる。反射型の表示素子を用いることにより、表示パネルの消費電力を抑制することができる。例えば、マイクロカプセル方式、電気泳動方式、エレクトロウエッティング方式などを用いる表示素子を、第1の表示素子750(i,j)に用いることができる。具体的には、反射型の液晶表示素子を第1の表示素子750(i,j)に用いることができる。
<< First display element 750 (i, j) >>
For example, a display element having a function of controlling reflection or transmission of light can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j). For example, a structure in which a liquid crystal element and a polarizing plate are combined, a shutter-type MEMS display element, an optical interference-type MEMS display element, or the like can be used. By using a reflective display element, power consumption of the display panel can be suppressed. For example, a display element using a microcapsule method, an electrophoresis method, an electrowetting method, or the like can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j). Specifically, a reflective liquid crystal display element can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
例えば、IPS(In−Plane−Switching)モード、TN(Twisted Nematic)モード、FFS(Fringe Field Switching)モード、ASM(Axially Symmetric aligned Micro−cell)モード、OCB(Optically Compensated Birefringence)モード、FLC(Ferroelectric Liquid Crystal)モード、AFLC(AntiFerroelectric Liquid Crystal)モードなどの駆動方法を用いて駆動することができる液晶素子を用いることができる。 For example, IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode, TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, FFS (Fringe Field Switched) mode, ASM (Axially Symmetrically Applied Micro-cell) mode, OCB (OpticBridge) mode. A liquid crystal element that can be driven using a driving method such as a Crystal) mode or an AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liquid Crystal) mode can be used.
また、例えば垂直配向(VA)モード、具体的には、MVA(Multi−Domain Vertical Alignment)モード、PVA(Patterned Vertical Alignment)モード、ECB(Electrically Controlled Birefringence)モード、CPA(Continuous Pinwheel Alignment)モード、ASV(Advanced Super−View)モードなどの駆動方法を用いて駆動することができる液晶素子を用いることができる。 In addition, for example, vertical alignment (VA) mode, specifically, MVA (Multi-Domain Vertical Alignment) mode, PVA (Patterned Vertical Alignment) mode, ECB (Electrically Controlled Birefringence ACP mode, CPB mode) A liquid crystal element that can be driven by a driving method such as an (Advanced Super-View) mode can be used.
第1の表示素子750(i,j)は、第1電極と、第2電極と、液晶材料を含む層と、を有する。液晶材料を含む層は、第1電極および第2電極の間の電圧を用いて配向を制御することができる液晶材料を含む。例えば、液晶材料を含む層の厚さ方向(縦方向ともいう)、縦方向と交差する方向(横方向または斜め方向ともいう)の電界を、液晶材料の配向を制御する電界に用いることができる。 The first display element 750 (i, j) includes a first electrode, a second electrode, and a layer containing a liquid crystal material. The layer including a liquid crystal material includes a liquid crystal material whose alignment can be controlled using a voltage between the first electrode and the second electrode. For example, an electric field in a thickness direction (also referred to as a vertical direction) of a layer including a liquid crystal material or a direction intersecting with the vertical direction (also referred to as a horizontal direction or an oblique direction) can be used as an electric field for controlling the alignment of the liquid crystal material. .
《液晶材料を含む層753》
例えば、サーモトロピック液晶、低分子液晶、高分子液晶、高分子分散型液晶、強誘電性液晶、反強誘電性液晶等を、液晶材料を含む層に用いることができる。または、コレステリック相、スメクチック相、キュービック相、カイラルネマチック相、等方相等を示す液晶材料を用いることができる。または、ブルー相を示す液晶材料を用いることができる。
<< Layer 753 containing liquid crystal material >>
For example, a thermotropic liquid crystal, a low molecular liquid crystal, a polymer liquid crystal, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal, a ferroelectric liquid crystal, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal, or the like can be used for the layer containing a liquid crystal material. Alternatively, a liquid crystal material exhibiting a cholesteric phase, a smectic phase, a cubic phase, a chiral nematic phase, an isotropic phase, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a liquid crystal material exhibiting a blue phase can be used.
例えば、ネガ型の液晶材料を、液晶材料を含む層に用いることができる。 For example, a negative liquid crystal material can be used for the layer including the liquid crystal material.
例えば、1.0×1013Ω・cm以上、好ましくは1.0×1014Ω・cm以上、さらに好ましくは1.0×1015Ω・cm以上の固有抵抗率を備える液晶材料を、液晶材料を含む層753に用いる。これにより、第1の表示素子750(i,j)の透過率の変動を抑制することができる。または、第1の表示素子750(i,j)のチラツキを抑制することができる。または、第1の表示素子750(i,j)の書き換える頻度を低減することができる。 For example, a liquid crystal material having a specific resistivity of 1.0 × 10 13 Ω · cm or more, preferably 1.0 × 10 14 Ω · cm or more, and more preferably 1.0 × 10 15 Ω · cm or more is used. Used for the layer 753 containing a material. Thereby, the fluctuation | variation of the transmittance | permeability of the 1st display element 750 (i, j) can be suppressed. Alternatively, flickering of the first display element 750 (i, j) can be suppressed. Alternatively, the frequency of rewriting the first display element 750 (i, j) can be reduced.
《電極751(i,j)》
例えば、配線等に用いる材料を電極751(i,j)に用いることができる。具体的には、反射膜を電極751(i,j)に用いることができる。例えば、透光性を備える導電膜と、開口部を備える反射膜と、を積層した材料を電極751(i,j)に用いることができる。
<< Electrode 751 (i, j) >>
For example, a material used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 751 (i, j). Specifically, a reflective film can be used for the electrode 751 (i, j). For example, a material in which a conductive film having a light-transmitting property and a reflective film having an opening are stacked can be used for the electrode 751 (i, j).
《反射膜》
例えば、可視光を反射する材料を反射膜に用いることができる。具体的には、銀を含む材料を反射膜に用いることができる。例えば、銀およびパラジウム等を含む材料または銀および銅等を含む材料を反射膜に用いることができる。
<Reflective film>
For example, a material that reflects visible light can be used for the reflective film. Specifically, a material containing silver can be used for the reflective film. For example, a material containing silver and palladium or a material containing silver and copper can be used for the reflective film.
反射膜は、例えば、液晶材料を含む層753を透過してくる光を反射する。これにより、第1の表示素子750を反射型の液晶素子にすることができる。また、例えば、表面に凹凸を備える材料を、反射膜に用いることができる。これにより、入射する光をさまざまな方向に反射して、白色の表示をすることができる。 For example, the reflective film reflects light transmitted through the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. Accordingly, the first display element 750 can be a reflective liquid crystal element. Further, for example, a material having irregularities on the surface can be used for the reflective film. Thereby, incident light can be reflected in various directions to display white.
例えば、第1の導電膜または電極751(i,j)等を反射膜に用いることができる。 For example, the first conductive film, the electrode 751 (i, j), or the like can be used for the reflective film.
例えば、液晶材料を含む層753との間に透光性を備える導電膜751Aを挟む領域を備える膜を、反射膜751Bに用いることができる(図17(A)参照)。 For example, a film including a region in which a light-transmitting conductive film 751A is sandwiched between the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material can be used for the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 17A).
例えば、液晶材料を含む層753と透光性を備える導電膜751Cの間に挟まれる領域を備える膜を、反射膜751Bに用いることができる(図17(B)参照)。 For example, a film including a region between the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material and a light-transmitting conductive film 751C can be used for the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 17B).
例えば、透光性を備える導電膜751Aと透光性を備える導電膜751Cの間に挟まれる領域を備える膜を、反射膜751Bに用いることができる(図17(C)参照)。 For example, a film including a region between the light-transmitting conductive film 751A and the light-transmitting conductive film 751C can be used for the reflective film 751B (see FIG. 17C).
例えば、可視光に対し反射性を備える膜を、第1の電極751(i,j)に用いてもよい(図17(D)参照)。 For example, a film having reflectivity with respect to visible light may be used for the first electrode 751 (i, j) (see FIG. 17D).
反射膜は、第2の表示素子550(i,j)が射出する光を遮らない領域751Hが形成される形状を備える(図18(A)乃至図18(C)参照)。 The reflective film has a shape in which a region 751H that does not block the light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) is formed (see FIGS. 18A to 18C).
例えば、単数または複数の開口部を備える形状を反射膜に用いることができる。具体的には、多角形、四角形、楕円形、円形または十字等の形状を領域751Hに用いることができる。また、細長い筋状、スリット状、市松模様状の形状を領域751Hに用いることができる。 For example, a shape including one or a plurality of openings can be used for the reflective film. Specifically, a shape such as a polygon, a quadrangle, an ellipse, a circle, or a cross can be used for the region 751H. In addition, an elongated streak shape, a slit shape, or a checkered shape can be used for the region 751H.
反射膜の総面積に対する領域751Hの総面積の比の値が大きすぎると、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を用いた表示が暗くなってしまう。 If the ratio of the total area of the region 751H to the total area of the reflective film is too large, the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) will be dark.
また、反射膜の総面積に対する領域751Hの総面積の比の値が小さすぎると、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を用いた表示が暗くなってしまう。または、第2の表示素子550(i,j)の信頼性が損なわれてしまう場合がある。 If the ratio of the total area of the region 751H to the total area of the reflective film is too small, the display using the second display element 550 (i, j) becomes dark. Alternatively, the reliability of the second display element 550 (i, j) may be impaired.
例えば、画素702(i,j+1)に設けられた領域751Hは、画素702(i,j)に設けられた領域751Hを通る行方向(図中に矢印R1で示す方向)に延びる直線上に配設されない(図18(A)参照)。または、例えば、画素702(i+1,j)に設けられた領域751Hは、画素702(i,j)に設けられた領域751Hを通る、列方向(図中に矢印C1で示す方向)に延びる直線上に配設されない(図18(B)参照)。 For example, the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 1) is arranged on a straight line extending in the row direction (the direction indicated by the arrow R1 in the drawing) passing through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j). It is not provided (see FIG. 18A). Alternatively, for example, the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 1, j) passes through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and extends in the column direction (the direction indicated by the arrow C1 in the drawing). It is not disposed on top (see FIG. 18B).
例えば、画素702(i,j+2)に設けられた領域751Hは、画素702(i,j)に設けられた領域751Hを通る行方向に延びる直線上に配設される(図18(A)参照)。また、画素702(i,j+1)に設けられた領域751Hは、画素702(i,j)に設けられた領域751Hおよび画素702(i,j+2)に設けられた領域751Hの間において当該直線と直交する直線上に配設される。 For example, the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 2) is disposed on a straight line extending in the row direction passing through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 18A). ). In addition, a region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 1) has a straight line between the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j + 2). It arrange | positions on the orthogonal straight line.
または、例えば、画素702(i+2,j)に設けられた領域751Hは、画素702(i,j)に設けられた領域751Hを通る、列方向に延びる直線上に配設される(図18(B)参照)。また、例えば、画素702(i+1,j)に設けられた領域751Hは、画素702(i,j)に設けられた領域751Hおよび画素702(i+2,j)に設けられた領域751Hの間において当該直線と直交する直線上に配設される。 Alternatively, for example, the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 2, j) is disposed on a straight line passing through the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and extending in the column direction (FIG. 18 ( B)). For example, the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 1, j) is between the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i, j) and the region 751H provided in the pixel 702 (i + 2, j). It arrange | positions on the straight line orthogonal to a straight line.
このように配置された光を遮らない領域に重なるように第2の表示素子を配設することにより、一の画素に隣接する他の画素の第2の表示素子を、一の画素の第2の表示素子から遠ざけることができる。または、一の画素に隣接する他の画素の第2の表示素子に、一の画素の第2の表示素子が表示する色とは異なる色を表示する表示素子を配設することができる。または、異なる色を表示する複数の表示素子を、隣接して配設する難易度を軽減することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 By disposing the second display element so as to overlap an area where light that is arranged in this way is not blocked, the second display element of another pixel adjacent to the one pixel is changed to the second display element of the one pixel. It can be kept away from the display element. Alternatively, a display element that displays a color different from the color displayed by the second display element of one pixel can be provided in the second display element of another pixel adjacent to the one pixel. Alternatively, the difficulty of arranging a plurality of display elements that display different colors adjacent to each other can be reduced. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
または、領域751Hが形成されるように、端部が短く切除されたような形状の電極751(i,j)等を反射膜に用いることができる(図18(C)参照)。具体的には、列方向(図中に矢印C1で示す方向)が短くなるように端部が切除された形状の電極751(i,j)等を用いることができる。 Alternatively, an electrode 751 (i, j) or the like whose end is cut short so that the region 751H is formed can be used for the reflective film (see FIG. 18C). Specifically, an electrode 751 (i, j) or the like having a shape in which an end is cut so that the column direction (the direction indicated by the arrow C1 in the drawing) is shortened can be used.
《電極752》
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を、電極752に用いることができる。例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料から選択された、透光性を備える材料を、電極752に用いることができる。
<< Electrode 752 >>
For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 752. For example, a material having a light-transmitting property selected from materials that can be used for wiring and the like can be used for the electrode 752.
例えば、導電性酸化物、光が透過する程度に薄い金属膜または金属ナノワイヤー等を電極752に用いることができる。 For example, a conductive oxide, a metal film that is thin enough to transmit light, a metal nanowire, or the like can be used for the electrode 752.
具体的には、インジウムを含む導電性酸化物を電極752に用いることができる。または、厚さ1nm以上10nm以下の金属薄膜を電極752に用いることができる。また、銀を含む金属ナノワイヤーを電極752に用いることができる。 Specifically, a conductive oxide containing indium can be used for the electrode 752. Alternatively, a metal thin film with a thickness of 1 nm to 10 nm can be used for the electrode 752. In addition, a metal nanowire containing silver can be used for the electrode 752.
具体的には、酸化インジウム、インジウム錫酸化物、インジウム亜鉛酸化物、酸化亜鉛、ガリウムを添加した酸化亜鉛、アルミニウムを添加した酸化亜鉛などを、電極752に用いることができる。 Specifically, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide to which gallium is added, zinc oxide to which aluminum is added, or the like can be used for the electrode 752.
《配向膜AF1、配向膜AF2》
例えば、ポリイミド等を含む材料を配向膜AF1または配向膜AF2に用いることができる。具体的には、液晶材料が所定の方向に配向するようにラビング処理された材料または光配向技術を用いて形成された材料を用いることができる。
<< Alignment film AF1, Alignment film AF2 >>
For example, a material containing polyimide or the like can be used for the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2. Specifically, a material that is rubbed so that the liquid crystal material is aligned in a predetermined direction or a material that is formed using a photo-alignment technique can be used.
例えば、可溶性のポリイミドを含む膜を配向膜AF1または配向膜AF2に用いることができる。これにより、配向膜AF1または配向膜AF2を形成する際に必要とされる温度を低くすることができる。その結果、配向膜AF1または配向膜AF2を形成する際に他の構成に与える損傷を軽減することができる。 For example, a film containing soluble polyimide can be used for the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2. Thereby, the temperature required for forming the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2 can be lowered. As a result, damage to other components when forming the alignment film AF1 or the alignment film AF2 can be reduced.
《着色膜CF1》
所定の色の光を透過する材料を着色膜CF1に用いることができる。これにより、着色膜CF1を例えばカラーフィルターに用いることができる。例えば、青色、緑色または赤色の光を透過する材料を着色膜CF1に用いることができる。また、黄色の光または白色の光等を透過する材料を着色膜に用いることができる。
<< Colored film CF1 >>
A material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used for the colored film CF1. Thereby, the colored film CF1 can be used for a color filter, for example. For example, a material that transmits blue, green, or red light can be used for the colored film CF1. A material that transmits yellow light, white light, or the like can be used for the colored film.
《遮光膜BM》
例えば、光の透過を抑制する材料を遮光膜BMに用いることができる。これにより、遮光膜BMを例えばブラックマトリクスに用いることができる。
<< Light shielding film BM >>
For example, a material that suppresses light transmission can be used for the light-shielding film BM. Thereby, the light shielding film BM can be used for, for example, a black matrix.
具体的には、顔料または染料を含む樹脂を遮光膜BMに用いることができる。例えば、カーボンブラックを分散した樹脂を遮光膜に用いることができる。 Specifically, a resin containing a pigment or a dye can be used for the light shielding film BM. For example, a resin in which carbon black is dispersed can be used for the light shielding film.
または、無機化合物、無機酸化物、複数の無機酸化物の固溶体を含む複合酸化物等を遮光膜BMに用いることができる。具体的には、黒色クロム膜、酸化第2銅を含む膜、塩化銅または塩化テルルを含む膜を遮光膜BMに用いることができる。 Alternatively, an inorganic compound, an inorganic oxide, a composite oxide including a solid solution of a plurality of inorganic oxides, or the like can be used for the light-shielding film BM. Specifically, a black chromium film, a film containing cupric oxide, a film containing copper chloride or tellurium chloride can be used for the light-shielding film BM.
《絶縁膜771》
例えば、ポリイミド、エポキシ樹脂、アクリル樹脂等を絶縁膜771に用いることができる。
<< Insulating film 771 >>
For example, polyimide, epoxy resin, acrylic resin, or the like can be used for the insulating film 771.
《機能膜770P、機能膜770D》
例えば、反射防止フィルム、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルムまたは集光フィルム等を機能膜770Pまたは機能膜770Dに用いることができる。
<< Functional film 770P, Functional film 770D >>
For example, an antireflection film, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a light collecting film, or the like can be used for the functional film 770P or the functional film 770D.
具体的には、2色性色素を含む膜を機能膜770Pまたは機能膜770Dに用いることができる。または、基材の表面と交差する方向に沿った軸を備える柱状構造を有する材料を、機能膜770Pまたは機能膜770Dに用いることができる。これにより、光を軸に沿った方向に透過し易く、他の方向に散乱し易くすることができる。 Specifically, a film containing a dichroic dye can be used for the functional film 770P or the functional film 770D. Alternatively, a material having a columnar structure including an axis along a direction intersecting the surface of the base material can be used for the functional film 770P or the functional film 770D. Thereby, light can be easily transmitted in a direction along the axis and can be easily scattered in other directions.
また、ゴミの付着を抑制する帯電防止膜、汚れを付着しにくくする撥水性の膜、使用に伴う傷の発生を抑制するハードコート膜などを、機能膜770Pに用いることができる。 In addition, an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust, a water-repellent film that makes it difficult to adhere dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses generation of scratches due to use, and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.
具体的には、円偏光フィルムを機能膜770Pに用いることができる。また、光拡散フィルムを機能膜770Dに用いることができる。 Specifically, a circularly polarizing film can be used for the functional film 770P. In addition, a light diffusion film can be used for the functional film 770D.
《第2の表示素子550(i,j)》
例えば、光を射出する機能を備える表示素子を第2の表示素子550(i,j)に用いることができる。具体的には、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子、無機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子、発光ダイオードまたはQDLED(Quantumn Dot LED)等を、第2の表示素子550(i,j)に用いることができる。
<< Second display element 550 (i, j) >>
For example, a display element having a function of emitting light can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j). Specifically, an organic electroluminescence element, an inorganic electroluminescence element, a light emitting diode, a QDLED (Quantum Dot LED), or the like can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j).
例えば、発光性の有機化合物を発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。 For example, a light-emitting organic compound can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
例えば、量子ドットを発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。これにより、半値幅が狭く、鮮やかな色の光を発することができる。 For example, a quantum dot can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material. Thereby, the half value width is narrow and it is possible to emit brightly colored light.
例えば、青色の光を射出するように積層された積層材料、緑色の光を射出するように積層された積層材料または赤色の光を射出するように積層された積層材料等を、発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。 For example, a laminated material laminated so as to emit blue light, a laminated material laminated so as to emit green light, or a laminated material laminated so as to emit red light, etc. Can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing N.
例えば、信号線S2(j)に沿って列方向に長い帯状の積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。 For example, a strip-shaped stacked material that is long in the column direction along the signal line S2 (j) can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
また、例えば、白色の光を射出するように積層された積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。具体的には、青色の光を射出する蛍光材料を含む発光性の材料を含む層と、緑色および赤色の光を射出する蛍光材料以外の材料を含む層または黄色の光を射出する蛍光材料以外の材料を含む層と、を積層した積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。 For example, a stacked material stacked so as to emit white light can be used for the layer 553 (j) including a light-emitting material. Specifically, a layer containing a luminescent material including a fluorescent material that emits blue light, a layer containing a material other than a fluorescent material that emits green and red light, or a fluorescent material that emits yellow light A layered material in which a layer including any of the above materials is stacked can be used for the layer 553 (j) including a light-emitting material.
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。 For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料から選択された、可視光について透光性を有する材料を、電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。 For example, a material having a property of transmitting visible light and selected from materials that can be used for wirings or the like can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j).
具体的には、導電性酸化物またはインジウムを含む導電性酸化物、酸化インジウム、インジウム錫酸化物、インジウム亜鉛酸化物、酸化亜鉛、ガリウムを添加した酸化亜鉛などを、電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。または、光が透過する程度に薄い金属膜を電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。または、光の一部を透過し、光の他の一部を反射する金属膜を電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。これにより、微小共振器構造を第2の表示素子550(i,j)に設けることができる。その結果、所定の波長の光を他の光より効率よく取り出すことができる。 Specifically, a conductive oxide or a conductive oxide containing indium, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide to which gallium is added, or the like is used as the electrode 551 (i, j). Can be used. Alternatively, a metal film that is thin enough to transmit light can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j). Alternatively, a metal film that transmits part of light and reflects another part of light can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j). Accordingly, the microresonator structure can be provided in the second display element 550 (i, j). As a result, light with a predetermined wavelength can be extracted more efficiently than other light.
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を電極552に用いることができる。具体的には、可視光について反射性を有する材料を、電極552に用いることができる。 For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 552. Specifically, a material having reflectivity with respect to visible light can be used for the electrode 552.
《駆動回路GD》
シフトレジスタ等のさまざまな順序回路等を駆動回路GDに用いることができる。例えば、トランジスタMD、容量素子等を駆動回路GDに用いることができる。具体的には、スイッチSW1に用いることができるトランジスタまたはトランジスタMと同一の工程で形成することができる半導体膜を備えるトランジスタを用いることができる。
<< Drive circuit GD >>
Various sequential circuits such as a shift register can be used for the drive circuit GD. For example, a transistor MD, a capacitor, or the like can be used for the drive circuit GD. Specifically, a transistor that can be used for the switch SW1 or a transistor including a semiconductor film that can be formed in the same process as the transistor M can be used.
例えば、スイッチSW1に用いることができるトランジスタと異なる構成をトランジスタMDに用いることができる。具体的には、導電膜524を有するトランジスタをトランジスタMDに用いることができる(図11(B)参照)。 For example, a different structure from the transistor that can be used for the switch SW1 can be used for the transistor MD. Specifically, a transistor including the conductive film 524 can be used for the transistor MD (see FIG. 11B).
なお、トランジスタMと同一の構成を、トランジスタMDに用いることができる。 Note that the same structure as the transistor M can be used for the transistor MD.
《トランジスタ》
例えば、同一の工程で形成することができる半導体膜を駆動回路および画素回路のトランジスタに用いることができる。
<Transistor>
For example, a semiconductor film that can be formed in the same process can be used for a transistor in a driver circuit and a pixel circuit.
例えば、ボトムゲート型のトランジスタまたはトップゲート型のトランジスタなどを駆動回路のトランジスタまたは画素回路のトランジスタに用いることができる。 For example, a bottom-gate transistor, a top-gate transistor, or the like can be used as a driver circuit transistor or a pixel circuit transistor.
ところで、例えば、アモルファスシリコンを半導体に用いるボトムゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインは、酸化物半導体を半導体に用いるボトムゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインに容易に改造できる。また、例えばポリシリコンを半導体に用いるトップゲート型の製造ラインは、酸化物半導体を半導体に用いるトップゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインに容易に改造できる。いずれの改造も、既存の製造ラインを有効に活用することができる。 By the way, for example, a bottom-gate transistor production line using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor can be easily modified to a bottom-gate transistor production line using an oxide semiconductor as a semiconductor. For example, a top gate type production line using polysilicon as a semiconductor can be easily modified to a top gate type transistor production line using an oxide semiconductor as a semiconductor. Both modifications can make effective use of existing production lines.
例えば、14族の元素を含む半導体を半導体膜に用いるトランジスタを利用することができる。具体的には、シリコンを含む半導体を半導体膜に用いることができる。例えば、単結晶シリコン、ポリシリコン、微結晶シリコンまたはアモルファスシリコンなどを半導体膜に用いたトランジスタを用いることができる。 For example, a transistor in which a semiconductor containing a Group 14 element is used for a semiconductor film can be used. Specifically, a semiconductor containing silicon can be used for the semiconductor film. For example, a transistor in which single crystal silicon, polysilicon, microcrystalline silicon, amorphous silicon, or the like is used for a semiconductor film can be used.
なお、半導体にポリシリコンを用いるトランジスタの作製に要する温度は、半導体に単結晶シリコンを用いるトランジスタに比べて低い。 Note that the temperature required for manufacturing a transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor is lower than that of a transistor using single crystal silicon as a semiconductor.
また、ポリシリコンを半導体に用いるトランジスタの電界効果移動度は、アモルファスシリコンを半導体に用いるトランジスタに比べて高い。これにより、画素の開口率を向上することができる。また、極めて高い精細度で設けられた画素と、ゲート駆動回路およびソース駆動回路を同一の基板上に形成することができる。その結果、電子機器を構成する部品数を低減することができる。 In addition, the field effect mobility of a transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor is higher than that of a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor. Thereby, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved. In addition, a pixel provided with extremely high definition, a gate driver circuit, and a source driver circuit can be formed over the same substrate. As a result, the number of parts constituting the electronic device can be reduced.
ポリシリコンを半導体に用いるトランジスタの信頼性は、アモルファスシリコンを半導体に用いるトランジスタに比べて優れる。 The reliability of a transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor is superior to a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor.
また、化合物半導体を用いるトランジスタを利用することができる。具体的には、ガリウムヒ素を含む半導体を半導体膜に用いることができる。 In addition, a transistor using a compound semiconductor can be used. Specifically, a semiconductor containing gallium arsenide can be used for the semiconductor film.
また、有機半導体を用いるトランジスタを利用することができる。具体的には、ポリアセン類またはグラフェンを含む有機半導体を半導体膜に用いることができる。 In addition, a transistor using an organic semiconductor can be used. Specifically, an organic semiconductor containing polyacenes or graphene can be used for the semiconductor film.
例えば、酸化物半導体を半導体膜に用いるトランジスタを利用することができる。具体的には、インジウムを含む酸化物半導体またはインジウムとガリウムと亜鉛を含む酸化物半導体を半導体膜に用いることができる。 For example, a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a semiconductor film can be used. Specifically, an oxide semiconductor containing indium or an oxide semiconductor containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film.
一例を挙げれば、オフ状態におけるリーク電流が、半導体膜にアモルファスシリコンを用いたトランジスタより小さいトランジスタを用いることができる。具体的には、酸化物半導体を半導体膜に用いたトランジスタを用いることができる。 As an example, a transistor whose leakage current in an off state is smaller than that of a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor film can be used. Specifically, a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a semiconductor film can be used.
これにより、アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜に用いたトランジスタを利用する画素回路と比較して、画素回路が画像信号を保持することができる時間を長くすることができる。具体的には、フリッカーの発生を抑制しながら、選択信号を30Hz未満、好ましくは1Hz未満より好ましくは一分に一回未満の頻度で供給することができる。その結果、情報処理装置の使用者に蓄積する疲労を低減することができる。また、駆動に伴う消費電力を低減することができる。 Accordingly, as compared with a pixel circuit using a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor film, the time during which the pixel circuit can hold an image signal can be lengthened. Specifically, the selection signal can be supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute while suppressing the occurrence of flicker. As a result, fatigue accumulated in the user of the information processing apparatus can be reduced. In addition, power consumption associated with driving can be reduced.
例えば、半導体膜508、導電膜504、導電膜512Aおよび導電膜512Bを備えるトランジスタをスイッチSW1に用いることができる(図12(B)参照)。なお、絶縁膜506は、半導体膜508および導電膜504の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 For example, a transistor including the semiconductor film 508, the conductive film 504, the conductive film 512A, and the conductive film 512B can be used for the switch SW1 (see FIG. 12B). Note that the insulating film 506 includes a region sandwiched between the semiconductor film 508 and the conductive film 504.
導電膜504は、半導体膜508と重なる領域を備える。導電膜504はゲート電極の機能を備える。絶縁膜506はゲート絶縁膜の機能を備える。 The conductive film 504 includes a region overlapping with the semiconductor film 508. The conductive film 504 has a function of a gate electrode. The insulating film 506 has a function of a gate insulating film.
導電膜512Aおよび導電膜512Bは、半導体膜508と電気的に接続される。導電膜512Aはソース電極の機能またはドレイン電極の機能の一方を備え、導電膜512Bはソース電極の機能またはドレイン電極の機能の他方を備える。 The conductive films 512A and 512B are electrically connected to the semiconductor film 508. The conductive film 512A has one of the function of the source electrode and the function of the drain electrode, and the conductive film 512B has the other of the function of the source electrode and the function of the drain electrode.
また、導電膜524を有するトランジスタを、駆動回路または画素回路のトランジスタに用いることができる(図11(B)参照)。導電膜524は、導電膜504との間に半導体膜508を挟む領域を備える。なお、絶縁膜516は、導電膜524および半導体膜508の間に挟まれる領域を備える。また、例えば、導電膜504と同じ電位を供給する配線に導電膜524を電気的に接続することができる。 In addition, a transistor including the conductive film 524 can be used for a transistor in a driver circuit or a pixel circuit (see FIG. 11B). The conductive film 524 includes a region in which the semiconductor film 508 is sandwiched between the conductive film 504 and the conductive film 504. Note that the insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the conductive film 524 and the semiconductor film 508. For example, the conductive film 524 can be electrically connected to a wiring that supplies the same potential as the conductive film 504.
例えば、タンタルおよび窒素を含む厚さ10nmの膜と、銅を含む厚さ300nmの膜と、を積層した導電膜を導電膜504に用いることができる。なお、銅を含む膜は、絶縁膜506との間に、タンタルおよび窒素を含む膜を挟む領域を備える。 For example, a conductive film in which a 10-nm-thick film containing tantalum and nitrogen and a 300-nm-thick film containing copper are stacked can be used for the conductive film 504. Note that the film containing copper includes a region between which the film containing tantalum and nitrogen is sandwiched between the film containing copper.
例えば、シリコンおよび窒素を含む厚さ400nmの膜と、シリコン、酸素および窒素を含む厚さ200nmの膜と、を積層した材料を絶縁膜506に用いることができる。なお、シリコンおよび窒素を含む膜は、半導体膜508との間に、シリコン、酸素および窒素を含む膜を挟む領域を備える。 For example, a material in which a 400-nm-thick film containing silicon and nitrogen and a 200-nm-thick film containing silicon, oxygen, and nitrogen are stacked can be used for the insulating film 506. Note that the film containing silicon and nitrogen includes a region between the semiconductor film 508 and the film containing silicon, oxygen, and nitrogen.
例えば、インジウム、ガリウムおよび亜鉛を含む厚さ25nmの膜を、半導体膜508に用いることができる。 For example, a 25-nm-thick film containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
例えば、タングステンを含む厚さ50nmの膜と、アルミニウムを含む厚さ400nmの膜と、チタンを含む厚さ100nmの膜と、をこの順で積層した導電膜を、導電膜512Aまたは導電膜512Bに用いることができる。なお、タングステンを含む膜は、半導体膜508と接する領域を備える。 For example, a conductive film in which a 50-nm-thick film containing tungsten, a 400-nm-thick film containing aluminum, and a 100-nm-thick film containing titanium are stacked in this order as the conductive film 512A or the conductive film 512B. Can be used. Note that the film containing tungsten includes a region in contact with the semiconductor film 508.
<表示パネルの構成例5.>
本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成について、図3および図4を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 5. >
The structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図3は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図3は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図である。 FIG. 3 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 shown in FIG.
図4は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図4(A)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図であり、図4(B)は図4(A)に示す画素とは異なる構成の断面図である。 FIG. 4 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 4A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 4B is a cross-section having a configuration different from that of the pixel illustrated in FIG. FIG.
本構成例で説明する表示パネルの構成は、被覆膜565が絶縁膜518に接する領域を備える点が、例えば、図2を参照しながら説明する表示パネル700とは異なる。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 The configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is different from the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2, for example, in that the coating film 565 includes a region in contact with the insulating film 518. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
例えば、絶縁膜518に設けた開口部に被覆膜565を形成する方法を用いて、絶縁膜518に接する領域を被覆膜565に形成することができる。 For example, a region in contact with the insulating film 518 can be formed in the coating film 565 by using a method of forming the coating film 565 in the opening provided in the insulating film 518.
具体的には、領域751Hと重なる領域に開口部が形成された絶縁膜521Aをレジストマスクに用いて、絶縁膜518等をエッチングして開口部を形成し、当該開口部に被覆膜565を形成する(図3参照)。 Specifically, using the insulating film 521A in which an opening is formed in a region overlapping with the region 751H as a resist mask, the insulating film 518 and the like are etched to form an opening, and the coating film 565 is formed in the opening. Form (see FIG. 3).
また、例えば、領域751Hと重なる領域に開口部が形成された絶縁膜518に被覆膜565を形成する(図4(A)参照)。 For example, the coating film 565 is formed over the insulating film 518 in which an opening is formed in a region overlapping with the region 751H (see FIG. 4A).
また、例えば、複数のレジストマスクを用いて、絶縁膜518等を階段状にエッチングし、その後、被覆膜565を形成する。これにより、被覆膜565の形状および第2の領域560Bの形状を階段状にすることができる(図4(B)参照)。 For example, the insulating film 518 and the like are etched stepwise using a plurality of resist masks, and then a coating film 565 is formed. Accordingly, the shape of the coating film 565 and the shape of the second region 560B can be stepped (see FIG. 4B).
<表示パネルの構成例6.>
本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成について、図5を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 6. >
The structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図5は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図5は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図である。 FIG. 5 illustrates the structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG.
本構成例で説明する表示パネルの構成は、着色膜CF2を備えることができる(図5参照)。なお、機能層520が着色膜CF2を備える点が、例えば、図2を参照しながら説明する表示パネル700とは異なる。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 The configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example can include a colored film CF2 (see FIG. 5). Note that the point that the functional layer 520 includes the colored film CF2 is different from, for example, the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
機能層520は着色膜CF2を備える。着色膜CF2は、光学素子560および第2の表示素子550(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える(図5参照)。 The functional layer 520 includes a colored film CF2. The colored film CF2 includes a region sandwiched between the optical element 560 and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 5).
《着色膜CF2》
所定の色の光を透過する材料を着色膜CF2に用いることができる。これにより、着色膜CF2を例えばカラーフィルターに用いることができる。例えば、青色、緑色または赤色の光を透過する材料を着色膜CF2に用いることができる。また、黄色の光または白色の光等を透過する材料を着色膜に用いることができる。
<< Colored film CF2 >>
A material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used for the colored film CF2. Thereby, the colored film CF2 can be used for a color filter, for example. For example, a material that transmits blue, green, or red light can be used for the colored film CF2. A material that transmits yellow light, white light, or the like can be used for the colored film.
なお、照射された光を所定の色の光に変換する機能を備える材料を着色膜CF2に用いることができる。具体的には、量子ドットを着色膜CF2に用いることができる。これにより、色純度の高い表示をすることができる。 Note that a material having a function of converting irradiated light into light of a predetermined color can be used for the colored film CF2. Specifically, quantum dots can be used for the colored film CF2. Thereby, display with high color purity can be performed.
<表示パネルの構成例7.>
本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成について、図6を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 7. >
The structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図6は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図6(A)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図であり、図6(B)は図6(A)に示す画素とは異なる構成を備える画素の断面図である。 FIG. 6 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 6A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 6B includes a configuration different from that of the pixel illustrated in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a pixel.
本構成例で説明する表示パネルの構成は、機能層520が絶縁膜518Bまたは絶縁膜521Cを備える点が、例えば、図2を参照しながら説明する表示パネル700とは異なる。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 The configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is different from the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2, for example, in that the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 518B or the insulating film 521C. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
例えば、機能層520は、絶縁膜518Bを第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)の間に備える(図6(A)参照)。具体的には、透光性を備える導電膜751Cおよび光学素子560の間に絶縁膜518Bを備える。これにより、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子の間または第1の表示素子および画素回路の間における不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 For example, the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 518B between the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 6A). Specifically, an insulating film 518B is provided between the light-transmitting conductive film 751C and the optical element 560. Thereby, diffusion of impurities between the first display element and the second display element or between the first display element and the pixel circuit can be suppressed. As a result, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
なお、例えば、絶縁膜518Aおよび絶縁膜518Bの積層膜を絶縁膜518に用いることができる。 Note that for example, a stacked film of the insulating film 518A and the insulating film 518B can be used as the insulating film 518.
例えば、機能層520は、絶縁膜521Cを第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)の間に備える(図6(B)参照)。具体的には、絶縁膜521Bおよび第2の表示素子550(i,j)の間に絶縁膜521Cを備える。これにより、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子の間における不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 For example, the functional layer 520 includes the insulating film 521C between the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 6B). Specifically, the insulating film 521C is provided between the insulating film 521B and the second display element 550 (i, j). Thereby, the diffusion of impurities between the first display element and the second display element can be suppressed. As a result, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
なお、例えば、絶縁膜521A、絶縁膜521Bおよび絶縁膜521Cの積層膜を絶縁膜521に用いることができる。 Note that for example, a stacked film of the insulating film 521A, the insulating film 521B, and the insulating film 521C can be used as the insulating film 521.
<表示パネルの構成例8.>
本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成について、図7を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 8. >
The structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図7は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図7(A)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図であり、図7(B)は図7(A)に示す画素とは異なる構成を備える画素の断面図である。 FIG. 7 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 7B has a configuration different from that of the pixel illustrated in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a pixel.
本構成例で説明する表示パネルの構成は、第1の領域560Aが湾曲した形状を備える点および第2の表示素子550(i,j)が湾曲した形状を備える点が異なる他は、例えば、図2を参照しながら説明する表示パネル700と同様の構成を備える。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 The configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is different except that the first region 560A has a curved shape and the second display element 550 (i, j) has a curved shape, for example. A configuration similar to that of the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2 is provided. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
例えば、第1の領域560Aは、第3の領域560Cに向けて湾曲した形状を備える(図7(A)参照)。 For example, the first region 560A has a shape curved toward the third region 560C (see FIG. 7A).
または、第1の領域560Aは、第3の領域560Cから遠ざかる方向に湾曲した形状を備える(図7(B)参照)。 Alternatively, the first region 560A has a shape curved in a direction away from the third region 560C (see FIG. 7B).
これにより、光軸と直交する平面に対する投影面積を広げることなく、第1の領域の面積を広げることができる。または、光軸と直交する平面に対する投影面積を広げることなく、第1の領域に沿って形成される第2の表示素子の面積を広げることができる。または、隣接する第2の表示素子との間隔を保ちながら第2の表示素子の面積を広げることができる。例えば、第2の表示素子に有機EL素子を用いる場合、有機EL素子の面積を第3の領域の面積より広くすることができる。または、第3の領域より広い面積の有機EL素子が供給する光を第3の領域に集光することができる。または、第3の領域が射出する光の強度を保ちながら、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。または、発光色が異なる有機EL素子が隣接して配置された表示パネルを容易に作製することができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the area of a 1st area | region can be expanded, without expanding the projection area with respect to the plane orthogonal to an optical axis. Alternatively, the area of the second display element formed along the first region can be increased without increasing the projected area with respect to the plane orthogonal to the optical axis. Alternatively, the area of the second display element can be increased while maintaining a distance from the adjacent second display element. For example, when an organic EL element is used for the second display element, the area of the organic EL element can be made larger than the area of the third region. Alternatively, the light supplied by the organic EL element having a larger area than the third region can be condensed on the third region. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the density of the current flowing through the organic EL element while maintaining the intensity of light emitted from the third region. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved. Alternatively, a display panel in which organic EL elements having different emission colors are arranged adjacent to each other can be easily manufactured. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
<表示パネルの構成例9.>
本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成について、図8および図9を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration Example of Display Panel 9. >
The structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図8は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図8(A)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図であり、図8(B)は図8(A)の一部を説明する断面図である。 FIG. 8 illustrates a structure of a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 8A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view illustrating part of FIG. 8A. is there.
図9は、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの構成を説明する図である。図9(A)は図1(A)に示す切断線Y1−Y2に相当する位置における画素の断面図であり、図9(B)は図9(A)に示す画素とは異なる構成の断面図である。 FIG. 9 illustrates the structure of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 9A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel at a position corresponding to the cutting line Y1-Y2 illustrated in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 9B is a cross-section having a different structure from the pixel illustrated in FIG. 9A. FIG.
本構成例で説明する表示パネルの構成は、レンズ580を備える点が異なる他は、例えば、図2を参照しながら説明する表示パネル700と同様の構成を備える。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 The configuration of the display panel described in this configuration example is the same as that of the display panel 700 described with reference to FIG. 2 except that the lens 580 is provided. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
本実施の形態で説明する表示パネルは、レンズ580を備え、レンズ580は、光学素子560と第2の表示素子550(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える(図8(A)および図8(B)参照)。 The display panel described in this embodiment includes a lens 580, and the lens 580 includes a region sandwiched between the optical element 560 and the second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 8A and FIG. 8). (See FIG. 8B).
レンズ580は1.5以上2.5以下の屈折率を備える材料を含み、レンズ580は凸レンズである。 The lens 580 includes a material having a refractive index of 1.5 to 2.5, and the lens 580 is a convex lens.
これにより、第2の表示素子が射出する光を、例えば、光学素子の光軸に向けて集光することができる。または、第2の表示素子が射出する光を効率よく利用することができる。または、第2の表示素子の面積を広くすることができる。または、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、第2の表示素子の面積を広くすることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the light which a 2nd display element inject | emits can be condensed toward the optical axis of an optical element, for example. Alternatively, the light emitted from the second display element can be used efficiently. Alternatively, the area of the second display element can be increased. Or the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered | hung. Alternatively, the area of the second display element can be increased. As a result, a novel display panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
例えば、平凸レンズをレンズ580に用いることができる(図8(A)および図9(A)参照)。 For example, a plano-convex lens can be used for the lens 580 (see FIGS. 8A and 9A).
また、両凸レンズをレンズ580に用いることができる(図9(B)参照)。 In addition, a biconvex lens can be used for the lens 580 (see FIG. 9B).
《レンズ580》
可視光を透過する材料をレンズ580に用いることができる。または、1.3以上2.5以下の屈折率を備える材料をレンズ580に用いることができる。例えば、無機材料または有機材料をレンズ580に用いることができる。
<Lens 580>
A material that transmits visible light can be used for the lens 580. Alternatively, a material having a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5 can be used for the lens 580. For example, an inorganic material or an organic material can be used for the lens 580.
例えば、酸化物または硫化物を含む材料をレンズ580に用いることができる。 For example, a material containing an oxide or sulfide can be used for the lens 580.
具体的には、酸化セリウム、酸化ハフニウム、酸化ランタン、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ニオブ、酸化タンタル、酸化チタン、酸化イットリウム、酸化亜鉛、インジウムとスズを含む酸化物またはインジウムとガリウムと亜鉛を含む酸化物などを、レンズ580に用いることができる。または、硫化亜鉛などを、レンズ580に用いることができる。 Specifically, cerium oxide, hafnium oxide, lanthanum oxide, magnesium oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, titanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zinc oxide, oxide containing indium and tin, oxide containing indium, gallium and zinc, etc. Can be used for the lens 580. Alternatively, zinc sulfide or the like can be used for the lens 580.
例えば、樹脂を含む材料をレンズ580に用いることができる。具体的には、塩素、臭素またはヨウ素が導入された樹脂、重金属原子が導入された樹脂、芳香環が導入された樹脂、硫黄が導入された樹脂などをレンズ580に用いることができる。または、樹脂と樹脂より屈折率の高い材料のナノ粒子を含む樹脂をレンズ580に用いることができる。酸化チタンまたは酸化ジルコニウムなどをナノ粒子に用いることができる。 For example, a material containing a resin can be used for the lens 580. Specifically, a resin into which chlorine, bromine, or iodine is introduced, a resin into which heavy metal atoms are introduced, a resin into which an aromatic ring is introduced, a resin into which sulfur is introduced, or the like can be used for the lens 580. Alternatively, a resin including nanoparticles of a material having a higher refractive index than that of the resin can be used for the lens 580. Titanium oxide or zirconium oxide can be used for the nanoparticles.
なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 Note that this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments described in this specification as appropriate.
(実施の形態2)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置の構成について、図15および図16を参照しながら説明する。
(Embodiment 2)
In this embodiment, the structure of the display device of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図15(A)は本発明の一態様の表示装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。図15(B)は、図15(A)に示す画素の構成を説明するブロック図である。 FIG. 15A is a block diagram illustrating a structure of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15B is a block diagram illustrating a structure of the pixel shown in FIG.
図16(A)は図15(A)に示す表示パネルの構成とは異なる構成を説明するブロック図である。図16(B)は本発明の一態様の表示装置の図である。 FIG. 16A is a block diagram illustrating a structure different from the structure of the display panel illustrated in FIG. FIG. 16B illustrates a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
<表示装置の構成例>
本実施の形態で説明する表示装置は、制御部238と、表示パネル700と、を有する(図15(A)参照)。
<Configuration example of display device>
The display device described in this embodiment includes a control portion 238 and a display panel 700 (see FIG. 15A).
《制御部238》
制御部238は、画像情報V1および制御情報SSを供給される機能を備える。
<Control unit 238>
The control unit 238 has a function to which the image information V1 and the control information SS are supplied.
制御部238は、画像情報V1に基づいて第1の情報V11および第2の情報V12を生成する機能を備える。制御部238は、第1の情報V11および第2の情報V12を供給する機能を備える。 The control unit 238 has a function of generating the first information V11 and the second information V12 based on the image information V1. The control unit 238 has a function of supplying the first information V11 and the second information V12.
例えば、制御部238は、伸張回路234および画像処理回路235Mを備える。 For example, the control unit 238 includes a decompression circuit 234 and an image processing circuit 235M.
《表示パネル700》
表示パネル700は、第1の情報V11および第2の情報V12を供給される機能を備える。また、表示パネル700は、画素702(i,j)を備える。
<< Display panel 700 >>
The display panel 700 has a function of being supplied with the first information V11 and the second information V12. The display panel 700 includes a pixel 702 (i, j).
画素702(i,j)は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を備える(図15(B)参照)。 The pixel 702 (i, j) includes a first display element 750 (i, j) and a second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 15B).
第1の表示素子750(i,j)は、第1の情報V11に基づいて表示する機能を備え、第1の表示素子750(i,j)は反射型の表示素子である。 The first display element 750 (i, j) has a function of displaying based on the first information V11, and the first display element 750 (i, j) is a reflective display element.
第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、第2の情報V12に基づいて表示する機能を備え、第2の表示素子550(i,j)は発光素子である。 The second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of displaying based on the second information V12, and the second display element 550 (i, j) is a light emitting element.
例えば、実施の形態1で説明する表示パネルを表示パネル700に用いることができる。または、表示パネル700Bを用いることができる。例えば、テレビジョン受像システム(図16(B−1)参照)、映像モニター(図16(B−2)参照)またはノートブックコンピュータ(図16(B−3)参照)などを提供することができる。 For example, the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used for the display panel 700. Alternatively, the display panel 700B can be used. For example, a television receiver system (see FIG. 16B-1), a video monitor (see FIG. 16B-2), a notebook computer (see FIG. 16B-3), or the like can be provided. .
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いて、反射膜が反射する光の強度を制御して、画像情報を表示することができる。または、第1の表示素子は外光を表示に利用することができる。または、外光の映り込みを認識しにくくすることができる。または、第2の表示素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。または、第1の表示素子を用いて表示される画像情報と重なるように、第2の表示素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。または、第1の表示素子を用いて表示される画像情報を第2の表示素子を用いて補うことができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 Accordingly, it is possible to display image information by controlling the intensity of light reflected by the reflective film using the first display element. Alternatively, the first display element can use external light for display. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize external light reflection. Alternatively, image information can be displayed using the second display element. Alternatively, the image information can be displayed using the second display element so as to overlap with the image information displayed using the first display element. Alternatively, image information displayed using the first display element can be supplemented using the second display element. As a result, a novel display device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
《伸張回路234》
伸張回路234は、圧縮された状態で供給される画像情報V1を伸張する機能を備える。伸張回路234は、記憶部を備える。記憶部は、例えば伸張された画像情報を記憶する機能を備える(図15(A)参照)。
<< Extension circuit 234 >>
The expansion circuit 234 has a function of expanding the image information V1 supplied in a compressed state. The decompression circuit 234 includes a storage unit. The storage unit has a function of storing, for example, decompressed image information (see FIG. 15A).
《画像処理回路235M》
画像処理回路235Mは、例えば、領域235M(1)および領域235M(2)を備える。
<< Image processing circuit 235M >>
The image processing circuit 235M includes, for example, an area 235M (1) and an area 235M (2).
領域235M(1)または領域235M(2)は、例えば、画像情報V1に含まれる情報を記憶する機能を備える。 The region 235M (1) or the region 235M (2) has a function of storing information included in the image information V1, for example.
また、画像処理回路235Mは、例えば、所定の特性曲線に基づいて画像情報V1を補正して情報V11を生成する機能と、情報V11を供給する機能と、を備える。具体的には、第1の表示素子が良好な画像を表示するように、情報V11を生成する機能を備える。 Further, the image processing circuit 235M includes, for example, a function of correcting the image information V1 based on a predetermined characteristic curve to generate information V11 and a function of supplying the information V11. Specifically, a function for generating the information V11 is provided so that the first display element displays a good image.
画像処理回路235Mは、例えば、所定の特性曲線に基づいて画像情報V1を補正して情報V12を生成する機能と、情報V12を供給する機能と、を備える。具体的には、第2の表示素子が良好な画像を表示するように、情報V12を生成する機能を備える。 The image processing circuit 235M includes, for example, a function of correcting the image information V1 based on a predetermined characteristic curve to generate the information V12 and a function of supplying the information V12. Specifically, a function of generating information V12 is provided so that the second display element displays a good image.
なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 Note that this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments described in this specification as appropriate.
(実施の形態3)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の入出力装置の構成について、図19乃至図22を参照しながら説明する。
(Embodiment 3)
In this embodiment, the structure of the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図19は本発明の一態様の入出力装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。 FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating a structure of the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention.
図20は本発明の一態様の入出力装置に用いることができる入出力パネルの構成を説明する図である。図20(A)は入出力パネルの上面図である。図20(B)は入出力パネルの入力部の一部を説明する模式図であり、図20(C)は図20(B)の一部を説明する模式図である。 FIG. 20 illustrates the structure of an input / output panel that can be used for the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20A is a top view of the input / output panel. FIG. 20B is a schematic diagram for explaining a part of the input portion of the input / output panel, and FIG. 20C is a schematic diagram for explaining a part of FIG. 20B.
図21および図22は本発明の一態様の入出力装置に用いることができる入出力パネルの構成を説明する図である。図21(A)は図20(A)の切断線X1−X2、切断線X3−X4、図20(C)の切断線X5−X6における断面図であり、図21(B)は図21(A)の一部の構成を説明する断面図である。 21 and 22 illustrate a structure of an input / output panel that can be used for the input / output device of one embodiment of the present invention. 21A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line X1-X2, the cutting line X3-X4 in FIG. 20A, and the cutting line X5-X6 in FIG. 20C, and FIG. It is sectional drawing explaining the one part structure of A).
図22は図20(C)の切断線X7−X8、図20(A)のX9−X10、切断線X11−X12における断面図である。 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along section line X7-X8 in FIG. 20C, X9-X10 in FIG. 20A, and section line X11-X12.
<入出力装置の構成例>
本実施の形態で説明する入出力装置は、入力部240と、表示部230と、を有する(図19参照)。例えば、実施の形態1に記載の表示パネル700を表示部230に用いることができる。
<Configuration example of input / output device>
The input / output device described in this embodiment includes an input unit 240 and a display unit 230 (see FIG. 19). For example, the display panel 700 described in Embodiment 1 can be used for the display portion 230.
入力部240は表示部230と重なる領域を備え、入力部240は検知領域241を備える(図19参照)。 The input unit 240 includes an area overlapping with the display unit 230, and the input unit 240 includes a detection area 241 (see FIG. 19).
検知領域241は、検知素子775(g,h)を備える。 The detection area 241 includes a detection element 775 (g, h).
検知素子775(g,h)は、画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に近接するものを検知する機能を備える。 The detection element 775 (g, h) has a function of detecting an element close to a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j).
《入力部240》
入力部240は、検知領域241、発振回路OSCおよび検知回路DCを備える(図19参照)。
<< Input unit 240 >>
The input unit 240 includes a detection region 241, an oscillation circuit OSC, and a detection circuit DC (see FIG. 19).
《検知領域241》
検知領域241は、制御線CL(g)および検知信号線ML(h)を備える。
<< Detection area 241 >>
The detection area 241 includes a control line CL (g) and a detection signal line ML (h).
制御線CL(g)は制御信号を供給する機能を備え、検知信号線ML(h)は、検知信号を供給される機能を備える。 The control line CL (g) has a function of supplying a control signal, and the detection signal line ML (h) has a function of supplying a detection signal.
《検知素子775(g,h)》
検知素子775(g,h)は、制御線CL(g)および検知信号線ML(h)と電気的に接続される。
<< Sensing element 775 (g, h) >>
The detection element 775 (g, h) is electrically connected to the control line CL (g) and the detection signal line ML (h).
検知素子775(g,h)は、画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に近接するものとの距離および制御信号に基づいて変化する検知信号を供給する機能を備える。また、検知素子775(g,h)は、電極C(g)および電極M(h)を備える。 The detection element 775 (g, h) has a function of supplying a detection signal that changes based on a distance from a region adjacent to the region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j) and a control signal. The sensing element 775 (g, h) includes an electrode C (g) and an electrode M (h).
電極C(g)は、画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に透光性を有する領域を備え、電極C(g)は、制御線CL(g)と電気的に接続される。 The electrode C (g) includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j), and the electrode C (g) is electrically connected to the control line CL (g).
電極M(h)は画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に透光性を有する領域を備え、電極M(h)は検知信号線ML(h)と電気的に接続される。電極M(h)は画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に近接するものによって一部が遮られる電界を、電極C(g)との間に形成するように配置される。 The electrode M (h) includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j), and the electrode M (h) is electrically connected to the detection signal line ML (h). The electrode M (h) is disposed so as to form an electric field between the electrode M (h) and the electrode C (g) that is partly blocked by the proximity of the region overlapping the pixel 702 (i, j).
これにより、表示部を用いて画像情報を表示しながら、表示部と重なる領域に近接するものを検知することができる。または、表示部に近接させる指などをポインタに用いて、位置情報を入力することができる。または、位置情報を表示部に表示する画像情報に関連付けることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することができる。 Accordingly, it is possible to detect an object that is close to a region overlapping with the display unit while displaying image information using the display unit. Alternatively, position information can be input using a finger or the like that is brought close to the display portion as a pointer. Alternatively, the position information can be associated with image information displayed on the display unit. As a result, a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
例えば、透光性を備える導電膜を、電極C(g)および検知信号線ML(h)に用いることができる。または、画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に開口部を備える導電膜を、電極C(g)および検知信号線ML(h)に用いることができる。これにより、表示パネルの表示を遮ることなく、表示パネルと重なる領域に近接するものを検知することができる。または、透明導電膜より導電率が高い金属膜を、電極C(g)および検知信号線ML(h)に用いることができる。これにより、入出力装置の厚さを薄くすることができる。 For example, a conductive film having a light-transmitting property can be used for the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h). Alternatively, a conductive film including an opening in a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j) can be used for the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h). Accordingly, it is possible to detect an object close to a region overlapping with the display panel without blocking the display on the display panel. Alternatively, a metal film having higher conductivity than the transparent conductive film can be used for the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h). Thereby, the thickness of the input / output device can be reduced.
なお、遮光膜BMを用いることができる(図20(B)および図22参照)。遮光膜BMは、例えば、電極C(g)および検知信号線ML(h)に重なる領域を備え、基板770および電極C(g)または基板770および検知信号線ML(h)の間に挟まれる領域を備える。これにより、検知素子775(g,h)が反射する外光の強度を弱めることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することができる。 Note that a light-shielding film BM can be used (see FIGS. 20B and 22). The light shielding film BM includes, for example, a region overlapping with the electrode C (g) and the detection signal line ML (h) and is sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the electrode C (g) or the substrate 770 and the detection signal line ML (h). Provide an area. Thereby, the intensity | strength of the external light which the detection element 775 (g, h) reflects can be weakened. As a result, a novel input / output device that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
なお、検知領域241は、一群の検知素子775(g,1)乃至検知素子775(g,q)と、他の一群の検知素子775(1,h)乃至検知素子775(p,h)と、を有する(図19参照)。なお、gは1以上p以下の整数であり、hは1以上q以下の整数であり、pおよびqは1以上の整数である。 The detection region 241 includes a group of detection elements 775 (g, 1) to detection elements 775 (g, q) and another group of detection elements 775 (1, h) to detection elements 775 (p, h). (See FIG. 19). Note that g is an integer of 1 to p, h is an integer of 1 to q, and p and q are integers of 1 or more.
一群の検知素子775(g,1)乃至検知素子775(g,q)は、検知素子775(g,h)を含み、行方向(図中に矢印R2で示す方向)に配設される。なお、図19に矢印R2で示す方向は、図19に矢印R1で示す方向と同じであっても良いし、異なっていてもよい。 The group of sensing elements 775 (g, 1) to 775 (g, q) includes the sensing elements 775 (g, h) and are arranged in the row direction (direction indicated by an arrow R2 in the drawing). Note that the direction indicated by the arrow R2 in FIG. 19 may be the same as or different from the direction indicated by the arrow R1 in FIG.
また、他の一群の検知素子775(1,h)乃至検知素子775(p,h)は、検知素子775(g,h)を含み、行方向と交差する列方向(図19中に矢印C2で示す方向)に配設される。 In addition, another group of the detection elements 775 (1, h) to 775 (p, h) includes the detection elements 775 (g, h), and the column direction (arrow C2 in FIG. 19) intersects the row direction. In the direction indicated by.
行方向に配設される一群の検知素子775(g,1)乃至検知素子775(g,q)は、制御線CL(g)と電気的に接続される電極C(g)を含む(図20(B)参照)。 The group of sensing elements 775 (g, 1) to 775 (g, q) arranged in the row direction includes an electrode C (g) electrically connected to the control line CL (g) (FIG. 20 (B)).
列方向に配設される他の一群の検知素子775(1,h)乃至検知素子775(p,h)は、検知信号線ML(h)と電気的に接続される電極M(h)を含む。 Another group of the detection elements 775 (1, h) to 775 (p, h) arranged in the column direction has electrodes M (h) electrically connected to the detection signal lines ML (h). Including.
制御線CL(g)は、導電膜BR(g,h)を含む(図20(B)、図20(C)および図21(A)参照)。導電膜BR(g,h)は、検知信号線ML(h)と重なる領域を備える。 The control line CL (g) includes a conductive film BR (g, h) (see FIGS. 20B, 20C, and 21A). The conductive film BR (g, h) includes a region overlapping with the detection signal line ML (h).
絶縁膜706は、検知信号線ML(h)および導電膜BR(g,h)の間に挟まれる領域を備える。これにより、検知信号線ML(h)および導電膜BR(g,h)の短絡を防止することができる。 The insulating film 706 includes a region sandwiched between the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film BR (g, h). Thereby, short circuit of the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film BR (g, h) can be prevented.
《発振回路OSC》
発振回路OSCは、制御線CL(g)と電気的に接続され、制御信号を供給する機能を備える。例えば、矩形波、のこぎり波また三角波等を制御信号に用いることができる。
<< Oscillation circuit OSC >>
The oscillation circuit OSC is electrically connected to the control line CL (g) and has a function of supplying a control signal. For example, a rectangular wave, a sawtooth wave, a triangular wave, or the like can be used as the control signal.
《検知回路DC》
検知回路DCは、検知信号線ML(h)と電気的に接続され、検知信号線ML(h)の電位の変化に基づいて検知信号を供給する機能を備える。なお、検知信号は、例えば、位置情報P1を含む。
<< Detection circuit DC >>
The detection circuit DC is electrically connected to the detection signal line ML (h) and has a function of supplying a detection signal based on a change in potential of the detection signal line ML (h). The detection signal includes, for example, position information P1.
《表示部230》
例えば、実施の形態1において説明する表示パネルを表示部230に用いることができる。または、実施の形態2において説明する表示装置を表示部230に用いることができる。
<< Display unit 230 >>
For example, the display panel described in Embodiment 1 can be used for the display portion 230. Alternatively, the display device described in Embodiment 2 can be used for the display portion 230.
ところで、第2の表示素子550(i,j)が射出する光の一部が、液晶材料を含む層753を透過した後に、制御線CL(g)または電極752等により、反射される場合がある。例えば、電極752および電極751(i,j)の間で反射が繰り返される場合がある。または、基板770および電極751(i,j)の間で反射が繰り返される場合がある。これにより、第2の表示素子が射出する光は、間接照明のように画像情報を表示することができる。または、第2の表示素子は、やわらかく表示をすることができる。 By the way, part of light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) may be reflected by the control line CL (g), the electrode 752, or the like after passing through the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. is there. For example, reflection may be repeated between the electrode 752 and the electrode 751 (i, j). Alternatively, reflection may be repeated between the substrate 770 and the electrode 751 (i, j). Thereby, the light which the 2nd display element inject | emits can display image information like indirect illumination. Alternatively, the second display element can display softly.
《入出力パネル700TP2》
入出力パネル700TP2は、機能層720の構成が異なる点およびトップゲート型のトランジスタを有する点が、例えば、実施の形態1において説明する表示パネル700とは異なる。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。
<< Input / output panel 700TP2 >>
The input / output panel 700TP2 is different from the display panel 700 described in Embodiment 1, for example, in that the functional layer 720 has a different structure and has a top-gate transistor. Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
《機能層720》
機能層720は、基板770および絶縁膜501Cの間に挟まれる領域を備える。機能層720は、遮光膜BMと、絶縁膜771と、着色膜CF1と、制御線CL(g)と、検知信号線ML(h)と、検知素子775(g,h)と、を備える(図21(A)または図22参照)。
<< Functional layer 720 >>
The functional layer 720 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the insulating film 501C. The functional layer 720 includes a light shielding film BM, an insulating film 771, a coloring film CF1, a control line CL (g), a detection signal line ML (h), and a detection element 775 (g, h) ( (See FIG. 21A or FIG. 22).
なお、0.2μm以上16μm以下、好ましくは1μm以上8μm以下、より好ましくは2.5μm以上4μm以下の間隔を、制御線CL(g)および電極752の間、または、検知信号線ML(h)および電極752の間に備える。これにより、制御信号または検知信号が第1の表示素子の表示状態に与える影響を抑制することができる。 Note that an interval of 0.2 μm to 16 μm, preferably 1 μm to 8 μm, more preferably 2.5 μm to 4 μm, is provided between the control line CL (g) and the electrode 752 or the detection signal line ML (h). And between the electrode 752. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the influence of the control signal or the detection signal on the display state of the first display element.
《導電膜511D》
また、本実施の形態で説明する入出力パネル700TP2は、導電膜511Dを有する(図22参照)。
<< Conductive film 511D >>
Further, the input / output panel 700TP2 described in this embodiment includes a conductive film 511D (see FIG. 22).
なお、制御線CL(g)および導電膜511Dの間に導電材料CP等を配設し、制御線CL(g)と導電膜511Dを電気的に接続することができる。または、検知信号線ML(h)および導電膜511Dの間に導電材料CP等を配設し、検知信号線ML(h)と導電膜511Dを、電気的に接続することができる。例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を導電膜511Dに用いることができる。 Note that a conductive material CP or the like is provided between the control line CL (g) and the conductive film 511D so that the control line CL (g) and the conductive film 511D can be electrically connected. Alternatively, a conductive material CP or the like can be provided between the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film 511D so that the detection signal line ML (h) and the conductive film 511D can be electrically connected. For example, a material that can be used for a wiring or the like can be used for the conductive film 511D.
《端子519D》
また、本実施の形態で説明する入出力パネル700TP2は、端子519Dを有する。端子519Dは、導電膜511Dと電気的に接続する。
<< Terminal 519D >>
In addition, the input / output panel 700TP2 described in this embodiment includes a terminal 519D. The terminal 519D is electrically connected to the conductive film 511D.
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を端子519Dに用いることができる。具体的には、端子519Bまたは端子519Cと同じ構成を端子519Dに用いることができる(図22参照)。 For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the terminal 519D. Specifically, the same structure as the terminal 519B or the terminal 519C can be used for the terminal 519D (see FIG. 22).
なお、例えば、導電材料ACF2を用いて、端子519Dとフレキシブルプリント基板FPC2を電気的に接続することができる。これにより、例えば、端子519Dを用いて制御信号を制御線CL(g)に供給することができる。または、端子519Dを用いて検知信号を、検知信号線ML(h)から供給されることができる。 For example, the terminal 519D and the flexible printed circuit board FPC2 can be electrically connected using the conductive material ACF2. Thereby, for example, the control signal can be supplied to the control line CL (g) using the terminal 519D. Alternatively, the detection signal can be supplied from the detection signal line ML (h) using the terminal 519D.
《スイッチSW1、トランジスタM、トランジスタMD》
スイッチSW1に用いることができるトランジスタ、トランジスタMおよびトランジスタMDは、絶縁膜501Cと重なる領域を備える導電膜504と、絶縁膜501Cおよび導電膜504の間に挟まれる領域を備える半導体膜508と、を備える。なお、導電膜504はゲート電極の機能を備える(図21(B)参照)。
<< Switch SW1, Transistor M, Transistor MD >>
A transistor that can be used for the switch SW1, the transistor M and the transistor MD includes a conductive film 504 including a region overlapping with the insulating film 501C and a semiconductor film 508 including a region sandwiched between the insulating film 501C and the conductive film 504. Prepare. Note that the conductive film 504 has a function of a gate electrode (see FIG. 21B).
半導体膜508は、導電膜504と重ならない第1の領域508Aおよび第2の領域508Bと、第1の領域508Aおよび第2の領域508Bの間に導電膜504と重なる第3の領域508Cと、を備える。 The semiconductor film 508 includes a first region 508A and a second region 508B that do not overlap with the conductive film 504, and a third region 508C that overlaps with the conductive film 504 between the first region 508A and the second region 508B; Is provided.
トランジスタMDは、第3の領域508Cおよび導電膜504の間に絶縁膜506を備える。なお、絶縁膜506はゲート絶縁膜の機能を備える。 The transistor MD includes an insulating film 506 between the third region 508C and the conductive film 504. Note that the insulating film 506 functions as a gate insulating film.
第1の領域508Aおよび第2の領域508Bは、第3の領域508Cに比べて抵抗率が低く、ソース領域の機能またはドレイン領域の機能を備える。 The first region 508A and the second region 508B have a lower resistivity than the third region 508C and have a function of a source region or a function of a drain region.
例えば、酸化物半導体膜に希ガスを含むガスを用いるプラズマ処理を施して、第1の領域508Aおよび第2の領域508Bを半導体膜508に形成することができる。 For example, the first region 508A and the second region 508B can be formed in the semiconductor film 508 by performing plasma treatment using a gas containing a rare gas on the oxide semiconductor film.
また、例えば、導電膜504をマスクに用いることができる。これにより、第3の領域508Cの一部の形状を、導電膜504の端部の形状に自己整合させることができる。 For example, the conductive film 504 can be used as a mask. Accordingly, the shape of part of the third region 508C can be self-aligned with the shape of the end portion of the conductive film 504.
トランジスタMDは、第1の領域508Aと接する導電膜512Aと、第2の領域508Bと接する導電膜512Bと、を備える。導電膜512Aおよび導電膜512Bは、ソース電極またはドレイン電極の機能を備える。 The transistor MD includes a conductive film 512A in contact with the first region 508A and a conductive film 512B in contact with the second region 508B. The conductive films 512A and 512B have a function of a source electrode or a drain electrode.
例えば、トランジスタMDと同一の工程で形成することができるトランジスタをトランジスタMに用いることができる。 For example, a transistor that can be formed in the same process as the transistor MD can be used as the transistor M.
<入出力パネルの構成例2.>
本発明の一態様の入出力パネルの構成について、図27および図28を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration example of input / output panel 2. >
The structure of the input / output panel of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図27は、本発明の一態様の入出力パネルの構成を説明する図である。図27は入出力パネルが備える画素の断面図である。 FIG. 27 illustrates a structure of the input / output panel of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of a pixel included in the input / output panel.
図28は、本発明の一態様の入出力パネルの構成を説明する図である。図28(A)は図27に示す入出力パネルの機能膜の構成を説明する断面図であり、図28(B)は入力ユニットの構成を説明する断面図であり、図28(C)は第2のユニットの構成を説明する断面図であり、図28(D)は第1のユニットの構成を説明する断面図である。 FIG. 28 illustrates a structure of the input / output panel of one embodiment of the present invention. 28A is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of the functional film of the input / output panel illustrated in FIG. 27, FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of the input unit, and FIG. It is sectional drawing explaining the structure of a 2nd unit, FIG.28 (D) is sectional drawing explaining the structure of a 1st unit.
本構成例で説明する入出力パネル700TP3は、画素702(i,j)を有する(図27参照)。また、入出力パネル700TP3は、第1のユニット10と、第2のユニット20と、入力ユニット30と、機能膜770Pと、を有する(図28参照)。第1のユニット10は機能層520を含み、第2のユニット20は機能層720を含む。 The input / output panel 700TP3 described in this configuration example includes a pixel 702 (i, j) (see FIG. 27). The input / output panel 700TP3 includes a first unit 10, a second unit 20, an input unit 30, and a functional film 770P (see FIG. 28). The first unit 10 includes a functional layer 520, and the second unit 20 includes a functional layer 720.
《画素702(i,j)》
画素702(i,j)は、機能層520の一部と、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と、第2の表示素子550(i,j)と、を有する(図27参照)。
<< Pixel 702 (i, j) >>
The pixel 702 (i, j) includes a part of the functional layer 520, a first display element 750 (i, j), and a second display element 550 (i, j) (see FIG. 27). .
機能層520は、第1の導電膜、第2の導電膜、絶縁膜501Cおよび画素回路530(i,j)を含む。なお、図示しない画素回路530(i,j)は、例えば、トランジスタMを含む。また、機能層520は、光学素子560、被覆膜565およびレンズ580を含む。また、機能層520は、絶縁膜528および絶縁膜521を備える。絶縁膜521Aおよび絶縁膜521Bを積層した材料を、絶縁膜521に用いることができる。 The functional layer 520 includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, an insulating film 501C, and a pixel circuit 530 (i, j). Note that the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) (not shown) includes, for example, a transistor M. The functional layer 520 includes an optical element 560, a coating film 565, and a lens 580. The functional layer 520 includes an insulating film 528 and an insulating film 521. A material in which the insulating films 521A and 521B are stacked can be used for the insulating film 521.
例えば、屈折率1.55近傍の材料を絶縁膜521Aまたは絶縁膜521Bに用いることができる。または、屈折率1.6近傍の材料を絶縁膜521Aまたは絶縁膜521Bに用いることができる。または、アクリル樹脂またはポリイミドを絶縁膜521Aまたは絶縁膜521Bに用いることができる。 For example, a material having a refractive index of about 1.55 can be used for the insulating film 521A or the insulating film 521B. Alternatively, a material with a refractive index of about 1.6 can be used for the insulating film 521A or the insulating film 521B. Alternatively, acrylic resin or polyimide can be used for the insulating film 521A or the insulating film 521B.
絶縁膜501Cは、第1の導電膜および第2の導電膜の間に挟まれる領域を備え、絶縁膜501Cは開口部591Aを備える。 The insulating film 501C includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film, and the insulating film 501C includes an opening 591A.
第1の導電膜は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と電気的に接続される。具体的には、第1の表示素子750(i,j)の電極751(i,j)と電気的に接続される。なお、電極751(i,j)を、第1の導電膜に用いることができる。 The first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element 750 (i, j). Specifically, it is electrically connected to the electrode 751 (i, j) of the first display element 750 (i, j). Note that the electrode 751 (i, j) can be used for the first conductive film.
第2の導電膜は、第1の導電膜と重なる領域を備える。第2の導電膜は、開口部591Aにおいて、第1の導電膜と電気的に接続される。例えば、導電膜512Bを第2の導電膜に用いることができる。第2の導電膜は、画素回路530(i,j)と電気的に接続される。例えば、画素回路530(i,j)のスイッチSW1に用いるトランジスタのソース電極またはドレイン電極として機能する導電膜を第2の導電膜に用いることができる。ところで、絶縁膜501Cに設けられた開口部591Aにおいて第2の導電膜と電気的に接続される第1の導電膜を、貫通電極ということができる。 The second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film. The second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening 591A. For example, the conductive film 512B can be used for the second conductive film. The second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j). For example, a conductive film functioning as a source electrode or a drain electrode of a transistor used for the switch SW1 of the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) can be used for the second conductive film. By the way, the first conductive film electrically connected to the second conductive film in the opening 591A provided in the insulating film 501C can be referred to as a through electrode.
第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、画素回路530(i,j)と電気的に接続される。第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、機能層520に向けて光を射出する機能を備える。また、第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、例えば、レンズ580または光学素子560に向けて光を射出する機能を備える。 The second display element 550 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j). The second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the functional layer 520. The second display element 550 (i, j) has a function of emitting light toward the lens 580 or the optical element 560, for example.
第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を用いた表示を視認できる範囲の一部において当該第2の表示素子を用いた表示を視認できるように配設される。例えば、第2の表示素子550(i,j)が射出する光を遮らない領域751Hを備える形状を第1の表示素子750(i,j)の電極751(i,j)に用いる。なお、外光を反射する強度を制御して画像情報を表示する第1の表示素子750(i,j)に外光が入射し反射する方向を、破線の矢印を用いて図中に示す。また、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を用いた表示を視認できる範囲の一部に第2の表示素子550(i,j)が光を射出する方向を、実線の矢印を用いて図中に示す。 The second display element 550 (i, j) can visually recognize the display using the second display element in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized. It is arranged. For example, a shape including a region 751H that does not block light emitted from the second display element 550 (i, j) is used for the electrode 751 (i, j) of the first display element 750 (i, j). The direction in which the external light is incident and reflected on the first display element 750 (i, j) that displays the image information by controlling the intensity of reflecting the external light is shown in the drawing by using a broken arrow. Further, the direction in which the second display element 550 (i, j) emits light in a part of the range where the display using the first display element 750 (i, j) can be visually recognized is indicated by a solid line arrow. Shown in the figure.
これにより、第1の表示素子を用いた表示を視認することができる領域の一部において、第2の表示素子を用いた表示を視認することができる。または、入出力パネルの姿勢等を変えることなく使用者は表示を視認することができる。または、第1の表示素子が反射する光が表現する物体色と、第2の表示素子が射出する光が表現する光源色とを掛け合わせることができる。または、物体色および光源色を用いて絵画的な表示をすることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the display using the 2nd display element can be visually recognized in a part of field which can visually recognize the display using the 1st display element. Alternatively, the user can visually recognize the display without changing the posture of the input / output panel. Alternatively, the object color expressed by the light reflected by the first display element can be multiplied by the light source color expressed by the light emitted by the second display element. Alternatively, a pictorial display can be performed using the object color and the light source color. As a result, a novel input / output panel that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
例えば、第1の表示素子750(i,j)は、電極751(i,j)と、電極752と、液晶材料を含む層753と、を備える。また、配向膜AF1と、配向膜AF2とを備える。具体的には、反射型の液晶素子を第1の表示素子750(i,j)に用いることができる。 For example, the first display element 750 (i, j) includes an electrode 751 (i, j), an electrode 752, and a layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. In addition, an alignment film AF1 and an alignment film AF2 are provided. Specifically, a reflective liquid crystal element can be used for the first display element 750 (i, j).
例えば、屈折率2.0近傍の透明導電膜を電極752または電極751(i,j)に用いることができる。具体的には、インジウムとスズとシリコンを含む酸化物を電極752または電極751(i,j)に用いることができる。または、屈折率1.6近傍の材料を配向膜に用いることができる。 For example, a transparent conductive film having a refractive index of about 2.0 can be used for the electrode 752 or the electrode 751 (i, j). Specifically, an oxide containing indium, tin, and silicon can be used for the electrode 752 or the electrode 751 (i, j). Alternatively, a material having a refractive index of about 1.6 can be used for the alignment film.
例えば、第2の表示素子550(i,j)は、電極551(i,j)と、電極552と、発光性の材料を含む層553(j)と、を備える。電極552は、電極551(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。発光性の材料を含む層553(j)は、電極551(i,j)および電極552の間に挟まれる領域を備える。電極551(i,j)は、接続部522において、画素回路530(i,j)と電気的に接続される。具体的には、有機EL素子を第2の表示素子550(i,j)に用いることができる。 For example, the second display element 550 (i, j) includes an electrode 551 (i, j), an electrode 552, and a layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material. The electrode 552 includes a region overlapping with the electrode 551 (i, j). The layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material includes a region sandwiched between the electrode 551 (i, j) and the electrode 552. The electrode 551 (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530 (i, j) at the connection portion 522. Specifically, an organic EL element can be used for the second display element 550 (i, j).
例えば、屈折率2.0近傍の透明導電膜を電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。具体的には、インジウムとスズとシリコンを含む酸化物を電極551(i,j)に用いることができる。または、屈折率1.8近傍の材料を発光性の材料を含む層553(j)に用いることができる。 For example, a transparent conductive film having a refractive index of about 2.0 can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j). Specifically, an oxide containing indium, tin, and silicon can be used for the electrode 551 (i, j). Alternatively, a material having a refractive index of about 1.8 can be used for the layer 553 (j) containing a light-emitting material.
光学素子560は透光性を備え、光学素子560は第1の領域、第2の領域および第3の領域を備える。 The optical element 560 has translucency, and the optical element 560 includes a first region, a second region, and a third region.
第1の領域は第2の表示素子550(i,j)から可視光を供給される領域を含み、第2の領域は被覆膜565と接する領域を含み、第3の領域は可視光の一部を射出する機能を備える。また、第3の領域は第1の領域の可視光を供給される領域の面積以下の面積を備える。 The first region includes a region to which visible light is supplied from the second display element 550 (i, j), the second region includes a region in contact with the coating film 565, and the third region is visible light. A function to inject a part is provided. The third region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which visible light is supplied.
被覆膜565は可視光に対する反射性を備え、被覆膜565は可視光の一部を反射して、第3の領域に供給する機能を備える。 The coating film 565 has reflectivity with respect to visible light, and the coating film 565 has a function of reflecting part of visible light and supplying it to the third region.
例えば、金属を被覆膜565に用いることができる。具体的には、銀を含む材料を被覆膜565に用いることができる。例えば、銀およびパラジウム等を含む材料または銀および銅等を含む材料を被覆膜565に用いることができる。 For example, a metal can be used for the coating film 565. Specifically, a material containing silver can be used for the coating film 565. For example, a material containing silver, palladium, or the like, or a material containing silver, copper, or the like can be used for the coating film 565.
《機能層720》
機能層720は、基板770および絶縁膜501Cの間に挟まれる領域を備える。機能層720は、絶縁膜771と、着色膜CF1と、を有する。
<< Functional layer 720 >>
The functional layer 720 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the insulating film 501C. The functional layer 720 includes an insulating film 771 and a colored film CF1.
着色膜CF1は、基板770および第1の表示素子750(i,j)の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The colored film CF1 includes a region sandwiched between the substrate 770 and the first display element 750 (i, j).
絶縁膜771は、着色膜CF1と液晶材料を含む層753の間に挟まれる領域を備える。これにより、着色膜CF1の厚さに基づく凹凸を平坦にすることができる。または、着色膜CF1等から液晶材料を含む層753への不純物の拡散を、抑制することができる。 The insulating film 771 includes a region sandwiched between the coloring film CF1 and the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material. Thereby, the unevenness | corrugation based on the thickness of colored film CF1 can be made flat. Alternatively, diffusion of impurities from the coloring film CF1 or the like to the layer 753 containing a liquid crystal material can be suppressed.
例えば、屈折率1.55近傍のアクリル樹脂を、絶縁膜771に用いることができる。 For example, an acrylic resin having a refractive index of about 1.55 can be used for the insulating film 771.
《基板570、基板770》
また、本実施の形態で説明する入出力パネルは、基板570と、基板770と、を有する。
<< Substrate 570, Substrate 770 >>
The input / output panel described in this embodiment includes a substrate 570 and a substrate 770.
基板770は、基板570と重なる領域を備える。基板770は、基板570との間に機能層520を挟む領域を備える。 The substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the substrate 570. The substrate 770 includes a region that sandwiches the functional layer 520 with the substrate 570.
基板770は、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。例えば、複屈折が抑制された材料を当該領域に用いることができる。 The substrate 770 includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j). For example, a material in which birefringence is suppressed can be used for the region.
例えば、屈折率1.5近傍の樹脂材料を基板770に用いることができる。 For example, a resin material having a refractive index of about 1.5 can be used for the substrate 770.
《接合層505》
また、本実施の形態で説明する入出力パネルは、接合層505を有する。
<< Junction Layer 505 >>
In addition, the input / output panel described in this embodiment includes a bonding layer 505.
接合層505は、機能層520および基板570の間に挟まれる領域を備え、機能層520および基板570を貼り合せる機能を備える。 The bonding layer 505 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the substrate 570 together.
《構造体KB1、構造体KB2》
また、本実施の形態で説明する入出力パネルは、構造体KB1と、構造体KB2とを有する。
<< Structure KB1, Structure KB2 >>
The input / output panel described in this embodiment includes a structure KB1 and a structure KB2.
構造体KB1は、機能層520および基板770の間に所定の間隙を設ける機能を備える。構造体KB1は領域751Hと重なる領域を備え、構造体KB1は透光性を備える。これにより、第2の表示素子550(i,j)によって射出される光を一方の面に供給され、他方の面から射出することができる。 The structure KB1 has a function of providing a predetermined gap between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770. The structure KB1 includes a region overlapping with the region 751H, and the structure KB1 has a light-transmitting property. Thereby, the light emitted by the second display element 550 (i, j) can be supplied to one surface and emitted from the other surface.
また、構造体KB1は光学素子560と重なる領域を備え、例えば、光学素子560に用いる材料の屈折率との差が0.2以下になるように選択された材料を構造体KB1に用いる。これにより、第2の表示素子が射出する光を効率よく利用することができる。または、第2の表示素子の面積を広くすることができる。または、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。 In addition, the structure KB1 includes a region overlapping with the optical element 560. For example, a material selected so that the difference from the refractive index of the material used for the optical element 560 is 0.2 or less is used for the structure KB1. Thereby, the light which a 2nd display element inject | emits can be utilized efficiently. Alternatively, the area of the second display element can be increased. Or the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered | hung.
構造体KB2は、偏光層770PBの厚さを所定の厚さに制御する機能を備える。構造体KB2は第2の表示素子550(i,j)と重なる領域を備え、構造体KB2は透光性を備える。 The structure KB2 has a function of controlling the thickness of the polarizing layer 770PB to a predetermined thickness. The structure KB2 includes a region overlapping with the second display element 550 (i, j), and the structure KB2 has a light-transmitting property.
または、所定の色の光を透過する材料を構造体KB1または構造体KB2に用いることができる。これにより、構造体KB1または構造体KB2を例えばカラーフィルターに用いることができる。例えば、青色、緑色または赤色の光を透過する材料を構造体KB1または構造体KB2に用いることができる。また、黄色の光または白色の光等を透過する材料を構造体KB1または構造体KB2に用いることができる。 Alternatively, a material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2. Thereby, the structure KB1 or the structure KB2 can be used for a color filter, for example. For example, a material that transmits blue, green, or red light can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2. A material that transmits yellow light, white light, or the like can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2.
具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート、ポリシロキサン若しくはアクリル樹脂等またはこれらから選択された複数の樹脂の複合材料などを構造体KB1または構造体KB2に用いることができる。また、感光性を有する材料を用いて形成してもよい。 Specifically, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, or the like, or a composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the structure KB1 or the structure KB2. Alternatively, a material having photosensitivity may be used.
例えば、屈折率1.5近傍のアクリル樹脂を構造体KB1に用いることができる。また、屈折率1.55近傍のアクリル樹脂を構造体KB2に用いることができる。 For example, an acrylic resin having a refractive index of about 1.5 can be used for the structure KB1. An acrylic resin having a refractive index of about 1.55 can be used for the structure KB2.
《入力ユニット30》
入力ユニット30は検知素子を備える。検知素子は、画素702(i,j)と重なる領域に近接するものを検知する機能を備える。これにより、表示部に近接させる指などをポインタに用いて、位置情報を入力することができる。
<< Input unit 30 >>
The input unit 30 includes a detection element. The detection element has a function of detecting an element close to a region overlapping with the pixel 702 (i, j). Accordingly, position information can be input using a finger or the like that is brought close to the display unit as a pointer.
例えば、静電容量型の近接センサ、電磁誘導型の近接センサ、光学方式の近接センサ、抵抗膜方式の近接センサまたは表面弾性波方式の近接センサなどを、入力ユニット30に用いることができる。具体的には、表面型静電容量方式、投影型静電容量方式または赤外線検知型の近接センサを用いることができる。 For example, a capacitive proximity sensor, an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor, an optical proximity sensor, a resistive proximity sensor, or a surface acoustic wave proximity sensor can be used for the input unit 30. Specifically, a proximity sensor of a surface type capacitance method, a projection type capacitance method, or an infrared detection type can be used.
例えば、静電容量方式の近接センサを備える屈折率1.6近傍のタッチセンサを入力ユニット30に用いることができる。 For example, a touch sensor having a refractive index near 1.6 including a capacitive proximity sensor can be used for the input unit 30.
《機能膜770D、機能膜770P等》
また、本実施の形態で説明する入出力パネル700TP3は、機能膜770Dと、機能膜770Pと、を有する。
<< Functional film 770D, functional film 770P, etc. >>
The input / output panel 700TP3 described in this embodiment includes a functional film 770D and a functional film 770P.
機能膜770Dは第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。機能膜770Dは機能層520との間に第1の表示素子750(i,j)を挟む領域を備える。 The functional film 770D includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j). The functional film 770D includes a region that sandwiches the first display element 750 (i, j) between the functional layer 520 and the functional layer 520D.
例えば、光拡散フィルムを機能膜770Dに用いることができる。具体的には、基材の表面と交差する方向に沿った軸を備える柱状構造を有する材料を、機能膜770Dに用いることができる。これにより、光を軸に沿った方向に透過し易く、他の方向に散乱し易くすることができる。または、例えば、第1の表示素子750(i,j)が反射する光を拡散することができる。 For example, a light diffusion film can be used for the functional film 770D. Specifically, a material having a columnar structure including an axis along a direction intersecting the surface of the base material can be used for the functional film 770D. Thereby, light can be easily transmitted in a direction along the axis and can be easily scattered in other directions. Alternatively, for example, light reflected by the first display element 750 (i, j) can be diffused.
機能膜770Pは、偏光層770PB、位相差フィルム770PAまたは構造体KB2を備える。偏光層770PBは開口部を備え、位相差フィルム770PAは偏光層770PBと重なる領域を備える。なお、構造体KB2は開口部に設けられる。 The functional film 770P includes the polarizing layer 770PB, the retardation film 770PA, or the structure KB2. The polarizing layer 770PB includes an opening, and the retardation film 770PA includes a region overlapping with the polarizing layer 770PB. The structure KB2 is provided in the opening.
例えば、二色性色素、液晶材料および樹脂を偏光層770PBに用いることができる。偏光層770PBは、偏光性を備える。これにより、機能膜770Pを偏光板に用いることができる。 For example, a dichroic dye, a liquid crystal material, and a resin can be used for the polarizing layer 770PB. The polarizing layer 770PB has polarizing properties. Accordingly, the functional film 770P can be used for the polarizing plate.
偏光層770PBは第1の表示素子750(i,j)と重なる領域を備え、構造体KB2は第2の表示素子550(i,j)と重なる領域を備える。これにより、液晶素子を第1の表示素子に用いることができる。例えば、反射型の液晶素子を第1の表示素子に用いることができる。または、第2の表示素子が射出する光を効率よく取り出すことができる。または、有機EL素子に流す電流の密度を下げることができる。または、有機EL素子の信頼性を高めることができる。 The polarizing layer 770PB includes a region overlapping with the first display element 750 (i, j), and the structure KB2 includes a region overlapping with the second display element 550 (i, j). Accordingly, the liquid crystal element can be used for the first display element. For example, a reflective liquid crystal element can be used for the first display element. Alternatively, light emitted from the second display element can be extracted efficiently. Or the density of the electric current sent through an organic EL element can be lowered | hung. Or the reliability of an organic EL element can be improved.
例えば、反射防止フィルム、偏光フィルムまたは位相差フィルムを機能膜770Pに用いることができる。具体的には、2色性色素を含む膜および位相差フィルムを機能膜770Pに用いることができる。 For example, an antireflection film, a polarizing film, or a retardation film can be used for the functional film 770P. Specifically, a film containing a dichroic dye and a retardation film can be used for the functional film 770P.
また、ゴミの付着を抑制する帯電防止膜、汚れを付着しにくくする撥水性の膜、使用に伴う傷の発生を抑制するハードコート膜などを、機能膜770Pに用いることができる。 In addition, an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust, a water-repellent film that makes it difficult to adhere dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses generation of scratches due to use, and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.
例えば、屈折率1.6近傍の材料を拡散フィルムに用いることができる。また、屈折率1.6近傍の材料を位相差フィルム770PAに用いることができる。 For example, a material having a refractive index near 1.6 can be used for the diffusion film. Further, a material having a refractive index of about 1.6 can be used for the retardation film 770PA.
なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 Note that this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments described in this specification as appropriate.
(実施の形態4)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成について、図23乃至図25を参照しながら説明する。
(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, a structure of an information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
図23(A)は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。図23(B)および図23(C)は、情報処理装置200の外観の一例を説明する投影図である。 FIG. 23A is a block diagram illustrating a structure of an information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23B and FIG. 23C are projection views for explaining an example of the appearance of the information processing apparatus 200.
図24は、本発明の一態様のプログラムを説明するフローチャートである。図24(A)は、本発明の一態様のプログラムの主の処理を説明するフローチャートであり、図24(B)は、割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。 FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a program of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 24A is a flowchart for describing main processing of the program of one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 24B is a flowchart for describing interrupt processing.
図25は、本発明の一態様のプログラムの割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。 FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a program interrupt process according to one embodiment of the present invention.
<情報処理装置の構成例1.>
本実施の形態で説明する情報処理装置200は、入出力装置220と、演算装置210と、を有する(図23(A)参照)。入出力装置は、演算装置210と電気的に接続される。また、情報処理装置200は筐体を備えることができる(図23(B)または図23(C)参照)。
<Configuration example 1 of information processing apparatus>>
The information processing device 200 described in this embodiment includes an input / output device 220 and an arithmetic device 210 (see FIG. 23A). The input / output device is electrically connected to the arithmetic device 210. Further, the information processing device 200 can include a housing (see FIG. 23B or FIG. 23C).
入出力装置220は表示部230および入力部240を備える(図23(A)参照)。入出力装置220は検知部250を備える。また、入出力装置220は通信部290を備えることができる。 The input / output device 220 includes a display portion 230 and an input portion 240 (see FIG. 23A). The input / output device 220 includes a detection unit 250. In addition, the input / output device 220 can include a communication unit 290.
入出力装置220は画像情報V1または制御情報SSを供給される機能を備え、位置情報P1または検知情報S1を供給する機能を備える。 The input / output device 220 has a function of supplying image information V1 or control information SS, and a function of supplying position information P1 or detection information S1.
演算装置210は位置情報P1または検知情報S1を供給させる機能を備える。演算装置210は画像情報V1を供給する機能を備える。演算装置210は、例えば、位置情報P1または検知情報S1に基づいて動作する機能を備える。 The arithmetic device 210 has a function of supplying the position information P1 or the detection information S1. The arithmetic device 210 has a function of supplying image information V1. The arithmetic device 210 has a function of operating based on the position information P1 or the detection information S1, for example.
なお、筐体は入出力装置220または演算装置210を収納する機能を備える。または、筐体は表示部230または演算装置210を支持する機能を備える。 Note that the housing has a function of housing the input / output device 220 or the arithmetic device 210. Alternatively, the housing has a function of supporting the display unit 230 or the arithmetic device 210.
表示部230は画像情報V1に基づいて画像を表示する機能を備える。表示部230は制御情報SSに基づいて画像を表示する機能を備える。 The display unit 230 has a function of displaying an image based on the image information V1. The display unit 230 has a function of displaying an image based on the control information SS.
入力部240は、位置情報P1を供給する機能を備える。 The input unit 240 has a function of supplying the position information P1.
検知部250は検知情報S1を供給する機能を備える。検知部250は、例えば、情報処理装置200が使用される環境の照度を検出する機能を備え、照度情報を供給する機能を備える。 The detection unit 250 has a function of supplying the detection information S1. For example, the detection unit 250 has a function of detecting the illuminance of an environment where the information processing apparatus 200 is used, and a function of supplying illuminance information.
これにより、情報処理装置は、情報処理装置が使用される環境において、情報処理装置の筐体が受ける光の強さを把握して動作することができる。または、情報処理装置の使用者は、表示方法を選択することができる。具体的には、第1の表示素子を用いる表示方法を選択し、例えば、電力の消費を抑制することができる。または、第2の表示素子を用いる方法を選択し、例えば、暗い場所で表示をすることができる。または、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を表示に用いる方法を選択し、例えば、使用者の好みに応じた快適に感じる表示をすることができる。その結果、利便性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, the information processing apparatus can operate by grasping the intensity of light received by the casing of the information processing apparatus in an environment where the information processing apparatus is used. Alternatively, the user of the information processing apparatus can select a display method. Specifically, a display method using the first display element can be selected, and for example, power consumption can be suppressed. Alternatively, a method using the second display element is selected, and for example, display can be performed in a dark place. Alternatively, a method of using the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) for display is selected, and for example, a comfortable display according to the user's preference is displayed. Can do. As a result, a novel information processing apparatus that is highly convenient or reliable can be provided.
以下に、情報処理装置を構成する個々の要素について説明する。なお、これらの構成は明確に分離できず、一つの構成が他の構成を兼ねる場合や他の構成の一部を含む場合がある。例えばタッチセンサが表示パネルに重ねられたタッチパネルは、表示部であるとともに入力部でもある。 Below, each element which comprises information processing apparatus is demonstrated. Note that these configurations cannot be clearly separated, and one configuration may serve as another configuration or may include a part of another configuration. For example, a touch panel in which a touch sensor is superimposed on a display panel is not only a display unit but also an input unit.
《構成例》
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置200は、筐体または演算装置210を有する。
<Configuration example>
The information processing device 200 of one embodiment of the present invention includes a housing or the arithmetic device 210.
演算装置210は、演算部211、記憶部212、伝送路214、入出力インターフェース215を備える。 The computing device 210 includes a computing unit 211, a storage unit 212, a transmission path 214, and an input / output interface 215.
また、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置は、入出力装置220を有する。 Further, the information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the input / output device 220.
入出力装置220は、表示部230、入力部240、検知部250および通信部290を備える。 The input / output device 220 includes a display unit 230, an input unit 240, a detection unit 250, and a communication unit 290.
《情報処理装置》
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置は、演算装置210または入出力装置220を備える。
《Information processing device》
The information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the arithmetic device 210 or the input / output device 220.
《演算装置210》
演算装置210は、演算部211および記憶部212を備える。また、伝送路214および入出力インターフェース215を備える。
<< Calculation device 210 >>
The calculation device 210 includes a calculation unit 211 and a storage unit 212. A transmission path 214 and an input / output interface 215 are provided.
《演算部211》
演算部211は、例えばプログラムを実行する機能を備える。
<< Calculation unit 211 >>
The calculation unit 211 has a function of executing a program, for example.
《記憶部212》
記憶部212は、例えば演算部211が実行するプログラム、初期情報、設定情報または画像等を記憶する機能を有する。
<< Storage unit 212 >>
The storage unit 212 has a function of storing, for example, a program executed by the calculation unit 211, initial information, setting information, or an image.
具体的には、ハードディスク、フラッシュメモリまたは酸化物半導体を含むトランジスタを用いたメモリ等を用いることができる。 Specifically, a hard disk, a flash memory, a memory including a transistor including an oxide semiconductor, or the like can be used.
《入出力インターフェース215、伝送路214》
入出力インターフェース215は端子または配線を備え、情報を供給し、情報を供給される機能を備える。例えば、伝送路214と電気的に接続することができる。また、入出力装置220と電気的に接続することができる。
<< Input / output interface 215, transmission path 214 >>
The input / output interface 215 includes a terminal or a wiring, and has a function of supplying information and receiving information. For example, the transmission line 214 can be electrically connected. Further, the input / output device 220 can be electrically connected.
伝送路214は配線を備え、情報を供給し、情報を供給される機能を備える。例えば、入出力インターフェース215と電気的に接続することができる。また、演算部211、記憶部212または入出力インターフェース215と電気的に接続することができる。 The transmission path 214 includes wiring, supplies information, and has a function of being supplied with information. For example, the input / output interface 215 can be electrically connected. Further, it can be electrically connected to the calculation unit 211, the storage unit 212, or the input / output interface 215.
《入出力装置220》
入出力装置220は、表示部230、入力部240、検知部250または通信部290を備える。例えば、実施の形態3において説明する入出力装置を用いることができる。これにより、消費電力を低減することができる。
<< Input / output device 220 >>
The input / output device 220 includes a display unit 230, an input unit 240, a detection unit 250, or a communication unit 290. For example, the input / output device described in Embodiment 3 can be used. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced.
《表示部230》
表示部230は、制御部238と、駆動回路GDと、駆動回路SDと、表示パネル700と、を有する(図15(A)参照)。例えば、実施の形態2で説明する表示装置を表示部230に用いることができる。
<< Display unit 230 >>
The display portion 230 includes a control portion 238, a drive circuit GD, a drive circuit SD, and a display panel 700 (see FIG. 15A). For example, the display device described in Embodiment 2 can be used for the display portion 230.
《入力部240》
さまざまなヒューマンインターフェイス等を入力部240に用いることができる(図23参照)。
<Input unit 240>
Various human interfaces or the like can be used for the input unit 240 (see FIG. 23).
例えば、キーボード、マウス、タッチセンサ、マイクまたはカメラ等を入力部240に用いることができる。なお、表示部230に重なる領域を備えるタッチセンサを用いることができる。表示部230と表示部230に重なる領域を備えるタッチセンサを備える入出力装置を、タッチパネルまたはタッチスクリーンということができる。 For example, a keyboard, mouse, touch sensor, microphone, camera, or the like can be used for the input unit 240. Note that a touch sensor including a region overlapping with the display portion 230 can be used. An input / output device including a touch sensor including a display unit 230 and a region overlapping with the display unit 230 can be referred to as a touch panel or a touch screen.
例えば、使用者は、タッチパネルに触れた指をポインタに用いて様々なジェスチャー(タップ、ドラッグ、スワイプまたはピンチイン等)をすることができる。 For example, the user can make various gestures (tap, drag, swipe, pinch in, etc.) using a finger touching the touch panel as a pointer.
例えば、演算装置210は、タッチパネルに接触する指の位置または軌跡等の情報を解析し、解析結果が所定の条件を満たすとき、特定のジェスチャーが供給されたとすることができる。これにより、使用者は、所定のジェスチャーにあらかじめ関連付けられた所定の操作命令を、当該ジェスチャーを用いて供給できる。 For example, the computing device 210 may analyze information such as the position or trajectory of a finger that touches the touch panel, and a specific gesture may be supplied when the analysis result satisfies a predetermined condition. Accordingly, the user can supply a predetermined operation command associated with the predetermined gesture in advance using the gesture.
一例を挙げれば、使用者は、画像情報の表示位置を変更する「スクロール命令」を、タッチパネルに沿ってタッチパネルに接触する指を移動するジェスチャーを用いて供給できる。 For example, the user can supply a “scroll command” for changing the display position of the image information using a gesture for moving a finger that touches the touch panel along the touch panel.
《検知部250》
検知部250は、周囲の状態を検知して検知情報を供給する機能を備える。具体的には、照度情報、姿勢情報、圧力情報、位置情報等を供給できる。
<< Detection unit 250 >>
The detection unit 250 has a function of detecting surrounding conditions and supplying detection information. Specifically, illuminance information, posture information, pressure information, position information, and the like can be supplied.
例えば、光検出器、姿勢検出器、加速度センサ、方位センサ、GPS(Global positioning System)信号受信回路、圧力センサ、温度センサ、湿度センサまたはカメラ等を、検知部250に用いることができる。 For example, a light detector, an attitude detector, an acceleration sensor, an orientation sensor, a GPS (Global positioning System) signal receiving circuit, a pressure sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, a camera, or the like can be used for the detection unit 250.
《通信部290》
通信部290は、ネットワークに情報を供給し、ネットワークから情報を取得する機能を備える。
<< Communication unit 290 >>
The communication unit 290 has a function of supplying information to the network and acquiring information from the network.
《プログラム》
本発明の一態様のプログラムは、下記のステップを有する(図24(A)参照)。
"program"
The program of one embodiment of the present invention includes the following steps (see FIG. 24A).
[第1のステップ]
第1のステップにおいて、設定を初期化する(図24(A)(S1)参照)。
[First step]
In the first step, settings are initialized (see FIGS. 24A and S1).
例えば、起動時に表示する所定の画像情報と、当該画像情報を表示する所定のモードと、当該画像情報を表示する所定の表示方法を特定する情報と、を記憶部212から取得する。具体的には、一の静止画像情報または他の動画像情報を所定の画像情報に用いることができる。また、第1のモードまたは第2のモードを所定のモードに用いることができる。また、第1の表示方法、第2の表示方法または第3の表示方法を所定の表示方法に用いることができる。 For example, predetermined image information to be displayed at startup, a predetermined mode for displaying the image information, and information for specifying a predetermined display method for displaying the image information are acquired from the storage unit 212. Specifically, one still image information or other moving image information can be used as predetermined image information. Further, the first mode or the second mode can be used as a predetermined mode. Further, the first display method, the second display method, or the third display method can be used as a predetermined display method.
[第2のステップ]
第2のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を許可する(図24(A)(S2)参照)。なお、割り込み処理が許可された演算装置は、主の処理と並行して割り込み処理を行うことができる。割り込み処理から主の処理に復帰した演算装置は、割り込み処理をして得た結果を主の処理に反映することができる。
[Second step]
In the second step, interrupt processing is permitted (see FIGS. 24A and S2). Note that an arithmetic unit that is permitted to perform interrupt processing can perform interrupt processing in parallel with main processing. The arithmetic unit that has returned to the main process from the interrupt process can reflect the result obtained by the interrupt process to the main process.
なお、カウンタの値が初期値であるとき、演算装置に割り込み処理をさせ、割り込み処理から復帰する際に、カウンタを初期値以外の値としてもよい。これにより、プログラムを起動した後に常に割り込み処理をさせることができる。 Note that when the counter value is an initial value, the arithmetic unit performs interrupt processing, and when returning from the interrupt processing, the counter may be set to a value other than the initial value. As a result, interrupt processing can always be performed after the program is started.
[第3のステップ]
第3のステップにおいて、第1のステップまたは割り込み処理において選択された、所定のモードまたは所定の表示方法を用いて画像情報を表示する(図24(A)(S3)参照)。なお、所定のモードは情報を表示するモードを特定し、所定の表示方法は画像情報を表示する方法を特定する。また、例えば、画像情報V1、情報V11または情報V12を表示する情報に用いることができる。
[Third step]
In the third step, the image information is displayed using the predetermined mode or the predetermined display method selected in the first step or the interruption process (see FIGS. 24A and S3). The predetermined mode specifies a mode for displaying information, and the predetermined display method specifies a method for displaying image information. Further, for example, the image information V1, the information V11, or the information V12 can be used as information to be displayed.
例えば、画像情報V1を表示する一の方法を、第1のモードに関連付けることができる。または、画像情報V1を表示する他の方法を第2のモードに関連付けることができる。これにより、選択されたモードに基づいて表示方法を選択することができる。 For example, one method for displaying the image information V1 can be associated with the first mode. Alternatively, another method for displaying the image information V1 can be associated with the second mode. Thereby, a display method can be selected based on the selected mode.
例えば、画像情報V1を表示する異なる3つの方法を、第1の表示方法乃至第3の表示方法に関連付けることができる。これにより、選択された表示方法に基づいて表示をすることができる。 For example, three different methods for displaying the image information V1 can be associated with the first display method to the third display method. Thereby, it is possible to display based on the selected display method.
《第1のモード》
具体的には、30Hz以上、好ましくは60Hz以上の頻度で一の走査線に選択信号を供給し、選択信号に基づいて表示をする方法を、第1のモードに関連付けることができる。
<First mode>
Specifically, a method of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of 30 Hz or more, preferably 60 Hz or more, and displaying based on the selection signal can be associated with the first mode.
例えば、30Hz以上、好ましくは60Hz以上の頻度で選択信号を供給すると、動画像の動きを滑らかに表示することができる。 For example, when the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, the motion of the moving image can be displayed smoothly.
例えば、30Hz以上、好ましくは60Hz以上の頻度で画像を更新すると、使用者の操作に滑らかに追従するように変化する画像を、使用者が操作中の情報処理装置200に表示することができる。 For example, when an image is updated at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, an image that changes so as to smoothly follow the user's operation can be displayed on the information processing apparatus 200 being operated by the user.
《第2のモード》
具体的には、30Hz未満、好ましくは1Hz未満より好ましくは一分に一回未満の頻度で一の走査線に選択信号を供給し、選択信号に基づいて表示をする方法を、第2のモードに関連付けることができる。
<< Second mode >>
Specifically, a method of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute, and performing display based on the selection signal is described in the second mode. Can be associated with
30Hz未満、好ましくは1Hz未満より好ましくは一分に一回未満の頻度で選択信号を供給すると、フリッカーまたはちらつきが抑制された表示をすることができる。また、消費電力を低減することができる。 When the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once per minute, a display in which flicker or flicker is suppressed can be displayed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced.
例えば、情報処理装置200を時計に用いる場合、1秒に一回の頻度または1分に一回の頻度等で表示を更新することができる。 For example, when the information processing apparatus 200 is used for a clock, the display can be updated at a frequency of once per second or a frequency of once per minute.
ところで、例えば、発光素子を第2の表示素子に用いる場合、発光素子をパルス状に発光させて、画像情報を表示することができる。具体的には、パルス状に有機EL素子を発光させて、その残光を表示に用いることができる。有機EL素子は優れた周波数特性を備えるため、発光素子を駆動する時間を短縮し、消費電力を低減することができる場合がある。または、発熱が抑制されるため、発光素子の劣化を軽減することができる場合がある。 By the way, for example, when a light-emitting element is used for the second display element, the light-emitting element can emit light in a pulse shape to display image information. Specifically, the organic EL element can emit light in a pulse shape, and the afterglow can be used for display. Since the organic EL element has excellent frequency characteristics, there are cases where the time for driving the light emitting element can be shortened and the power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, heat generation is suppressed, so that deterioration of the light-emitting element can be reduced in some cases.
《第1の表示方法》
具体的には、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を表示に用いる方法を、第1の表示方法に用いることができる。これにより、例えば、消費電力を低減することができる。または、明るい環境下において、高いコントラストで画像情報を良好に表示することができる。
<< First display method >>
Specifically, a method using the first display element 750 (i, j) for display can be used for the first display method. Thereby, for example, power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, the image information can be favorably displayed with high contrast in a bright environment.
《第2の表示方法》
具体的には、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を表示に用いる方法を、第2の表示方法に用いることができる。これにより、例えば、暗い環境下で画像を良好に表示することができる。または、良好な色再現性で写真等を表示することができる。または、動きの速い動画を滑らかに表示することができる。
<< Second display method >>
Specifically, a method using the second display element 550 (i, j) for display can be used for the second display method. Thereby, for example, an image can be favorably displayed in a dark environment. Alternatively, a photograph or the like can be displayed with good color reproducibility. Alternatively, a fast moving video can be displayed smoothly.
なお、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を用いて画像情報V1を表示する場合、照度情報に基づいて画像情報V1を表示する明るさを決定することができる。例えば、照度が5千ルクス以上10万ルクス未満の場合、照度が5千ルクス未満の場合より明るくなるように、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を用いて画像情報V1を表示する。 In addition, when displaying the image information V1 using the 2nd display element 550 (i, j), the brightness which displays the image information V1 can be determined based on illumination intensity information. For example, when the illuminance is 5,000 lux or more and less than 100,000 lux, the image information V1 is displayed using the second display element 550 (i, j) so that it is brighter than when the illuminance is less than 5,000 lux.
《第3の表示方法》
具体的には、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を表示に用いる方法を、第3の表示方法に用いることができる。これにより、消費電力を低減することができる。または、暗い環境下で画像を良好に表示することができる。または、良好な色再現性で写真等を表示することができる。または、動きの速い動画を滑らかに表示することができる。または、使用者が快適に感じる表示をすることができる。
<< Third display method >>
Specifically, a method in which the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) are used for display can be used in the third display method. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, an image can be favorably displayed in a dark environment. Alternatively, a photograph or the like can be displayed with good color reproducibility. Alternatively, a fast moving video can be displayed smoothly. Or the display which a user feels comfortable can be performed.
ところで、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を表示に用いて、表示の明るさを調節する機能を、調光機能ということができる。例えば、反射型の表示素子の明るさを、光を射出する機能を備える表示素子を用いて補うことができる。 By the way, a function of adjusting display brightness by using the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) for display can be referred to as a dimming function. For example, the brightness of a reflective display element can be supplemented by using a display element having a function of emitting light.
また、第1の表示素子750(i,j)および第2の表示素子550(i,j)を表示に用いて、表示の色味を調節する機能を、調色機能ということができる。例えば、反射型の表示素子の色合いを、光を射出する機能を備える表示素子を用いて変えることができる。具体的には、反射型の液晶素子が表示する黄味を帯びた色合いを、青色の有機EL素子を用いて白色に近づけることができる。これにより、例えば、文字情報を普通紙に印刷された文字のように表示することができる。または、目にやさしい表示をすることができる。 In addition, a function of adjusting the display color by using the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) for display can be referred to as a toning function. For example, the color of the reflective display element can be changed using a display element having a function of emitting light. Specifically, the yellowish hue displayed by the reflective liquid crystal element can be made closer to white using a blue organic EL element. Thereby, for example, the character information can be displayed like characters printed on plain paper. Alternatively, a display that is easy on the eyes can be displayed.
また、第1の表示素子750(i,j)と第2の表示素子550(i,j)とを表示に用いると、物体が反射する色と物体が発光する色とが掛け合わされる。これにより、絵画的な表示をすることができる。 In addition, when the first display element 750 (i, j) and the second display element 550 (i, j) are used for display, the color reflected by the object and the color emitted by the object are multiplied. Thereby, a pictorial display can be performed.
なお、第1の表示素子750(i,j)を用いて表示する画像情報V1に重ねて表示する、第2の表示素子550(i,j)を用いて表示する画像情報V1の明るさを、照度情報および使用者の好みに応じて決定することができる。これにより、使用者が快適に感じる表示をすることができる。 Note that the brightness of the image information V1 displayed using the second display element 550 (i, j), which is displayed by being superimposed on the image information V1 displayed using the first display element 750 (i, j), is set. It can be determined according to illuminance information and user preference. Thereby, the display which a user feels comfortable can be performed.
[第4のステップ]
第4のステップにおいて、終了命令が供給された場合は第5のステップに進み、終了命令が供給されなかった場合は第3のステップに進むように選択する(図24(A)(S4)参照)。
[Fourth step]
In the fourth step, if the end command is supplied, the process proceeds to the fifth step, and if the end command is not supplied, the process proceeds to the third step (see FIGS. 24A and S4). ).
例えば、割り込み処理において供給された終了命令を判断に用いてもよい。 For example, an end command supplied in the interrupt process may be used for determination.
[第5のステップ]
第5のステップにおいて、終了する(図24(A)(S5)参照)。
[Fifth step]
In the fifth step, the process ends (see FIGS. 24A and S5).
《割り込み処理》
割り込み処理は以下の第6のステップ乃至第8のステップを備える(図24(B)参照)。
<Interrupt processing>
The interrupt process includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 24B).
[第6のステップ]
第6のステップにおいて、例えば、検知部250を用いて、情報処理装置200が使用される環境の照度を検出する(図24(B)(S6)参照)。なお、環境の照度に代えて環境光の色温度や色度を検出してもよい。
[Sixth Step]
In the sixth step, for example, the detection unit 250 is used to detect the illuminance of the environment in which the information processing apparatus 200 is used (see FIGS. 24B and S6). Note that the color temperature or chromaticity of the ambient light may be detected instead of the illuminance of the environment.
[第7のステップ]
第7のステップにおいて、検出した照度情報に基づいて表示方法を決定する。例えば、照度が所定の値以上の場合に、第1の表示方法に決定し、照度が所定の値未満の場合、第2の表示方法に決定する。または、照度が所定の範囲の場合、第3の表示方法に決定してもよい(図24(B)(S7)参照)。
[Seventh Step]
In the seventh step, a display method is determined based on the detected illuminance information. For example, when the illuminance is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the first display method is determined, and when the illuminance is lower than the predetermined value, the second display method is determined. Alternatively, when the illuminance is in a predetermined range, the third display method may be determined (see FIGS. 24B and S7).
具体的には、照度が10万ルクス以上の場合、第1の表示方法に決定し、照度が5千ルクス未満の場合、第2の表示方法に決定し、照度が10万ルクス未満5千ルクス以上の場合、第3の表示方法に決定してもよい。 Specifically, when the illuminance is 100,000 lux or more, the first display method is determined. When the illuminance is less than 5,000 lux, the second display method is determined, and the illuminance is less than 100,000 lux. In the above case, the third display method may be determined.
なお、第6のステップにおいて環境光の色温度や環境光の色度を検出した場合は、第3の表示方法において第2の表示素子550(i,j)を用いて、表示の色味を調節してもよい。 When the color temperature of ambient light or the chromaticity of ambient light is detected in the sixth step, the display color is adjusted using the second display element 550 (i, j) in the third display method. You may adjust.
また、例えば、第1の表示方法を用いる場合は、第1のステータスの制御情報SSを供給し、第2の表示方法を用いる場合は、第2のステータスの制御情報SSを供給し、第3の表示方法を用いる場合は、第3のステータスの制御情報SSを供給する。 Further, for example, when the first display method is used, the first status control information SS is supplied, and when the second display method is used, the second status control information SS is supplied, and the third status control information SS is supplied. When the display method is used, the control information SS of the third status is supplied.
[第8のステップ]
第8のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を終了する(図24(B)(S8)参照)。
[Eighth step]
In the eighth step, the interrupt process is terminated (see FIGS. 24B and S8).
<情報処理装置の構成例2.>
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の別の構成について、図25を参照しながら説明する。
<Configuration example 2 of information processing apparatus>>
Another structure of the information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIG.
図25は、本発明の一態様のプログラムを説明するフローチャートである。図25は、図24(B)に示す割り込み処理とは異なる割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。 FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a program of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 25 is a flowchart for explaining interrupt processing different from the interrupt processing shown in FIG.
なお、情報処理装置の構成例2は、供給された所定のイベントに基づいて、モードを変更するステップを割り込み処理に有する点が、図24(B)を参照しながら説明する割り込み処理とは異なる。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 The configuration example 2 of the information processing device is different from the interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 24B in that the interrupt processing includes a step of changing the mode based on the supplied predetermined event. . Here, different portions will be described in detail, and the above description will be applied to portions that can use the same configuration.
《割り込み処理》
割り込み処理は以下の第6のステップ乃至第8のステップを備える(図25参照)。
<Interrupt processing>
The interrupt process includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 25).
[第6のステップ]
第6のステップにおいて、所定のイベントが供給された場合は、第7のステップに進み、所定のイベントが供給されなかった場合は、第8のステップに進む(図25(U6)参照)。例えば、所定の期間に所定のイベントが供給されたか否かを条件に用いることができる。具体的には、5秒以下、1秒以下または0.5秒以下好ましくは0.1秒以下であって0秒より長い期間を所定の期間とすることができる。
[Sixth Step]
In the sixth step, when a predetermined event is supplied, the process proceeds to a seventh step, and when the predetermined event is not supplied, the process proceeds to an eighth step (see FIG. 25 (U6)). For example, it can be used as a condition whether or not a predetermined event is supplied during a predetermined period. Specifically, the predetermined period can be a period of 5 seconds or less, 1 second or less, or 0.5 seconds or less, preferably 0.1 seconds or less and longer than 0 seconds.
[第7のステップ]
第7のステップにおいて、モードを変更する(図25(U7)参照)。具体的には、第1のモードを選択していた場合は、第2のモードを選択し、第2のモードを選択していた場合は、第1のモードを選択する。
[Seventh Step]
In the seventh step, the mode is changed (see FIG. 25 (U7)). Specifically, when the first mode is selected, the second mode is selected, and when the second mode is selected, the first mode is selected.
[第8のステップ]
第8のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を終了する(図25(U8)参照)。なお、主の処理を実行している期間に割り込み処理を繰り返し実行してもよい。
[Eighth step]
In the eighth step, the interrupt process is terminated (see FIG. 25 (U8)). Note that interrupt processing may be repeatedly executed during a period in which main processing is being executed.
《所定のイベント》
例えば、マウス等のポインティング装置を用いて供給する、「クリック」や「ドラッグ」等のイベント、指等をポインタに用いてタッチパネルに供給する、「タップ」、「ドラッグ」または「スワイプ」等のイベントを用いることができる。
《Predetermined event》
For example, an event such as “click” or “drag” supplied using a pointing device such as a mouse, an event such as “tap”, “drag” or “swipe” supplied to a touch panel using a finger or the like as a pointer Can be used.
また、例えば、ポインタが指し示すスライドバーの位置、スワイプの速度、ドラッグの速度等を用いて、所定のイベントに関連付けられた命令の引数を与えることができる。 Further, for example, an argument of a command associated with a predetermined event can be given using the position of the slide bar pointed to by the pointer, the swipe speed, the drag speed, or the like.
例えば、検知部250が検知した情報をあらかじめ設定された閾値と比較して、比較結果をイベントに用いることができる。 For example, the information detected by the detection unit 250 can be compared with a preset threshold value, and the comparison result can be used as an event.
具体的には、筐体に押し込むことができるように配設されたボタン等に接する感圧検知器等を検知部250に用いることができる。 Specifically, a pressure-sensitive detector or the like that contacts a button or the like that can be pushed into the housing can be used for the detection unit 250.
《所定のイベントに関連付ける命令》
例えば、終了命令を、特定のイベントに関連付けることができる。
《Instructions related to predetermined events》
For example, an end instruction can be associated with a particular event.
例えば、表示されている一の画像情報から他の画像情報に表示を切り替える「ページめくり命令」を、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。なお、「ページめくり命令」を実行する際に用いるページをめくる速度などを決定する引数を、所定のイベントを用いて与えることができる。 For example, a “page turning command” for switching display from one displayed image information to another image information can be associated with a predetermined event. Note that an argument that determines a page turning speed used when executing the “page turning instruction” can be given using a predetermined event.
例えば、一の画像情報の表示されている一部分の表示位置を移動して、一部分に連続する他の部分を表示する「スクロール命令」などを、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。なお、「スクロール命令」を実行する際に用いる表示位置を移動する速度などを決定する引数を、所定のイベントを用いて与えることができる。 For example, a “scroll command” for moving the display position of a part of one image information displayed to display another part continuous to the part can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument that determines the speed of moving the display position used when executing the “scroll command” can be given using a predetermined event.
例えば、表示方法を設定する命令または画像情報を生成する命令などを、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。なお、生成する画像の明るさを決定する引数を所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。また、生成する画像の明るさを決定する引数を、検知部250が検知する環境の明るさに基づいて決定してもよい。 For example, a command for setting a display method or a command for generating image information can be associated with a predetermined event. An argument that determines the brightness of the image to be generated can be associated with a predetermined event. Further, an argument for determining the brightness of the image to be generated may be determined based on the brightness of the environment detected by the detection unit 250.
例えば、プッシュ型のサービスを用いて配信される情報を、通信部290を用いて取得する命令などを、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。 For example, a command for acquiring information distributed using a push-type service using the communication unit 290 can be associated with a predetermined event.
なお、情報を取得する資格の有無を、検知部250が検知する位置情報を用いて判断してもよい。具体的には、ユーザーが特定の教室、学校、会議室、企業、建物等の内部または領域にいる場合に、情報を取得する資格を有すると判断してもよい。これにより、例えば、学校または大学等の教室で配信される教材を受信して、情報処理装置200を教科書等に用いることができる(図23(C)参照)。または、企業等の会議室で配信される資料を受信して、会議資料に用いることができる。 In addition, you may determine the presence or absence of the qualification to acquire information using the positional information which the detection part 250 detects. Specifically, when a user is inside or in a specific classroom, school, conference room, company, building, etc., it may be determined that he / she is qualified to acquire information. Thus, for example, the teaching material distributed in a classroom such as a school or a university can be received and the information processing apparatus 200 can be used as a textbook (see FIG. 23C). Alternatively, a material distributed in a conference room of a company or the like can be received and used as a conference material.
なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 Note that this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments described in this specification as appropriate.
(実施の形態5)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置を有する電子機器について、図26を用いて説明を行う。
(Embodiment 5)
In this embodiment, an electronic device including the information processing device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
図26(A)乃至図26(G)は、電子機器を示す図である。これらの電子機器は、筐体5000、表示部5001、スピーカ5003、LEDランプ5004、操作キー5005(電源スイッチ、又は操作スイッチを含む)、接続端子5006、センサ5007(力、変位、位置、速度、加速度、角速度、回転数、距離、光、液、磁気、温度、化学物質、音声、時間、硬度、電場、電流、電圧、電力、放射線、流量、湿度、傾度、振動、におい又は赤外線を測定する機能を含むもの)、マイクロフォン5008、等を有することができる。 FIGS. 26A to 26G illustrate electronic devices. These electronic devices include a housing 5000, a display portion 5001, a speaker 5003, an LED lamp 5004, operation keys 5005 (including a power switch or operation switch), a connection terminal 5006, a sensor 5007 (force, displacement, position, speed, Measure acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell or infrared A microphone 5008, and the like.
図26(A)はモバイルコンピュータであり、上述したものの他に、スイッチ5009、赤外線ポート5010、等を有することができる。図26(B)は記録媒体を備えた携帯型の画像再生装置(たとえば、DVD再生装置)であり、上述したものの他に、第2表示部5002、記録媒体読込部5011、等を有することができる。図26(C)はゴーグル型ディスプレイであり、上述したものの他に、第2表示部5002、支持部5012、イヤホン5013、等を有することができる。図26(D)は携帯型遊技機であり、上述したものの他に、記録媒体読込部5011、等を有することができる。図26(E)はテレビ受像機能付きデジタルカメラであり、上述したものの他に、アンテナ5014、シャッターボタン5015、受像部5016、等を有することができる。図26(F)は携帯型遊技機であり、上述したものの他に、第2表示部5002、記録媒体読込部5011、等を有することができる。図26(G)は持ち運び型テレビ受像器であり、上述したものの他に、信号の送受信が可能な充電器5017、等を有することができる。 FIG. 26A illustrates a mobile computer which can include a switch 5009, an infrared port 5010, and the like in addition to the above components. FIG. 26B illustrates a portable image reproducing device (eg, a DVD reproducing device) provided with a recording medium, which includes a second display portion 5002, a recording medium reading portion 5011, and the like in addition to the above components. it can. FIG. 26C illustrates a goggle type display which can include a second display portion 5002, a support portion 5012, an earphone 5013, and the like in addition to the above components. FIG. 26D illustrates a portable game machine that can include the memory medium reading portion 5011 and the like in addition to the above objects. FIG. 26E illustrates a digital camera with a television receiving function, which can include an antenna 5014, a shutter button 5015, an image receiving portion 5016, and the like in addition to the above objects. FIG. 26F illustrates a portable game machine that can include the second display portion 5002, the recording medium reading portion 5011, and the like in addition to the above objects. FIG. 26G illustrates a portable television receiver that can include a charger 5017 and the like capable of transmitting and receiving signals in addition to the above components.
図26(A)乃至図26(G)に示す電子機器は、様々な機能を有することができる。例えば、様々な情報(静止画、動画、テキスト画像など)を表示部に表示する機能、タッチパネル機能、カレンダー、日付又は時刻などを表示する機能、様々なソフトウエア(プログラム)によって処理を制御する機能、無線通信機能、無線通信機能を用いて様々なコンピュータネットワークに接続する機能、無線通信機能を用いて様々なデータの送信又は受信を行う機能、記録媒体に記録されているプログラム又はデータを読み出して表示部に表示する機能、等を有することができる。さらに、複数の表示部を有する電子機器においては、一つの表示部を主として画像情報を表示し、別の一つの表示部を主として文字情報を表示する機能、または、複数の表示部に視差を考慮した画像を表示することで立体的な画像を表示する機能、等を有することができる。さらに、受像部を有する電子機器においては、静止画を撮影する機能、動画を撮影する機能、撮影した画像を自動または手動で補正する機能、撮影した画像を記録媒体(外部又はカメラに内蔵)に保存する機能、撮影した画像を表示部に表示する機能、等を有することができる。なお、図26(A)乃至図26(G)に示す電子機器が有することのできる機能はこれらに限定されず、様々な機能を有することができる。 The electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 26A to 26G can have a variety of functions. For example, a function for displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function for displaying a calendar, date or time, etc., a function for controlling processing by various software (programs) , Wireless communication function, function to connect to various computer networks using wireless communication function, function to transmit or receive various data using wireless communication function, read program or data recorded in recording medium A function of displaying on the display portion can be provided. Further, in an electronic device having a plurality of display units, one display unit mainly displays image information and another one display unit mainly displays character information, or the plurality of display units consider parallax. It is possible to have a function of displaying a three-dimensional image, etc. by displaying the obtained image. Furthermore, in an electronic device having an image receiving unit, a function for capturing a still image, a function for capturing a moving image, a function for correcting a captured image automatically or manually, and a captured image on a recording medium (externally or incorporated in a camera) A function of saving, a function of displaying a photographed image on a display portion, and the like can be provided. Note that the functions of the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 26A to 26G are not limited to these, and can have various functions.
図26(H)は、スマートウオッチであり、筐体7302、表示パネル7304、操作ボタン7311、7312、接続端子7313、バンド7321、留め金7322、等を有する。 FIG. 26H illustrates a smart watch, which includes a housing 7302, a display panel 7304, operation buttons 7311 and 7312, a connection terminal 7313, a band 7321, a clasp 7322, and the like.
ベゼル部分を兼ねる筐体7302に搭載された表示パネル7304は、非矩形状の表示領域を有している。なお、表示パネル7304としては、矩形状の表示領域としてもよい。表示パネル7304は、時刻を表すアイコン7305、その他のアイコン7306等を表示することができる。 A display panel 7304 mounted on a housing 7302 also serving as a bezel portion has a non-rectangular display region. Note that the display panel 7304 may have a rectangular display region. The display panel 7304 can display an icon 7305 indicating time, another icon 7306, and the like.
なお、図26(H)に示すスマートウオッチは、様々な機能を有することができる。例えば、様々な情報(静止画、動画、テキスト画像など)を表示部に表示する機能、タッチパネル機能、カレンダー、日付又は時刻などを表示する機能、様々なソフトウエア(プログラム)によって処理を制御する機能、無線通信機能、無線通信機能を用いて様々なコンピュータネットワークに接続する機能、無線通信機能を用いて様々なデータの送信又は受信を行う機能、記録媒体に記録されているプログラム又はデータを読み出して表示部に表示する機能、等を有することができる。 Note that the smart watch illustrated in FIG. 26H can have a variety of functions. For example, a function for displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function for displaying a calendar, date or time, etc., a function for controlling processing by various software (programs) , Wireless communication function, function to connect to various computer networks using wireless communication function, function to transmit or receive various data using wireless communication function, read program or data recorded in recording medium A function of displaying on the display portion can be provided.
また、筐体7302の内部に、スピーカ、センサ(力、変位、位置、速度、加速度、角速度、回転数、距離、光、液、磁気、温度、化学物質、音声、時間、硬度、電場、電流、電圧、電力、放射線、流量、湿度、傾度、振動、におい又は赤外線を測定する機能を含むもの)、マイクロフォン等を有することができる。なお、スマートウオッチは、発光素子をその表示パネル7304に用いることにより作製することができる。 In addition, a speaker, a sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current are included in the housing 7302. , Voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared measurement function), microphone, and the like. Note that a smart watch can be manufactured by using a light-emitting element for the display panel 7304.
なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 Note that this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments described in this specification as appropriate.
(実施の形態6)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の入出力モジュールの構成について、図29を参照しながら説明する。
(Embodiment 6)
In this embodiment, the structure of the input / output module of one embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS.
図29は入出力モジュールの構成を説明する図である。図29(A)は本発明の一態様の入出力モジュールの構成を説明する分解立体図であり、図29(B)は本発明の一態様の入出力モジュールの構成を説明する断面図である。 FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the input / output module. FIG. 29A is an exploded view illustrating the structure of the input / output module of one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 29B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of the input / output module of one embodiment of the present invention. .
表示モジュール6000は、上部カバー6001と下部カバー6002との間に、FPC6005に接続された表示パネル6006、フレーム6009、プリント基板6010、及びバッテリ6011を有する(図29(A)参照)。 The display module 6000 includes a display panel 6006, a frame 6009, a printed board 6010, and a battery 6011 which are connected to the FPC 6005 between the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 (see FIG. 29A).
例えば、本発明の一態様を用いて作製された表示装置を、表示パネル6006に用いることができる。これにより、高い歩留まりで表示モジュールを作製することができる。 For example, a display device manufactured using one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display panel 6006. Thereby, a display module can be manufactured with a high yield.
上部カバー6001及び下部カバー6002は、表示パネル6006のサイズに合わせて、形状や寸法を適宜変更することができる。 The shapes and dimensions of the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 6006.
また、表示パネル6006に重ねてタッチパネルを設けてもよい。タッチパネルとしては、抵抗膜方式または静電容量方式のタッチパネルを表示パネル6006に重畳して用いることができる。また、タッチパネルを設けず、表示パネル6006に、タッチパネル機能を持たせるようにすることも可能である。 Further, a touch panel may be provided over the display panel 6006. As the touch panel, a resistive film type or capacitive type touch panel can be used by being superimposed on the display panel 6006. Further, without providing a touch panel, the display panel 6006 can have a touch panel function.
フレーム6009は、表示パネル6006の保護機能の他、プリント基板6010の動作により発生する電磁波を遮断するための電磁シールドとしての機能を有する。またフレーム6009は、放熱板としての機能を有していてもよい。 The frame 6009 has a function as an electromagnetic shield for blocking electromagnetic waves generated by the operation of the printed board 6010 in addition to a protective function of the display panel 6006. The frame 6009 may function as a heat sink.
プリント基板6010は、電源回路、ビデオ信号及びクロック信号を出力するための信号処理回路を有する。電源回路に電力を供給する電源としては、外部の商用電源であっても良いし、別途設けたバッテリ6011による電源であってもよい。バッテリ6011は、商用電源を用いる場合には、省略可能である。 The printed board 6010 includes a power supply circuit, a signal processing circuit for outputting a video signal and a clock signal. The power source for supplying power to the power supply circuit may be an external commercial power source or a power source by a battery 6011 provided separately. The battery 6011 can be omitted when a commercial power source is used.
また、表示モジュール6000は、偏光板、位相差板、プリズムシートなどの部材を追加して設けてもよい。 The display module 6000 may be additionally provided with a member such as a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet.
図29(B)は、光学式のタッチセンサを備える表示モジュール6000の断面概略図である。 FIG. 29B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a display module 6000 including an optical touch sensor.
表示モジュール6000は、プリント基板6010に設けられた発光部6015及び受光部6016を有する。また、上部カバー6001と下部カバー6002により囲まれた領域に一対の導光部(導光部6017a、導光部6017b)を有する。 The display module 6000 includes a light emitting unit 6015 and a light receiving unit 6016 provided on the printed board 6010. Further, a region surrounded by the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 has a pair of light guide portions (light guide portion 6017a and light guide portion 6017b).
上部カバー6001と下部カバー6002は、例えばプラスチック等を用いることができる。また、上部カバー6001と下部カバー6002とは、それぞれ薄く(例えば0.5mm以上5mm以下)することが可能である。そのため、表示モジュール6000を極めて軽量にすることが可能となる。また少ない材料で上部カバー6001と下部カバー6002を作製できるため、作製コストを低減できる。 For the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002, for example, plastic can be used. Further, the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 can each be thin (for example, 0.5 mm to 5 mm). Therefore, the display module 6000 can be made extremely light. Further, since the upper cover 6001 and the lower cover 6002 can be manufactured with a small amount of material, manufacturing cost can be reduced.
表示パネル6006は、フレーム6009を間に介してプリント基板6010やバッテリ6011と重ねて設けられている。表示パネル6006とフレーム6009は、導光部6017a、導光部6017bに固定されている。 The display panel 6006 is provided so as to overlap the printed circuit board 6010 and the battery 6011 with a frame 6009 interposed therebetween. The display panel 6006 and the frame 6009 are fixed to the light guide unit 6017a and the light guide unit 6017b.
発光部6015から発せられた光6018は、導光部6017aにより表示パネル6006の上部を経由し、導光部6017bを通って受光部6016に達する。例えば指やスタイラスなどの被検知体により、光6018が遮られることにより、タッチ操作を検出することができる。 Light 6018 emitted from the light emitting unit 6015 passes through the upper part of the display panel 6006 by the light guide unit 6017a and reaches the light receiving unit 6016 through the light guide unit 6017b. For example, the touch operation can be detected by blocking the light 6018 by a detection target such as a finger or a stylus.
発光部6015は、例えば表示パネル6006の隣接する2辺に沿って複数設けられる。受光部6016は、発光部6015と表示パネル6006を挟んで対向する位置に複数設けられる。これにより、タッチ操作がなされた位置の情報を取得することができる。 For example, a plurality of light emitting units 6015 are provided along two adjacent sides of the display panel 6006. A plurality of light receiving portions 6016 are provided at positions facing the light emitting portion 6015 with the display panel 6006 interposed therebetween. Thereby, the information on the position where the touch operation is performed can be acquired.
発光部6015は、例えばLED素子などの光源を用いることができる。特に、発光部6015として、使用者に視認されず、且つ使用者にとって無害である赤外線を発する光源を用いることが好ましい。 For the light emitting unit 6015, for example, a light source such as an LED element can be used. In particular, it is preferable to use a light source that emits infrared rays that are not visually recognized by the user and harmless to the user as the light emitting unit 6015.
受光部6016は、発光部6015が発する光を受光し、電気信号に変換する光電素子を用いることができる。好適には、赤外線を受光可能なフォトダイオードを用いることができる。 The light receiving unit 6016 can be a photoelectric element that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit 6015 and converts the light into an electrical signal. Preferably, a photodiode capable of receiving infrared light can be used.
導光部6017a、導光部6017bとしては、少なくとも光6018を透過する部材を用いることができる。導光部6017a及び導光部6017bを用いることで、発光部6015と受光部6016とを表示パネル6006の下側に配置することができ、外光が受光部6016に到達してタッチセンサが誤動作することを抑制できる。特に、可視光を吸収し、赤外線を透過する樹脂を用いることが好ましい。これにより、タッチセンサの誤動作をより効果的に抑制できる。 As the light guide portion 6017a and the light guide portion 6017b, a member that transmits at least the light 6018 can be used. By using the light guide unit 6017a and the light guide unit 6017b, the light emitting unit 6015 and the light receiving unit 6016 can be arranged below the display panel 6006, and external light reaches the light receiving unit 6016 and the touch sensor malfunctions. Can be suppressed. In particular, it is preferable to use a resin that absorbs visible light and transmits infrared rays. Thereby, malfunction of a touch sensor can be controlled more effectively.
なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 Note that this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments described in this specification as appropriate.
例えば、本明細書等において、XとYとが接続されている、と明示的に記載されている場合は、XとYとが電気的に接続されている場合と、XとYとが機能的に接続されている場合と、XとYとが直接接続されている場合とが、本明細書等に開示されているものとする。したがって、所定の接続関係、例えば、図または文章に示された接続関係に限定されず、図または文章に示された接続関係以外のものも、図または文章に記載されているものとする。 For example, in this specification and the like, when X and Y are explicitly described as being connected, X and Y are electrically connected, and X and Y are functional. And the case where X and Y are directly connected are disclosed in this specification and the like. Therefore, it is not limited to a predetermined connection relationship, for example, the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, and anything other than the connection relation shown in the figure or text is also described in the figure or text.
ここで、X、Yは、対象物(例えば、装置、素子、回路、配線、電極、端子、導電膜、層、など)であるとする。 Here, X and Y are assumed to be objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.).
XとYとが直接的に接続されている場合の一例としては、XとYとの電気的な接続を可能とする素子(例えば、スイッチ、トランジスタ、容量素子、インダクタ、抵抗素子、ダイオード、表示素子、発光素子、負荷など)が、XとYとの間に接続されていない場合であり、XとYとの電気的な接続を可能とする素子(例えば、スイッチ、トランジスタ、容量素子、インダクタ、抵抗素子、ダイオード、表示素子、発光素子、負荷など)を介さずに、XとYとが、接続されている場合である。 As an example of the case where X and Y are directly connected, an element that enables electrical connection between X and Y (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, a diode, a display, etc.) Element, light emitting element, load, etc.) are not connected between X and Y, and elements (for example, switches, transistors, capacitive elements, inductors) that enable electrical connection between X and Y X and Y are not connected via a resistor element, a diode, a display element, a light emitting element, a load, or the like.
XとYとが電気的に接続されている場合の一例としては、XとYとの電気的な接続を可能とする素子(例えば、スイッチ、トランジスタ、容量素子、インダクタ、抵抗素子、ダイオード、表示素子、発光素子、負荷など)が、XとYとの間に1個以上接続されることが可能である。なお、スイッチは、オンオフが制御される機能を有している。つまり、スイッチは、導通状態(オン状態)、または、非導通状態(オフ状態)になり、電流を流すか流さないかを制御する機能を有している。または、スイッチは、電流を流す経路を選択して切り替える機能を有している。なお、XとYとが電気的に接続されている場合は、XとYとが直接的に接続されている場合を含むものとする。 As an example of the case where X and Y are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitive element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, a display, etc.) that enables electrical connection between X and Y is shown. More than one element, light emitting element, load, etc.) can be connected between X and Y. Note that the switch has a function of controlling on / off. That is, the switch is in a conductive state (on state) or a non-conductive state (off state), and has a function of controlling whether or not to pass a current. Alternatively, the switch has a function of selecting and switching a path through which a current flows. Note that the case where X and Y are electrically connected includes the case where X and Y are directly connected.
XとYとが機能的に接続されている場合の一例としては、XとYとの機能的な接続を可能とする回路(例えば、論理回路(インバータ、NAND回路、NOR回路など)、信号変換回路(DA変換回路、AD変換回路、ガンマ補正回路など)、電位レベル変換回路(電源回路(昇圧回路、降圧回路など)、信号の電位レベルを変えるレベルシフタ回路など)、電圧源、電流源、切り替え回路、増幅回路(信号振幅または電流量などを大きく出来る回路、オペアンプ、差動増幅回路、ソースフォロワ回路、バッファ回路など)、信号生成回路、記憶回路、制御回路など)が、XとYとの間に1個以上接続されることが可能である。なお、一例として、XとYとの間に別の回路を挟んでいても、Xから出力された信号がYへ伝達される場合は、XとYとは機能的に接続されているものとする。なお、XとYとが機能的に接続されている場合は、XとYとが直接的に接続されている場合と、XとYとが電気的に接続されている場合とを含むものとする。 As an example of the case where X and Y are functionally connected, a circuit (for example, a logic circuit (an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, etc.) that enables a functional connection between X and Y, signal conversion, etc. Circuit (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes signal potential level, etc.), voltage source, current source, switching Circuit, amplifier circuit (circuit that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifier, differential amplifier circuit, source follower circuit, buffer circuit, etc.), signal generation circuit, memory circuit, control circuit, etc.) One or more can be connected between them. As an example, even if another circuit is interposed between X and Y, if the signal output from X is transmitted to Y, X and Y are functionally connected. To do. Note that the case where X and Y are functionally connected includes the case where X and Y are directly connected and the case where X and Y are electrically connected.
なお、XとYとが電気的に接続されている、と明示的に記載されている場合は、XとYとが電気的に接続されている場合(つまり、XとYとの間に別の素子又は別の回路を挟んで接続されている場合)と、XとYとが機能的に接続されている場合(つまり、XとYとの間に別の回路を挟んで機能的に接続されている場合)と、XとYとが直接接続されている場合(つまり、XとYとの間に別の素子又は別の回路を挟まずに接続されている場合)とが、本明細書等に開示されているものとする。つまり、電気的に接続されている、と明示的に記載されている場合は、単に、接続されている、とのみ明示的に記載されている場合と同様な内容が、本明細書等に開示されているものとする。 In addition, when it is explicitly described that X and Y are electrically connected, a case where X and Y are electrically connected (that is, there is a separate connection between X and Y). And X and Y are functionally connected (that is, they are functionally connected with another circuit between X and Y). And the case where X and Y are directly connected (that is, the case where another element or another circuit is not connected between X and Y). It shall be disclosed in the document. In other words, when it is explicitly described that it is electrically connected, the same contents as when it is explicitly described only that it is connected are disclosed in this specification and the like. It is assumed that
なお、例えば、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)が、Z1を介して(又は介さず)、Xと電気的に接続され、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)が、Z2を介して(又は介さず)、Yと電気的に接続されている場合や、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)が、Z1の一部と直接的に接続され、Z1の別の一部がXと直接的に接続され、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)が、Z2の一部と直接的に接続され、Z2の別の一部がYと直接的に接続されている場合では、以下のように表現することが出来る。 Note that for example, the source (or the first terminal) of the transistor is electrically connected to X through (or not through) Z1, and the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor is connected to Z2. Through (or without), Y is electrically connected, or the source (or the first terminal, etc.) of the transistor is directly connected to a part of Z1, and another part of Z1 Is directly connected to X, and the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is directly connected to a part of Z2, and another part of Z2 is directly connected to Y. Then, it can be expressed as follows.
例えば、「XとYとトランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)とドレイン(又は第2の端子など)とは、互いに電気的に接続されており、X、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)、Yの順序で電気的に接続されている。」と表現することができる。または、「トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)は、Xと電気的に接続され、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)はYと電気的に接続され、X、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)、Yは、この順序で電気的に接続されている」と表現することができる。または、「Xは、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)とドレイン(又は第2の端子など)とを介して、Yと電気的に接続され、X、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)、Yは、この接続順序で設けられている」と表現することができる。これらの例と同様な表現方法を用いて、回路構成における接続の順序について規定することにより、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)と、ドレイン(又は第2の端子など)とを、区別して、技術的範囲を決定することができる。 For example, “X and Y, and the source (or the first terminal or the like) and the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor are electrically connected to each other. The drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) and the Y are electrically connected in this order. ” Or “the source (or the first terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to X, the drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y, and X or the source ( Or the first terminal or the like, the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, or the like) and Y are electrically connected in this order. Or “X is electrically connected to Y through the source (or the first terminal) and the drain (or the second terminal) of the transistor, and X is the source of the transistor (or the first terminal). Terminal, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are provided in this connection order. By using the same expression method as in these examples and defining the order of connection in the circuit configuration, the source (or the first terminal, etc.) and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor are separated. Apart from that, the technical scope can be determined.
または、別の表現方法として、例えば、「トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)は、少なくとも第1の接続経路を介して、Xと電気的に接続され、前記第1の接続経路は、第2の接続経路を有しておらず、前記第2の接続経路は、トランジスタを介した、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)とトランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)との間の経路であり、前記第1の接続経路は、Z1を介した経路であり、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)は、少なくとも第3の接続経路を介して、Yと電気的に接続され、前記第3の接続経路は、前記第2の接続経路を有しておらず、前記第3の接続経路は、Z2を介した経路である。」と表現することができる。または、「トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)は、少なくとも第1の接続経路によって、Z1を介して、Xと電気的に接続され、前記第1の接続経路は、第2の接続経路を有しておらず、前記第2の接続経路は、トランジスタを介した接続経路を有し、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)は、少なくとも第3の接続経路によって、Z2を介して、Yと電気的に接続され、前記第3の接続経路は、前記第2の接続経路を有していない。」と表現することができる。または、「トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)は、少なくとも第1の電気的パスによって、Z1を介して、Xと電気的に接続され、前記第1の電気的パスは、第2の電気的パスを有しておらず、前記第2の電気的パスは、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)からトランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)への電気的パスであり、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)は、少なくとも第3の電気的パスによって、Z2を介して、Yと電気的に接続され、前記第3の電気的パスは、第4の電気的パスを有しておらず、前記第4の電気的パスは、トランジスタのドレイン(又は第2の端子など)からトランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)への電気的パスである。」と表現することができる。これらの例と同様な表現方法を用いて、回路構成における接続経路について規定することにより、トランジスタのソース(又は第1の端子など)と、ドレイン(又は第2の端子など)とを、区別して、技術的範囲を決定することができる。 Alternatively, as another expression method, for example, “a source (or a first terminal or the like of a transistor) is electrically connected to X through at least a first connection path, and the first connection path is The second connection path does not have a second connection path, and the second connection path includes a transistor source (or first terminal or the like) and a transistor drain (or second terminal or the like) through the transistor. The first connection path is a path through Z1, and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y through at least the third connection path. The third connection path is connected and does not have the second connection path, and the third connection path is a path through Z2. " Or, “the source (or the first terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to X via Z1 by at least a first connection path, and the first connection path is a second connection path. The second connection path has a connection path through the transistor, and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is at least connected to Z2 by the third connection path. , Y, and the third connection path does not have the second connection path. Or “the source of the transistor (or the first terminal or the like) is electrically connected to X through Z1 by at least a first electrical path, and the first electrical path is a second electrical path Does not have an electrical path, and the second electrical path is an electrical path from the source (or first terminal or the like) of the transistor to the drain (or second terminal or the like) of the transistor; The drain (or the second terminal or the like) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y through Z2 by at least a third electrical path, and the third electrical path is a fourth electrical path. The fourth electrical path is an electrical path from the drain (or second terminal or the like) of the transistor to the source (or first terminal or the like) of the transistor. can do. Using the same expression method as those examples, by defining the connection path in the circuit configuration, the source (or the first terminal or the like) of the transistor and the drain (or the second terminal or the like) are distinguished. The technical scope can be determined.
なお、これらの表現方法は、一例であり、これらの表現方法に限定されない。ここで、X、Y、Z1、Z2は、対象物(例えば、装置、素子、回路、配線、電極、端子、導電膜、層、など)であるとする。 In addition, these expression methods are examples, and are not limited to these expression methods. Here, it is assumed that X, Y, Z1, and Z2 are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, and the like).
なお、回路図上は独立している構成要素同士が電気的に接続しているように図示されている場合であっても、1つの構成要素が、複数の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている場合もある。例えば配線の一部が電極としても機能する場合は、一の導電膜が、配線の機能、及び電極の機能の両方の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている。したがって、本明細書における電気的に接続とは、このような、一の導電膜が、複数の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている場合も、その範疇に含める。 In addition, even when the components shown in the circuit diagram are electrically connected to each other, even when one component has the functions of a plurality of components. There is also. For example, in the case where a part of the wiring also functions as an electrode, one conductive film has both the functions of the constituent elements of the wiring function and the electrode function. Therefore, the term “electrically connected” in this specification includes in its category such a case where one conductive film has functions of a plurality of components.
C(g)  電極
M(h)  電極
CL(g)  制御線
ML(h)  信号線
DC  検知回路
OSC  発振回路
P1  位置情報
BM  遮光膜
SD  駆動回路
GD  駆動回路
GDA  駆動回路
GDB  駆動回路
CP  導電材料
ANO  導電膜
BR(g,h)  導電膜
SS  制御情報
CSCOM  配線
ACF1  導電材料
ACF2  導電材料
AF1  配向膜
AF2  配向膜
C11  容量素子
C12  容量素子
CF1  着色膜
CF2  着色膜
G1(i)  走査線
G2(i)  走査線
KB1  構造体
KB2  構造体
S1  検知情報
S1(j)  信号線
S2(j)  信号線
SD1  駆動回路
SD2  駆動回路
SW1  スイッチ
SW2  スイッチ
V1  画像情報
V11  情報
V12  情報
VCOM1  配線
VCOM2  導電膜
FPC1  フレキシブルプリント基板
FPC2  フレキシブルプリント基板
10  ユニット
20  ユニット
30  入力ユニット
200  情報処理装置
210  演算装置
211  演算部
212  記憶部
214  伝送路
215  入出力インターフェース
220  入出力装置
230  表示部
231  表示領域
234  伸張回路
235M  画像処理回路
235M(1)  領域
235M(2)  領域
238  制御部
240  入力部
241  検知領域
250  検知部
290  通信部
501B  絶縁膜
501C  絶縁膜
504  導電膜
505  接合層
506  絶縁膜
508  半導体膜
508A  領域
508B  領域
508C  領域
511B  導電膜
511C  導電膜
511D  導電膜
512A  導電膜
512B  導電膜
516  絶縁膜
518  絶縁膜
518A  絶縁膜
518B  絶縁膜
519B  端子
519C  端子
519D  端子
520  機能層
521  絶縁膜
521A  絶縁膜
521B  絶縁膜
521C  絶縁膜
522  接続部
524  導電膜
528  絶縁膜
530(i,j)  画素回路
550(i,j)  表示素子
551  電極
552  電極
553(j)  発光性の材料を含む層
560  光学素子
560A  領域
560B  領域
560C  領域
565  被覆膜
565A  金属膜
565B  透光性の膜
570  基板
591A  開口部
591C  開口部
592A  開口部
592B  開口部
592C  開口部
700  表示パネル
700B  表示パネル
700TP2  入出力パネル
700TP3  入出力パネル
702(i,j)  画素
705  封止材
706  絶縁膜
720  機能層
750(i,j)  表示素子
751A  導電膜
751B  反射膜
751C  導電膜
751H  領域
752  電極
753  液晶材料を含む層
770  基板
770D  機能膜
770P  機能膜
771  絶縁膜
775  検知素子
5000  筐体
5001  表示部
5002  表示部
5003  スピーカ
5004  LEDランプ
5005  操作キー
5006  接続端子
5007  センサ
5008  マイクロフォン
5009  スイッチ
5010  赤外線ポート
5011  記録媒体読込部
5012  支持部
5013  イヤホン
5014  アンテナ
5015  シャッターボタン
5016  受像部
5017  充電器
6000  表示モジュール
6001  上部カバー
6002  下部カバー
6005  FPC
6006  表示パネル
6009  フレーム
6010  プリント基板
6011  バッテリ
6015  発光部
6016  受光部
6017a  導光部
6017b  導光部
6018  光
7302  筐体
7304  表示パネル
7305  アイコン
7306  アイコン
7311  操作ボタン
7312  操作ボタン
7313  接続端子
7321  バンド
7322  留め金
C (g) Electrode M (h) Electrode CL (g) Control line ML (h) Signal line DC detection circuit OSC Oscillation circuit P1 Position information BM Light shielding film SD Drive circuit GD Drive circuit GDA Drive circuit GDB Drive circuit CP Conductive material ANO Conductive film BR (g, h) Conductive film SS Control information CSCOM Wiring ACF1 Conductive material ACF2 Conductive material AF1 Alignment film AF2 Alignment film C11 Capacitance element C12 Capacitance element CF1 Colored film CF2 Colored film G1 (i) Scan line G2 (i) Scan Line KB1 structure KB2 structure S1 detection information S1 (j) signal line S2 (j) signal line SD1 drive circuit SD2 drive circuit SW1 switch SW2 switch V1 image information V11 information V12 information VCOM1 wiring VCOM2 conductive film FPC1 flexible printed circuit board FPC2 flexible Pre Board 10 unit 20 unit 30 input unit 200 information processing device 210 arithmetic device 211 arithmetic unit 212 storage unit 214 transmission path 215 input / output interface 220 input / output device 230 display unit 231 display area 234 expansion circuit 235M image processing circuit 235M (1) Region 235M (2) region 238 control unit 240 input unit 241 detection region 250 detection unit 290 communication unit 501B insulating film 501C insulating film 504 conductive film 505 bonding layer 506 insulating film 508 semiconductor film 508A region 508B region 508C region 511B conductive film 511C conductive Film 511D Conductive film 512A Conductive film 512B Conductive film 516 Insulating film 518 Insulating film 518A Insulating film 518B Insulating film 519B Terminal 519C Terminal 519D Terminal 520 Functional layer 521 Edge film 521A Insulating film 521B Insulating film 521C Insulating film 522 Connection portion 524 Conductive film 528 Insulating film 530 (i, j) Pixel circuit 550 (i, j) Display element 551 Electrode 552 Electrode 553 (j) Including luminescent material Layer 560 Optical element 560A Region 560B Region 560C Region 565 Coating film 565A Metal film 565B Translucent film 570 Substrate 591A Opening 591C Opening 592A Opening 592B Opening 592C Opening 700 Display panel 700B Display panel 700TP2 Input / output panel 700TP3 Input / output panel 702 (i, j) Pixel 705 Sealing material 706 Insulating film 720 Functional layer 750 (i, j) Display element 751A Conductive film 751B Reflective film 751C Conductive film 751H Region 752 Electrode 753 Layer 770 containing liquid crystal material 770D Functional film 770P Functional film 771 Insulating film 775 Sensing element 5000 Housing 5001 Display unit 5002 Display unit 5003 Speaker 5004 LED lamp 5005 Operation key 5006 Connection terminal 5007 Sensor 5008 Microphone 5009 Switch 5010 Infrared port 5011 Recording medium reading unit 5012 Support unit 5013 Earphone 5014 Antenna 5015 Shutter button 5016 Image receiver 5017 Charger 6000 Display module 6001 Upper cover 6002 Lower cover 6005 FPC
6006 Display panel 6009 Frame 6010 Printed circuit board 6011 Battery 6015 Light emitting unit 6016 Light receiving unit 6017a Light guiding unit 6017b Light guiding unit 6018 Light 7302 Case 7304 Display panel 7305 Icon 7306 Icon 7311 Operation button 7312 Operation button 7313 Connection terminal 7321 Band 7322 Clasp

Claims (15)

  1.  画素を有し、
     前記画素は、光学素子、被覆膜、第1の表示素子および第2の表示素子を備え、
     前記光学素子は、透光性を備え、
     前記光学素子は、第1の領域、第2の領域および第3の領域を備え、
     前記第1の領域は、可視光を供給される領域を含み、
     前記第2の領域は、前記被覆膜と接する領域を含み、
     前記第3の領域は、前記可視光の一部を射出する機能を備え、
     前記第3の領域は、前記第1の領域の前記可視光を供給される領域の面積以下の面積を備え、
     前記被覆膜は、前記可視光に対する反射性を備え、
     前記被覆膜は、前記可視光の一部を反射して、前記第3の領域に供給する機能を備え、
     前記第1の表示素子は、反射膜を備え、
     前記第1の表示素子は、前記反射膜が反射する光を制御する機能を備え、
     前記反射膜は、前記光学素子の第3の領域が射出する光を遮らない形状を備え、
     前記第2の表示素子は、前記可視光を供給する機能を備える、表示パネル。
    Have pixels,
    The pixel includes an optical element, a coating film, a first display element, and a second display element,
    The optical element has translucency,
    The optical element includes a first region, a second region, and a third region,
    The first area includes an area supplied with visible light;
    The second region includes a region in contact with the coating film,
    The third region has a function of emitting a part of the visible light,
    The third region has an area equal to or smaller than the area of the first region to which the visible light is supplied.
    The coating film has reflectivity for the visible light,
    The coating film has a function of reflecting a part of the visible light and supplying it to the third region,
    The first display element includes a reflective film,
    The first display element has a function of controlling light reflected by the reflective film,
    The reflective film has a shape that does not block the light emitted by the third region of the optical element,
    The second display element has a function of supplying the visible light.
  2.  前記光学素子は、光軸を備え、
     前記光軸は、前記第1の領域の前記可視光が供給される領域の中心および前記第3の領域の中心を通り、
     前記第2の領域は、前記光軸と直交する平面に対し45°以上の傾きを有する傾斜部を備える、請求項1に記載の表示パネル。
    The optical element includes an optical axis,
    The optical axis passes through the center of the first region to which the visible light is supplied and the center of the third region,
    The display panel according to claim 1, wherein the second region includes an inclined portion having an inclination of 45 ° or more with respect to a plane orthogonal to the optical axis.
  3.  前記第2の領域は、前記傾斜部を前記第1の領域の前記可視光を供給される領域の端から0.05μm以上0.2μm以下の範囲に備える、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。 The said 2nd area | region is equipped with the said inclination part in the range of 0.05 micrometer or more and 0.2 micrometer or less from the edge of the area | region where the said visible light of the said 1st area | region is supplied. Display panel.
  4.  前記第1の領域の前記可視光が供給される領域は、前記画素の面積の10%より大きい面積を備え、
     前記第3の領域は、前記画素の面積の10%以下の面積を備え、
     前記反射膜は、前記画素の面積の70%以上の面積を備え、
     前記第1の領域の前記可視光が供給される領域の面積および前記反射膜の面積の和は、前記画素の面積より大きい、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。
    The region to which the visible light of the first region is supplied has an area larger than 10% of the area of the pixel,
    The third region has an area of 10% or less of the area of the pixel,
    The reflective film has an area of 70% or more of the area of the pixel,
    The display panel according to claim 1, wherein a sum of an area of the first region to which the visible light is supplied and an area of the reflective film is larger than an area of the pixel.
  5.  前記第2の領域は、透光性の材料を含み、
     前記透光性の材料は、1.3以上2.5以下の屈折率を備え、
     前記被覆膜は、透光性の膜を備え、
     前記透光性の膜は、前記第2の領域と接する領域を備え、
     前記透光性の膜は、前記第2の領域より低い屈折率を備える、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。
    The second region includes a translucent material;
    The translucent material has a refractive index of 1.3 to 2.5,
    The coating film includes a translucent film,
    The translucent film includes a region in contact with the second region,
    The display panel according to claim 1, wherein the light-transmitting film has a lower refractive index than the second region.
  6.  前記被覆膜は、金属膜を含む、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。 3. The display panel according to claim 1, wherein the coating film includes a metal film.
  7.  前記第1の領域は、前記第3の領域に向けて湾曲した形状を備える、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。 The display panel according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first region has a shape curved toward the third region.
  8.  前記第1の領域は、前記第3の領域から遠ざかる方向に湾曲した形状を備える、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。 The display panel according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first region has a shape curved in a direction away from the third region.
  9.  レンズを備え、
     前記レンズは、前記光学素子と前記第2の表示素子の間に挟まれる領域を備え、
     前記レンズは、1.5以上2.5以下の屈折率を備える材料を含み、
     前記レンズは、凸レンズである、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。
    With a lens,
    The lens includes a region sandwiched between the optical element and the second display element,
    The lens includes a material having a refractive index of 1.5 or more and 2.5 or less,
    The display panel according to claim 1, wherein the lens is a convex lens.
  10.  前記画素は、
     第1の導電膜と、
     第2の導電膜と、
     絶縁膜と、
     画素回路と、を有し、
     前記絶縁膜は、前記第1の導電膜および前記第2の導電膜の間に挟まれる領域を備え、
     前記絶縁膜は、開口部を備え、
     前記第1の導電膜は、前記第1の表示素子と電気的に接続され、
     前記第2の導電膜は、前記第1の導電膜と重なる領域を備え、
     前記第2の導電膜は、前記開口部において前記第1の導電膜と電気的に接続され、
     前記第2の導電膜は、前記画素回路と電気的に接続され、
     前記第2の表示素子は、前記画素回路と電気的に接続され、
     前記第2の表示素子は、前記絶縁膜に向けて光を射出する機能を備え、
     前記第2の表示素子は、前記第1の表示素子を用いた表示を視認できる範囲の一部において前記第2の表示素子を用いた表示を視認できるように配設される、
    請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。
    The pixel is
    A first conductive film;
    A second conductive film;
    An insulating film;
    A pixel circuit,
    The insulating film includes a region sandwiched between the first conductive film and the second conductive film,
    The insulating film includes an opening,
    The first conductive film is electrically connected to the first display element;
    The second conductive film includes a region overlapping with the first conductive film,
    The second conductive film is electrically connected to the first conductive film in the opening,
    The second conductive film is electrically connected to the pixel circuit;
    The second display element is electrically connected to the pixel circuit;
    The second display element has a function of emitting light toward the insulating film,
    The second display element is arranged so that a display using the second display element can be visually recognized in a part of a range where the display using the first display element can be visually recognized.
    The display panel according to claim 1 or 2.
  11.  表示領域を有し、
     表示領域は、一群の複数の画素、他の一群の複数の画素、走査線および信号線を備え、
     前記一群の複数の画素は、前記画素を含み、
     前記一群の複数の画素は、行方向に配設され、
     前記他の一群の複数の画素は、前記画素を含み、
     前記他の一群の複数の画素は、行方向と交差する列方向に配設され、
     前記走査線は、前記一群の複数の画素と電気的に接続され、
     前記信号線は、前記他の一群の複数の画素と電気的に接続される、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネル。
    Has a display area,
    The display area includes a group of a plurality of pixels, another group of a plurality of pixels, a scanning line and a signal line,
    The group of pixels includes the pixels;
    The group of pixels is arranged in a row direction,
    The other group of the plurality of pixels includes the pixel,
    The other group of the plurality of pixels is arranged in a column direction intersecting the row direction,
    The scanning line is electrically connected to the plurality of pixels in the group,
    The display panel according to claim 1, wherein the signal line is electrically connected to the plurality of pixels of the other group.
  12.  請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネルと、
     制御部と、を有し、
     前記制御部は、画像情報および制御情報を供給される機能を備え、
     前記制御部は、前記画像情報に基づいて第1の情報または第2の情報を生成する機能を備え、
     前記制御部は、前記第1の情報および前記第2の情報を供給する機能を備え、
     前記表示パネルは、前記第1の情報および前記第2の情報を供給される機能を備え、
     前記第1の表示素子は、前記第1の情報に基づいて表示する機能を備え、
     前記第2の表示素子は、前記第2の情報に基づいて表示する機能を備える、表示装置。
    A display panel according to claim 1 or 2,
    A control unit,
    The control unit has a function of being supplied with image information and control information,
    The control unit has a function of generating first information or second information based on the image information,
    The control unit has a function of supplying the first information and the second information,
    The display panel has a function of supplying the first information and the second information,
    The first display element has a function of displaying based on the first information,
    The display device having a function of displaying the second display element based on the second information.
  13.  入力部と、表示部と、を有し、
     前記表示部は、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネルを備え、
     前記入力部は、前記表示部と重なる領域を備え、
     前記入力部は、検知領域を備え、
     前記検知領域は、検知素子を備え、
     前記検知素子は、前記画素と重なる領域に近接するものを検知する機能を備える入出力装置。
    An input unit and a display unit;
    The display unit includes the display panel according to claim 1 or 2,
    The input unit includes a region overlapping the display unit,
    The input unit includes a detection area,
    The detection area includes a detection element;
    The input / output device having a function of detecting the detection element close to a region overlapping with the pixel.
  14.  前記検知領域は、制御線および検知信号線を備え、
     前記制御線は、制御信号を供給する機能を備え、
     前記検知信号線は、検知信号を供給される機能を備え、
     前記検知素子は、前記制御線および前記検知信号線と電気的に接続され、
     前記検知素子は、前記画素と重なる領域に近接するものとの距離および前記制御信号に基づいて変化する前記検知信号を供給する機能を備え、
     前記検知素子は、第1の電極と、第2の電極と、を備え、
     前記第1の電極は、前記画素と重なる領域に透光性を有する領域を備え、
     前記第1の電極は、前記制御線と電気的に接続され、
     前記第2の電極は、前記画素と重なる領域に透光性を有する領域を備え、
     前記第2の電極は、前記検知信号線と電気的に接続され、
     前記第2の電極は、前記画素と重なる領域に近接するものによって一部が遮られる電界を、前記第1の電極との間に形成するように配置される、請求項13に記載の入出力装置。
    The detection area includes a control line and a detection signal line,
    The control line has a function of supplying a control signal,
    The detection signal line has a function of supplying a detection signal;
    The detection element is electrically connected to the control line and the detection signal line,
    The detection element has a function of supplying the detection signal that changes based on a distance from an area adjacent to the region overlapping with the pixel and the control signal,
    The sensing element includes a first electrode and a second electrode,
    The first electrode includes a light-transmitting region in a region overlapping with the pixel,
    The first electrode is electrically connected to the control line;
    The second electrode includes a region having translucency in a region overlapping with the pixel,
    The second electrode is electrically connected to the detection signal line;
    14. The input / output according to claim 13, wherein the second electrode is disposed so as to form an electric field partially blocked by an element adjacent to a region overlapping with the pixel, between the first electrode and the first electrode. apparatus.
  15.  キーボード、ハードウェアボタン、ポインティングデバイス、タッチセンサ、照度センサ、撮像装置、音声入力装置、視点入力装置、姿勢検出装置、のうち一以上と、請求項1または請求項2に記載の表示パネルと、を含む、情報処理装置。 One or more of a keyboard, hardware buttons, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an imaging device, a voice input device, a viewpoint input device, and a posture detection device, and the display panel according to claim 1 or 2, Including an information processing apparatus.
PCT/IB2017/052676 2016-09-06 2017-05-09 Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device WO2018047020A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016173284 2016-09-06
JP2016-173284 2016-09-06

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018047020A1 true WO2018047020A1 (en) 2018-03-15

Family

ID=61561872

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2017/052676 WO2018047020A1 (en) 2016-09-06 2017-05-09 Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW201809815A (en)
WO (1) WO2018047020A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114675445A (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-06-28 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display device and application method thereof

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003076302A (en) * 2001-09-06 2003-03-14 Sharp Corp Display device
JP2007004156A (en) * 2005-06-23 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Substrate assembly and display device having the same
JP2011191750A (en) * 2010-02-19 2011-09-29 Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd Liquid crystal display device
JP2016038586A (en) * 2014-08-08 2016-03-22 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel, data processing device, and program
JP2016090783A (en) * 2014-11-04 2016-05-23 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel, method of making display panel, and information processing device
WO2017051289A1 (en) * 2015-09-22 2017-03-30 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003076302A (en) * 2001-09-06 2003-03-14 Sharp Corp Display device
JP2007004156A (en) * 2005-06-23 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Substrate assembly and display device having the same
JP2011191750A (en) * 2010-02-19 2011-09-29 Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd Liquid crystal display device
JP2016038586A (en) * 2014-08-08 2016-03-22 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel, data processing device, and program
JP2016090783A (en) * 2014-11-04 2016-05-23 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel, method of making display panel, and information processing device
WO2017051289A1 (en) * 2015-09-22 2017-03-30 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114675445A (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-06-28 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display device and application method thereof
CN114675445B (en) * 2020-12-25 2023-11-21 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display device and application method thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201809815A (en) 2018-03-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6921575B2 (en) Display panel
JP2018060184A (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP7433493B2 (en) display panel
JP2017207735A (en) Display device, input/output device, information processing device, display method
KR20180007668A (en) Input/output panel, input/output device, and semiconductor device
JP6948841B2 (en) Information processing device and its display method
JP6917222B2 (en) Display device
WO2018185585A1 (en) Display device, input-output device, and information processing device
JP2018059997A (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP6910832B2 (en) Display device, input / output device, information processing device
JP7055592B2 (en) Display panel, display device, input / output device, information processing device
WO2018047020A1 (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP6915977B2 (en) Display panel, display device, input / output device, information processing device
JP2017227829A (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP2018004927A (en) Display device, input/output device, information processing device, and display method
JP2024056788A (en) Display Panel
JP2018072751A (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP2018097025A (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP2017219898A (en) Display device, input/output device, information processing device, and display method
JP2018032288A (en) Input/output device, and information processing device
JP2018112679A (en) Display panel, input/output panel, input/output device, and information processing device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17848220

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17848220

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1